Panasonic Telephone Systems

www.voicesonic.com
Phone: 877-289-2829

Panasonic KX-T123210, KX-T123220, KX-T123230, KX-T123250, KX-T123211D, T123210, T123220, T123230, T123250, T123211D

INSTALLATION
I LLATIO MANUAL
ELECTRONIC MODULAR SWITCHING SYSTEM

ITI 23211 D
EASA-PHONE

Panasonic
Please read this manual before connecting the KX-T123211 D
 C

Thank you for purchasing the Panasonic Model KX-T123211 D,

. )

Electronc Modular Switching System (EMSS).

SYSTEM COMPONENT

Model No. Description

: ,dice unit KX-Tl23211 D Electronic Modular Switching System

I ‘-:_.
~
._: ,; ~._‘
...:‘,::.~~-:_-,
.,,
..‘;,:_-._..: :-.
_.‘
.._..1,.
..;--:...,:‘:‘A:
,.(
,: ‘,’
.. r .../.‘- - :..--_:-:
,- lephone KX-Tl23220 EMSS Proprietary Telephone (12 CO’s)
KX-T123230 EMSS Proprietary Telephone with LCD (12 CO’s)
KX-Tl23235 EMSS Proprietary Telephone with LCD (12 CO’s)
KX-Tl23250 EMSS Proprietary Telephone (12 CO’s)

KX-T61620 EMSS Proprietary Telephone (6 CO’s)

KX-T61630 EMSS Proprietary Telephone with LCD (6 CO’s)
KX-T61631 EMSS Proprietary Telephone with LCD (6 CO’s)
KX-T61650 EMSS Proprietary Telephone (6 CO’s)

KX-T30820 EMSS Proprietary Telephone (3 CO’s)

KX-T30825 EMSS Proprietary Telephone (3 CO’s)
KX-T30830 EMSS Proprietary Telephone with LCD (3 CO’s, 8 DSS’s)
KX-T30850 EMSS Proprietary Telephone (3 CO’s)

Optional KX-T123240 DSS Console (32 DSS’s, 16 Feature buttons)

equipment KX-T61640 DSS Console (16 DSS’s 16 Feature buttons)

KX-T123241 DSS Console Card

KX-T123270 Expansion Card (up to eight extension lines)
KX-Tl23271 Expansion Card (up to four extension lines)
KX-Tl23280 Expansion Card (up to four CO lines)
KX-Tl23281 Expansion Card (up to two CO lines)
KX-T123285 Off Premise Extension Card
KX-T123286 Off Premise Extension Unit
KX-T123291 Direct Inward System Access Card
KX-T123292 Direct Inward System Access Outgoing Message Card
KX-T123295 Diagnostic Card
: ,:.
_.-
KX-T123296 MODEM Card
:& ;.:

KX-T30860D(only) Doorphone Adaptor

KX-T30865 Doorphone
KX-T30890 Headset
KX-A26 Battery Adaptor
::

l-l
 NOTIFY T’HE TELEPHONE COMPANY

Installation must be performed by a qualified professional installer.

Notify the Telephone Company
Before connecting this equipment to any telephone, call the telephone company and inform them of the
following :

Telephone numbers to which the system will be connected ........................................................

Make ........................................................................................................................................... Panasonic
Model ......................... ............................................................................................................... KX-T12321 1 D
FCC Registration No. ................................................................................. See the attach serial No. plate C-J”
the unit
Ringer Equivalence ............................................................................................................................. 0.4B
Facility Interface Code ..................................................................................................................... 02LS2
Service Order Code ............................................................................................................................ .9.OF
Required Network Interface Jack ..................................................................................................... RJ 1 1

Present FCC Regulations prohibit connecting this unit to a party line, or to a coin operated telephone.

Please read the section on “Telephone Company and FCC Requirements and Responsibilities” on page 6-9.

The serial number of this product may be found on the label affixed to the side of the unit. You
should note the serial number of this unit in the space provided and retain this book as a permanent
record of your purchase to aid in identification in the event of theft.

MODEL NO . : KX-T123211 D

SERIAL NO. :

ln this installation Manual, the model No. KX-T123211 D is abbreviated to KX-T12321 I.

:
For your future reference

DATE OF PURCHASE

NAME OF DEALER

DEALER’S ADDRESS
 TABLE OF CONTENTS
Quick Reference .............................................. 1-9
Name and Location ........................................... 2-l
Installation .................................................... 2-l
Connection 2-5
Central Office ‘Li& ‘&$&ttdn ;cO; ;h&uih Sj’ 1: 1: 1: 1: 1: 1: 1: 1: : 1: 1: 2-7
Extension Connection ........................................... 2-8
Polarity Sensitive Telephone Connection ........................... 2-11 .
Printer Connection ............................................. 2-12
Paging Equipment ............................................. 2-14
External Music Source .......................................... 2-14
Option
Feature.. ...................................................... 2-15
Central Office Line ........................................... 2_16
Extension .................................................. 2_,6
Direct Station Select (DSS) Console ............................ 2-17
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) ............................ 2-16
Off Premise Extension (OPX) .................................. 2_22
Doorphone ................................................. 2_22
Diagnostic .................................................. 2_23
Connection
Card Installation ............................................. 2-25
Extension Connection ........................................ 2-26
Central Office Line Connection ................................. 2-27
DSS Console Connection (KX-Tl23240/KX-T61640) ................ 2-29
Off Premise Extension Card ................................... 2-30
Direct Inward System Access Card ............................. 2-31.
Outgoing Message Card ...................................... 2-31
Diagnostic Card ............................................. 2-32
MODEM Card ............................................... 2-32
Doorphone Connection ....................................... 2-33
Battery Adaptor Connection .................................... 2-34
Programming
Programming Instructions .................................. .. .. 3-l
Example of Programming ................................. . ... 3-3

Default
System Feature
Date and Time Setting .................................... . . . . . . 3-4
System Speed Dialing (SSD) Entry ..... has not been stored ..... 3-5

Extension Number Assignment ...... (see rwe) ..... 3-8

Operator Assignment .............. has not been stored ..... 3-9

Paired Telephone Assignment
for DSS Console ........... -_I . . 3-l 0

Automatic CO Hold Using DSS Button .. Automatic Hold ..... 3-11

Day/Night Service Mode
Switching of Service Mode ....... manual mode ..... 3-l 2

Starting Time .................. ..... 3-13

‘ml
Call Hunting
Setting ....................... Disable .... 3-15

Hunting Type. .................. Terminate ..... 3-l 6

Toll Restriction .......................... i ............ ..... 3-17

Area Type Selection ............ .... 3-18

Type A
CO Operator Call-Boundary Class. . Class 1 . . . . .i 3-19
Toll Restriction of System
Speed ,\Dialing ................. Restriction ..... 3-20
----i 1-3
 Allowable Exchange Code Selection . . . 1 has not been stored ..... 3-21

Area Code Entry For CkSs 3 . . . .) has not been stored 1. . . . . . 3-Z

Exchange Code Entry For Class 5 . . 1 has not been stored ....s 3-23 .

Exchange Code Entry For ChSS 7 . . 1 has not been stored 1. . . . .

Hold Time Reminder .............. 1 after 3 minutes ..... 3-25

J

Hold Recall Time Set .............. after 30 seconds .... 3-26

Transfer Recall Time .............. after 30 seconds .... 3-27

Call Forwarding Starting Time ..... 3 rings delay .... 3-28

Pickup Dial Delay Time . .,........ dial after 3 seconds .... 3-29

CO-to-CO Duration Time Limit ...... 10 minutes ..... 3-30

Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) ......... ........... ,3-31

RS-232C Communication
Parameters .................. (see page) .. .. 3-32

SMDR Parameters .............. (see page) .... 3-35

Incoming/Outgoing Call
Selection for printing . . . . . . . . . . .vj .. . 3-36

Secret Speed Dial/One Touch

Dial Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . No Printing . ... 3-36 0
System Data Dump ............. All parameters .... 3-37
3
P
Duration Time Count Start Mode .... 5 seconds after dial ..... 3-40

External Paging Access Tone ....... 1 has been added . . 3-41

Direct Inward System Access ... (seepaw) . . 3-42

Off Premise Extension .. .. Disable . 3-45

Off Hook Call Announcement . ... Enable ... 3-46

System Working Report .... ... Dumo Stat-l 1. . 3-47

Outside Line Feature

CO Connection Assignment ...... . Connect ..... 3-48

Dial Mode (DTMF/PuIse/Call Blocking)

DTMF/PuIse/CalI Blocking Selection . . DTMF mode .... 3-49

Pulse Speed Selection . ... .... Low speed

. . . . . . 3-50

Host PBX Access Codes Assignment ... has not been stored ... . 3-51

Trunk Group Assignment ............. 3-52

(see page)

Flexible Outward Dialing Assignment . . . m,::: 3-53

11::

Flexible Ringing Assignment ..........

 Delayed Ringing Assignment . . .. Immediately 3-56 .

CO Mode (Normal/Direct In Line/Direct

Inward System Access) Assignment .. Normal mode ..... 3-57

Pause Time Assignment .... ... .. 3.5 seconds .... 3-60

Hookswitch Flash Timing ......... .... 600 m seconds ..... 3-61

Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal . .. 350 m seconds ..... 3-62

Disconnect Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5seconds ..... 3-64

Automatic Designated CO Line Access . Enable . .. 3-65

Extension Feature

Extension Group Assignment ..... . I. .... 3-66

Service Class Assignment of

Toll Restriction . ... Class 1 , ... 3-67

Extension Name ...... .. ..... has not been stored ..... 3-69

Account Code Input Mode . . ... Option .. . 3-71

Call Transfer to Outside Line .......... Disable ..... 3-72

Call Forwarding to Outside Line ........ Disable ..... 3-73

Executive Override ................... Disable ..... 3-74

Do not Disturb Override ............... Disable ..... 3-75

Doorphone Feature

Ringing Assignment of Doorphone ... all jack numbers can .... 3-76
be received call

Call on Hold for Standard Telephone ....... Hold-l mode ..... 3-77

System Data Clear ...................... ) All oarameters 1..... 3-78

Example of Flexible CO Button .............. ..... ...... ....... 3-81

1-5
Operation of EMSS Proprietary Telephones
(K&T123235, KX-Tl23230, KX-T123220, KX-Tl23250, KX-T61631, KX-T61630,
KX-T61620, KX-T61650, KX-T30830, KX-T30825, KX-T30820, KX-T30850)
Making Calls
Inter Office Calling (Intercom) ................................... 4-1
Outward Dialing .............................................. 4-2
Speed Dialing ................................................ 4-3
One Touch Dialing ............................................ 4-4
Calling Doorphone ............................................ 4-6
Operator Call ................................................ 4-6
Distinctive Dial Tone ........................................... 4-6

When a Line is Busy

Automatic Call Back Busy (Camp-On) ............................ 4-7
Last Number Redial ........................................... 4-8
Busy Station Signaling ......................................... 4-8
Executive Override (Barge-In) ................................... 4-9

Receiving Calls
Answer ..................................................... 4-l 0
Automatic Answer-Intercom ..................................... 4-10
Dial Call Pickup .............................................. 4-11
Directed Call Pickup ........................................... 4-l 1
CalI Park .................................................... 4-l 2
Doorphone .................................................. 4-13
Distinctive Ring Tone .......................................... 4-13

While Having a Conversation

Call on Hold ................................................. 4-14
Call on Exclusive Hold ......................................... 4-l 5
Conference .................................................. 4-l 6
Privacy Release .............................................. 4-17
Call Transfer-To Extension ...................................... 4-18
Call Transfer-To Outside Line ................................... 4-19
Call Waiting .................................................. 4-20
Call Splitting-Between CO and Intercom .......................... 4-21
Call Splitting-Intercom .......................................... 4-22
Mute Operation ............................................... 4-22
Off Hook Call Announcement (OHCA) ............................. 4-23
Switching between Using Handset and Hands-free ................... 4-23

Paging
All Extensions and External ..................................... 4-24
All Extensions ................................................ 4-24
Group ...................................................... 4-25
External ............................................... . ..... 4-25
Paging And Transfer .......................................... 4-26
Answer ..................................................... 4-26

Use of Other Features

Call Forwarding-All Calls/Busy or No Answer ....................... 4-27
Call Forwarding-To Outside Line ................................. 4-29
Dial Call Pickup Deny ......................................... 4-30
Do Not Disturb ...................................... :. ....... 4-31 -
Do Not Disturb Override ........................................ 4-32
Saved Number Redial ......................................... 4-32

1-6
 Executive Override Deny-into Extension ........................... 4-33
Switching to Tone Alerting ...................................... 4-34
Background Music ............................................ 4-34
Absent Message Capability ..................................... 4-35 .
Message Waiting ............................................. 4-37
Flexible Night Service ......................................... 4-38
External Feature Access 4-39
AccountCode ......... ....................................... 4-40
Data line Security ............................................. 4-42
Call Waiting Tone-From CO/Extension Deny ........................ 4-43
DSS Console (KX-T123240 or KX-T61640) ........................ 4-44
Electronic Station Lock ............................................ 4-46
Statron Status Check .......................................... 4-47
Timed Reminder ................................................. 4-48
Pulse/Tone Conversion ........................................ 4-49
Station Feature Clear ......................................... 4-49
Busy Lamp Field ............................................. 4-50
Power Failure Transfer ......................................... 4-51
Duration Time of Call Display ................................... 4-51
Lockout ..................................................... 4-51
Mixed Station Dialing .......................................... 4-51

Station Programming
One Touch Access for System Features .......................... 4-52
Auto CO Hunting ............................................. 4-53
Automatic Answering Selection .................................. 4-55
Flexible CO Button ............................................ 4-57
Intercom Voice Alerting Mode ................................... 4-60
Flexible DSS Button ........................................... 4-61
CO Line Ringing SeleCtiOn ..................................... 4-62
Date and Time Setting ......................................... 4-63
Call Waiting Tone !%eCtiOn .................................... 4-64
Station Number Check ...................................... 4-64
F3-One Touch Button Mode Selection ......................... ::: 4-65
Station PrOgram Clear ......................................... 4-66
Cancellation of Electronic Station Lock ............................. 4-66
Outgoing Message .............................................. 4-67

Operation of a Standard Telephone

Making Calls ................................................. 5-l
When a Line is Busy .......................................... 5-2
Receiving Calls ............................................... 5-3
While Having a Conversation ................................... 5-4
Paging ...................................................... 5-7
Use of Other Features ......................................... 5-g
Troubleshooting ................................................ 6-l
Table of System Features ........................................ 6-5
List of Tones ................................................... 6-7
List of Ring Tones .............................................. 6-7
Specification ................................................... 6-8
Telephone Company and
FCC Requirements and Responsibilities 6-9
Others ............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 6-10
Phone Number Directory .......................................... 7-1
Programming Table ............................................. 7-3
Index ......................................................... 7-30

1-7
PROGRAMMING FEATURE OUTLINE

Page
Date and Time ................... 3-4
System Speed Dialing ............. 3-5
Extension Number ................ 3-8
Operator ........................ 3-9
DSS Console .................... 3-l 0, 3-l 1
Day/Night Service ................. 3-l 2
Call Hunting ..................... 3-l 5
Toll Restriction ................... 3-17
Hold ........................... 3-25, 3-26
Transfer Recall Time .............. 3-27
Call Forwarding Starting Time ....... 3-28
Pickup Dial Delay Time ............ 3-29
CO-to-CO Duration Time Limit ...... 3-30
Station Message Detail Recording ... 3-31
Duration Time Count Start Mode .... 3-40
External Paging Access Tone .......... 3-41
Direct Inward System Access .......... 3-42
Off Premise Extension ................ 3-45
Off Hook Call Anouncement ............ 3-46
System Working Report ............... 3-47

CO Connection ................... 3-48

Dial Mode (DTMF/Pulse/Call Blocking Mode) . 3-49
Host PBX Access Codes ........... 3-51
Trunk Group ..................... 3-52
Outward Dialing .................. 3-53
Ringing ......................... 3-54
Delayed Ringing .................. 3-56
CO Mode ......................... 3-57
Pause Time ...................... 3-60
Hookswitch Flash Timing ............ 3-61
Calling Party Control Signal ......... 3-62
Disconnect Time .................... 3-64
Automatic Designated CO Line Access 3-65

Extension Group .................. 3-66

---E
Service Class of Toll Restriction ..... 3-67
Extension Name .................. 3-69
Extension Account Code .................... 3-71’
Call Transfer/Call Forwarding ....... 3-72, 3-73
Executive Override ................ 3-74
Do not Disturb Override ............ 3-75
.
................................. 3-76

Call on Hold for Standard Telephone .. 3-77

System Data Clear ................ 3-78

1-8
 INSTALLATION (Quick Reference)

(See page 2-7)

modular jack-

For earth ground, see page 2-2.

(See page 2-3)

l To Terminal Board or Modular Jacks from
1. Place the templet (included) on the wall the Central Office (CO).
to mark the 3 screw positions.

2. Install the 3 screws into the wall.

3. Hook the unit on the screw heads.

(See page 2-8)
0 To use a screw-attach-type 50 pin connector.

- &r::.-s .‘.... -__+

templet

m___ _ _... +
El

(See page 2-4)

1. Unscrew the front cover of the unit.

There are four screws. To Extensions (jack number 9 through 16)
2. Open the front cover in the direction of To Extensions (jack number 1 through 8)
the arrow @.

Proprietary Telephone
26 AWG: Under 460 feet
24AWG: Under 750 feet Twisted cable
(See page 2-4)
22 AWG: Under1 180. feet I

Standard Telephone

J
26 AWG: Under 2290 feet
24 AWG: Under 3700 feet
22 AWG: Under 5900 feet
1
1
Twisted cable
Cable Pin Numbers to be connected
n Connection of the Proprietary Telephone Connection of the KX-Tl23235 (Proprietary
(4-conductor wiring is required for each Telephone) (6-conductor wiring is required for
extension.) each extension.)
Connect the pin number of “T”, “PI”, “Dl” and
“D2” only.

LC-3 I LC-4
T T
R R
JACK Dl JACK pf
No.17 p2 No.25 D2
Pl Pl
P2 P2
T T
8 R R R R
9 JACK D1 JACK Dt JACK D1 JACK pt
10 No.2 ;; No.10 ;: No.18 ;: No.26 ;:
11
12 P2 P2 P2 P2
-
13 T T T T
7 ORN-RED 14 R R R R
33 RED-GRN 15 JACK Dt JACK pt JACK D1 JACK p1
8 GRN-RED 16 No.3 E: No.11 ;: No.19 ;: No.27 ;:
34 RED-BRN 17

l--i9 BRN-RED P2 P2 P2 P2
35 RED-SLT IT 1 ! T T T
R R
JACK p1 JACK p1
No.20 ;: No.28 ;:
P2 P2
T T
R R
BLK-BRN 27 JACK Dl JACK Dt JACK n1 JACK D’
BRN-BLK 28 D2
No.5 No.13 ;: No.21 ;; No.29 ;;
BLK-SLT 29 Pl
SLT-BLK 30 P2 P2 P2 P2
41 YEL-BLU 31 T T T T
16 BLU-YEL 32 R R R R
42 YEL-ORN 33 JACK Dl JACK pt JACK D! JACK p1
17 ORN-YEL 34 No.6 D2 No.14 D2 No.22 p2 No.30 p2
43 YEL-GRN 35 Pi PI PI PI
18 GRN-YEL 36 P2 P2 P2 P2
YEL-BRN 37 T T T T
BRN-YEL 38 R R R R
YEL-SLT 39 JACK Dl JACK Dl JACK Dl JACK Dl
No.23 ;: No.31 ;:
P2 P2
T T

JACK :I JACK :I
No.24 ;: Nb.32 D2
PI
24 1 BRN-VI0 1 48 1 P2 P2 P2 P2
50 1 VIO-SLT 1 4g 1
1 25 1 SLT-VI0 1 50 I

T : Tip Dl : Data 1 Pl : 3 Pair Voice

R : Ping D2 : Data 2 P2 : 3 Pair Voice

w Connection of a Standard Telephone c

(2-conductor wiring is required for each
extension.)
Connect the pin number of “T” and “R”
only.

l-10
 (See page 2-12.) (see page 2-14.) KX-M 23211
Paging
Speaker
jack 1
Amplifier

w:l-l” 000 I/=====

Paging Equipment 1
KX-T123211
Paging
Serial Printer jack 2
Serial Interface
(RS232C)
Paging Equipment 2 u
l Cables must be shielded and the maximum
length is 6.5 feet.
Connection Chart: (See page 2-14.)
KX-T123211 RS-232C Printer RS-232C
External Music Sour
Zrcuit
Type Signal Pin
Name No.
WV

AA FG 1 -
BA TXD 2 - EXT hiusic Jack

t-l-
BB RXD 3 - 2 TXD BA
CB CTS 5

cc DSR 6 20 DTR CD
AB SG 7 - 7 SG AB

I 4
5
6
a
CTS
DSR
DCD
CB
CC
CF

Communication parameters
If the Panasonic printer which is used has a
(KX- Pl 1 D or KX- P17) board and is connected
to the KX-T123211, set the communication
parameters the followina.

7bit SWl-1
(default)

Program to SWl-2 ON SWl-5 OFF

“EVEN ”
(see page
3-32.) SWl-3 ON SWl-6 OFF

Baud 12008 SW15 ON SWl-1 OFF

Rate (default) SWl-6 OFF SWi-2 OFF
SWl-7 OFF SWl-3 ON
swl-a OFF

Protocol / fO~COO,,, ~2-a OFF SWl-6 ON

The optional cards are following.

1. To protect the printed circuit board from

Model No Description
static electricity, first discharge any body
Ixpansion Cards static by touching the metal board.
2. Loosen the screws to remove the metal
KX-T123270 This card adds 8 Extensions. board.
3. The location of the optional cards for the
KX-T123211 is shown in the following.
KX-T123271 This card adds 4 Extensions.
metal board

KX-Tl23280 rhis card adds 4 CO’s.

KX-T123281 rhis card adds 2 CO’s

1% Console Card
The DSS Console requires the
KX-Tl23241 ISS Console Card for the
Iperation.
Sciews
Iff Premise DISA-A Card
Ixtension (OPX) Card KX-Tl23291
KX-T123285 Enables a Standard telephone MODEM Card
\
nstalled outside the premise tc KX-T12329ti
DISA OGM

I
Hf Premise work as well as an extension. Card Diagnostic Card
Ixtension (OPX) Unit KX-T123292 KX-T123295
KX-T123286 \ /
\
DISA -I
Direct Inward System Card
kcess (DISA) Cards Enables to access System from KX-T 1
outside of System.
KX-T123291
.OPX Card
KX-T123285
Outgoing Message
In case access from outside by
Card
installed this card, enable to sent
KX-T123292 the recorded Message instead of
dial tone.

Diagnostic Card
Diagnosis of System can be
KX-T123295 done.

MODEM Card
This card is necessary for data
KX-T123296 communication with remote.

Expansion Card KX-Tl23280 (4 CO’s)

KX-T123270 (8 Extensions.) KX-T123281 (2 CO’s)
KX-T123271 (4 Extension’s)

1-12
 Extension Connection DSS Console Connection
(Jack number 17 through 32) (KX-T123240 / KX-T61640) ‘.

(See page 2-26.) (See page 2-29.)

7
Optional Expansion Card
Optional DSS Console Card
KX-T123270 (8 Extension’s)
KX-T123241 \
KX-Tl23271 (4 Extension’s)

II II

Jack no. -I I i l+Jack no.

50 pin 17 through 24 ” ’’ 2.5 through 32
(Amphenol 57JE

To Extensions (jack number 2.5 through

\ 28, or 25 through 32)

To Extensions (jack number 17 through

20, or 17 through 24)
Pair Telephone DSS Console,

r
Y

Central Office Line Connection pair

(CO9 through 12)
(See page 2-31.) lThe DSS Console (KX-Tl23240 or
Optional Expansion Card KX-T61640) needs a paired Telephone (EMSS
KX-Tl23280 (4 CO’s) Proprietary Telephone) for proper operation,
KX-Tl23281 (2 CO’s) because the DSS console cannot work by
\[
itself.
lWhen using the DSS Console, program must
be done. See page 3-10.

modular
jack

Use 2-conductor
wiring cord
\

To Terminal Board or Modular Jacks

from the Central Office (CO).
l-13
 a
.Off Premise Extension Direct Inward System Access $I
(OPX) Card (KX-T123285) Card (KX-T123291) !

(See page 2-30.) (See page 2-31.)

Off Premise
Direct Inward System Access Cards
Extension Card
KX-T123291
(KX-Tl23285)
DISA-IS Card DISA-A Card

Outgoing Message Card

Off Premise Extension Unit
(KX-T123292)
KX-T123286
\ (for Direct Inward System Access)
Power Switch
I \ II
OPX-1 OPX-2 (See page 2-31.)

Outgoing Message
Card KX-T123292

\
Jack number 32
Jack number 31
\ /4
Use 2-conductor wiring cord

0 Programming must be done to use this feature.

Refer to “Off Premise Extension” on page 3-45. l For how to record Outgoing Message, refer to
“Outgoing Message” on page 4-67. .’

I-14
 Diagnostic Card Doorphone Connection I
(KX-T123295) (See page 2-33.)

(See page 2-32.)

Diagnostic Card

adaptor connector 4-conductor wiring

into connector on

w The following optional cards are necessary.

On-site administration
l Diagnostic Card KX-T 23295

Remote administration
l Diagnostic Card KX-T 23295
_)’
l Direct Inward System Access Cards
KX-T123291 26 AWG : Under 230 feet
24 AWG : Under 370 feet Twisted cable
l MODEM Card KX-T123296
22 AWG : Under 590 feet

r
(See page 2-32.)
MODEM Card
(KX-T123296) I
1Battery Adaptor Conmction (KX-A26)
(See page 2-34.)
1

KX-T123211

MODEM Card
KX-T123296

\
1
Automobil type batteries

0 Consisting of two 12 VDC (24 VDC)

1-15
 PROGRAMMING (Quick Reference)
Svstem
_ Feature
PROGRAM
PAGE
i-0 SET ADDRESS
STEPS REQUIRED TO CHANGE PROGRAM DEFAULT FOR PROGRAb

late and Time

&zi@QiLq~FYl
l.....minute : . . . . . .AM , PM

System Speed
3ialing Entry

Nothing is stored

Trunk Group
... . . . . . . . . ..Speed accesscode(OOthrough99)

Extension 101 : jack number 01

Number l!l2 : jack number 02
Assignment
:.....dial the extension number (lOOthrough 199) 3-8 7-3
131 : jack number 31
:.........,until the desired jack number appears 132 : jack number 32

Dperator
Assignment m ~&$$&l~
i. dial the jack number which is set operator (01 through 32)
Nothing is stored 3-9 7-3
. . . ..- until the desired operator number appears

Paired Telephone
m lNEXTllNEXTl~&zKllhllEMORY~lNFXTlICD
Assignment for jack number 01
XS Console .....’ jack number paired : console 1 3-10 7-3
with console 2 jack number 02
: console 2
. . . . jack number paired with console 1

4utomatic CO
bfoJsing DSS m kd k&d m m With Transfer 3-11 7-3
“““With Transfer I Without Transfer

Day/Night Service
Mode la Lay-m Manual 3-12 7-4
. . . . ..Manual / Automatic

Service Mode

Starting Time f- until the desired day of the week appears

m ti ml @mFmb;r FCl; Day Service

I : 9:OOAM
! - minute !--AM 1 PM Night Service
: 5:OOPM
L starting time for day service (hour)
every day of
the week
Starting time for night service (hour) >

. .

1-16
 ,
PROGRAM ,. PAGE
TO SET ADDRESS
STEPS REQUIRED TO CHANGE PROGRAM DEFAULT
FOR PROGRA
DETAILS TABLE

:all Hunting
I
la m+ all 8 extension
Setting y=MM
!.......... Disable / Enable groups : Disable 3-15 7-4
:......-
until the desired extension group number appears

Hunting Type la kza

. . . . . ..Terminate / Circular all 8 extension
groups : Terminate 3-16 7-4
:....
until the desired extension group number appears

‘011Restriction
h lNEXTl_lNlEMORYI
Area Type Type A 3-18 7-5
Selection I...... Type A I Type 0 I Type C

CO Operator
hll lNEXTlLqzizFl~
Call-Boundary Class 1 3-19 7-5
Class ‘.........dial the boundary class number (1 through 8)

Toll Restriction
11 lNEXTllSELECTllkzKK-lI[
of System Speed 3-20 7-5
Restriction
Dialing :...... Restriction! No restriction

+ I
Allowable m IN INEXTI lG%J ~MWI~FW I m
Exchange Code Nothing is stored 3-21 7-5
:.....exchangecodewith3digits
Selection
:....‘....‘until the desired memory code number appears

;re;li;;; Entry a IN k$ =I IMEM~RY 1m

i....- area code with 3 digits Nothing is stored 3-22 7-5
:..........
until the desired memory code number appears

Exchange Code + I
Entry for Class 5 IjJ IN INEXT~ ~ IMEMOFW I~
-..‘.- exchange code with 3 digits Nothing is stored 3-23 7-6

:..........
until the desired memory code number appears

I
Exchange Code ~ IMEMORY] ~
Entry for Class 7
:.....exchange code with 3 digits
Nothing is stored 3-24 7-6

:.........,
until the desired memory code number appears

1-17
 PAGE
TO SET PROGRAM STEPS REQUIRED TO CHANGE PROGRAM DEFAULT FOR PROGRAI
ADDRESS
DETAILS TABLE

Direct Inward (Control code “ x”)

System Access 1311
(DISA) jKFlISELECTIFlYEMORYl Enable -

:....- Enable / Disable

3-42 7-10
(Prolong time)

lNEXTlISELECT1FJMEMORY1 5 minutes

:....- 2 min / 3 min / 4 min / 5 min

(Answer delay time)

10 seconds
(NEXTIISELECTIFlUEMORYl

:....- 0 set / 5 set I 10 set I 15 set

(Tone detect)

lNEXTlISELECTIFFKiq Enable

‘....- Enable / Disable

(Security type)

LNEXTlISELECTIFlMEMORYl Trunk Security

‘....- None Security / Trunk Security

I All Security

(Remote security code)

Remote Code: 70000
lNEXTI_No.

:....- 4 digits (0000 through 9999)

(User security code)

NEXT SELECT
00~~00 SELECT CODENo MEMORY END
User Code I:60000
:....- 4 digits (0000 through 9999)
User Code 2:60000

:..... User Code 1 / User Code 2 User Code 3:60000

User Code 3 / User Code 4 User Code 4:60000

Oft Premise
Extension lNEXT~lKK-RvlIKil Disable
b21
3-45 7-11
:..... Disable / Enable

Ott Hook Call

Announcement HFIYEMORYIlENOl Enable
b31
(OHCA) 3-46 7-l 1
:..... Disable I Enable

System
Working IKFl~lKzllENDl Dump Start
Kzl 3-47 7-l 1
Report
:....- Dump Start I Dump Stop / SWR Data Clear .

1-18
 TO SET ;E;;,” PRO G RAM M I N-G P;~;;M

Hold Time SMDR

Reminder El Refer to page 3-25 7-6 RS-232C
Refer to page 3-32 7-7
I I I Communication lzl
Parameters
Hold Recall
Time Set h Refer to page 3-26 7-6
I I I SMDR
lzl Refer to page 3-35 7-8
Parameters
Transfer
Recall la Refer to page 3-27 7-6 Incoming/
Time I I Outgoing Call
lzl Refer to page 3-36 7-8
Selection for
Call Forwarding printing
Starting Time lzl Refer to page 3-28 7-7
Secret Speed
Pickup Dial
Dial/One Touch a Refer to page 3-36 7-8
7-7 Dial Printing
Delay Time I El I Refer to page 3-29

System Data
co-to-co Dump El Refer to page 3-37
Duration Time Refer to page 3-30 7-7 I I I 7-g I
Limit
Duration Time
External Paging Count Start Mode Refer to page 3-40
Access Tone lzil Refer to page 3-41 7-9
I I

Outside Line Feature

PROGRAM PAGE
TO SET ADDRESS
STEPS REQUIRED TO CHANGE PROGRAM DEFAULT FOR PROGRAM
DETAILS TABLE

CO Connection c I
Assignment m ~ INEXTI lsELECTl IMEMORY I lENol
all CO’s : Connect 3-48 7-12
*‘.‘......“.- Connect / Not Connect
:........until the desired CO number appears

Dial Mode
DTMF ! Pulse / lzil mI$z+z=la
Call Blocking .-.-.......DTMF I Pulse I Call Blocking all Co’s : DTMF 3-49 7-12
Selection
*..........until the desired CO number appears

Pulse Speed
Selection 14 Ifi&VEl
all CO’s : Low Speed S-50 7-12
:........a. Low Speed / High Speed
i.........'
until the desired CO number appears

Trunk Group Trunk-G1 : CO 1

14 lNEXrlINEXiJq&zl~ Trunk-G2 : CO 2
Assignment
Trunk-G3 : CO 3
s...*..... dial the trunk group number (1 through 8) Trunk-G4 : CO 4
s...... until the desired CO number appears Trunk-G5 : CO 5 3-52 7-13
Trunk--G6 : CO 6
Trunk-G7 : CO 7
Trunk-G8 : CO 8, CO 9
co1o,co11
co 12

i-19
 PAGE
TO SET PROGRAM
ADDRESS
STEPS REQUIRED TO CHANGE PROGRAM DEFAULT
- FOR PROGRAI
DETAILS TABLE

other CO number
-lexible
other jack number
3utward Dialing 1 t I
Yssignment IGI =@ I.@- IrdEW~yIGGl
Day Mode all jack : Enable
:......Enable / Disable numbers 3-53 7-14

:......until the desired jack number appears

:......-until the desired CO number appears

other CO number
other jack number
1 + I
Night Mode ‘Gl Ga ‘NYXT’ ‘9V ~oRy”F~ all jack : Enable
:......Enable / Disable
numbers 3-53 7-15

:......until the desired jack number appears

:......-until the desired CO number appears

other CO number
-lexible Ringing other jack number
4ssignment 1 + I
Day Mode m = k;XT’ ‘3Y lMHWRy”FUJ all jack : Enable
:......Enable I Disable numbers 3-54 7-16

:......until the desired jack number appears

:......-until the desired CO number appears

other CO number
other jack number
f I
Night Mode IzJ ~&‘4~lMHYlQUW all jack : Enable
numbers 3-54 7-17
:......Enable / Disable

:......until the desired jack number appears

:......-untilthedesiredCOnumberappears

>O Mode
Normal/DIUDISA) l Selecting “Normal” or “DISA” mode
1511
lssignment
+ I
Day Mode
lrJFXT’
‘y(TI T lbm9ORY hd
. ... .. ... .. ... Normal
, DlSA
:........until the desired CO number appears
all CO’s : Normal 3-57 7-22

l Selecting “DIL” mode

I
=+ v p-RYI~
. . DIL ........... Dial jack number
..........’ until the desired CO number appears

Night Mode W l Selecting “Normal” or “DISA” mode

+
W INE~TI LSS IME~~ORYI m
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Normal , ,,lSA . .

i........until the desired CO number appears

all CO’s : Normal 3-57 7-22
. Selecting “DIL” mode

+ I
INEXTl~ ISELECT~ m Iw
IMEMORY
... DIL !. ... . ... .. Dialjacknumber
..........’ until the desired CO number appears
I -3n
 TO SET I,$;:;2 1 PROGRAM MING ( P;;;~J

Host PBX Access

Codes El Refer to page 3-51 7-12
Assignment

Delayed Ringing 7-18 Calling Party

1
Assignment Refer to page 3-56 7-19 Control (CPC) m Refer to page 3-62 7-23
149)
Dav Mode Signal
I I I

Refer to page 3-56 7-20

Night Mode EEI Refer to page 3-64 7-24
I I 7-21
I I I

Pause Time
(53( Refer to page 3-60 7-23 Refer to page 3-65 7-24
Assignment I I

Extension Feature

TO SET tOGRAM
)DRESS
STEPS REQUIRED TO CHANGE PROGRAM D EFAU LT
FOR OGRAh
1
ETAILS -ABLE

fxtension t I
Sroup IEI [NFXTI + g hVMoRYlkk4Jd : EXT
all jack GRP-1 3-66 7-25
issignment :..... dial the extension group number (1 through 8) numbers
i-......until the desired jack number appears

Service Class I
Yssignment of IiEl ~ + @ ~F~O~Y 1l-d all jack : Class 1
3-67 7-25
roll Restriction i.... dial the service class number (1 through 8) numbers

Day Mode ;.......until the desired jack number appears

I
Night Mode El q [MEMORY I~ all jack : Class 1
3-67 7-26
:....-dial the service class number (1 through 8) numbers

:.......until the desired jack number appears

Zall Transfer t I
To Outside Line m ‘““‘yv-w
all jack
numbers
: Disable
3-72 7-27
;- Enable / Disable
i.......until the desired jack number appears

Zall Forwarding
-0 Outside Line la all jack : Disable 7-27
numbers
:- Enable / Disable
;.......until the desired jack number appears

Excecutive I
Override El [m IMFM~RY I lENDl all jack : Disable 7-27
numbers
:- Enable / Disable
i.. . . . . . until the desired jack number appears

Do not Disturb
Override El all jack : Disable 7-28
*......- Enable / Disable numbers
‘.....’ until the desired jack number appears

l-21
 I I I I I I I

TO SET ;;;;g PROG RAM M IN G ““,“,E TO SET ;;;;$F PROGRAMMING ‘~2

Ringing
Extension Assignment
IGI Refer to page 3-69 7-26 lrel Refer to page 3-76 7-28
Name of Doorphone
Day Mode /

Night Mode 1711 Refer to page 3-76 7-29

PI ;E
TO SET ROGRAM STEPS REQUIRED TO CHANGE PROGRAM DEFAULT
DDRES.5 FOd ROGRAI
2EwL

System Data l All Parameters

Clear IEI 0 System Parameter All Parameters
l Speed Dial
+ 1
m[ ISELECT~ IMEMORY I m 3-78
.......’ All Para / System Para / CO Para / EXT Paral
DSS Para / Speed Dial
0 CO Parameter
+ I
IEEl T - l@l k!dFMoRy’ IENd
:.....dial CO number (01 through 12)

:......... until the CO Para appears

l EXT Parameter
I
=v-&J-w
:.... dial jack number (01 through 32)
:..........until the EXT Para appears
l DSS Parameter

i....-dial DSS number (1 or 2)

-........- until the DSS Para appears

l-22
 OPERATION FOR EMSS PROPRIETARY TELEPHONE
(Quick Reference)

MAKING CALLS -
l Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE button first. For further
l After finishing your conversation, hang up the handset or details, see
press the SP-‘PHONE button. page
below

INTER OFFICE CALLING

Dial extension no. (100 through 199) 4- 1
(Intercom)

OUTWARD DIALING
4-2
Individual Line Access

Automatic Line Access 4-2

Individual Trunk
Group Access
4-3

SPEED DIALING Dial speed access code (00 through 99) 4-3

ONE TOUCH DIALING (Press the PROGRAMMABLE 4-4

FEATURE button.)

WHEN A LINE IS BUSY

AUTOMATIC CALL BACK
BUSY
For Outside Calls

For Intercom Calls

BUSY STATION
SIGNALING 4-8

LAST NUMBER REDIAL

Fim 4-8

EXECUTIVE OVERRIDE
(Barge-in)
Into Extension

Into CO 4-9

l-23
 RECEIVING CALLS

ANSWER

DIAL CALL PICKUP

WHILE HAVING A CONVERSATION

CALL ON HOLD To leave a call on hold

I
To retrieve I
I
(Outside calls on hold) ; (Intercom call on hold)

l at the holding extension I l at the holding extension 4- 14

q
i l from another extension
l from another extension ,

q
b flashing
[ in red
slowly
] 1
I
m

CONFERENCE
4- 16

CALL TRANSFER-
TO EXTENSION
To Transfer after the 4- 18
Other Extension Answers

TO OUTSIDE LINE
To transfer after the
Other Outside party 4- 19
Answers

CALL WAITING p-Ez&-j~)piLiKGq

To leave the Original while original call is on hold
Call on Hold and Talk to 4 - 20
l To terminate the original call and talk to the new caller,
the New Caller
you need not to press the HOLD button.

PAGING
Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE button first.
I
PAGING ALL
EXTENSIONS 4 - 24
To Access

PAGING GROUP
To Access

ANSWER
To Paging through 4 - 26
Built-in Speaker
I
1-24
 OTHER FEATURES
l Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE button first.
l After hearing confirmation tone (1 or 2 beeps), hang up the handset or press the SP-PHONE button.

ZALL FORWARDING Setting

All Calls

4 - 27
Busy or No Answer Setting

To Outside Line (You may dial 81 through 88 instead of 9)

4 - 29

To cancel
4 - 27
4 - 29

I
DIAL CALL PICKUP DENY Setting ! To cancel
4 - 30

i
DO NOT DISTURB Setting I To cancel
4 - 31

DO NOT DISTURB
3VERRIDE ~~~~1 4-32

Setting
4BSENT MESSAGE
ZAPABILITY Messagel. “Will Return Soon”

Message2. “Gone Home”

4 - 35
Message3. “At Ext 1extension no.1 ”

To cancel

MESSAGE WAITING
To Leave the Message.

To Call the extension

which sent the message
from the Extension which
the Message is left.

To Cancel the Message At the extension

which is left in the
extension.
l-25
 OTHER FEATURES (CONT.)

I
FLEXIBLE NIGHT SERVICE Setting i To cancel
(Extension of jack no
01 only)
Programming Dialing
SAVED NUMBER REDIAL
4 - 32

TIMED REMINDER Setting

4 - 48

_---------------__----a_____________
1 To confirm the setting time
To cancel

STATION FEATURE @Following features can be canceled. Dial Call

Pickup Deny, Do Not Disturb, Call Forwarding,
CLEAR Call Waiting Tone Deny, Data Line Security, 4 - 49
Absent message capability,Background Music,
Executive Override Deny-into Extension,
Message Waiting, Timed Reminder.

STATION PROGRAMMING
l Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the SP-PHONE button is off.
l Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary telephone to “PROGRAM” first.
l After programming, return the MEMORY switch to “SET”.

AUTO CO HUNTING Setting ITo cancel

Prime Line Preference- 4 - 53
Outgoing

Idle Line Preference- Setting ~TOcancel

Outgoing

AUTOMATIC ANSWERING Setting ITo cancel

SELECTION 4 - 55
Prime Line Preference-
Incoming
I

No Line Preference- fTo cancel

Incoming 4 - 56
 STATION PROGRAMMING (cont.)

FLEXIBLE CO BUTTON
To change into other 4-- 57
CO button

To assign into trunk

group access button 4 - 57

To change into DSS

button 4 - 58

To change into other

all CO button 4 - 59

To change into message

waiting button 4 - 59
III

Setting (Voice call) i To cancel (Signal call)

INTERCOM VOICE
ALERTING MODE 4 - 60

CO LINE RINGING
SELECTION pgpqm
(01 through 12) 4 - 62

OUTGOING MESSAGE To record

[Extension of jack on 01 only)

4 -67
To play back only

(Will hear message)

STATION NUMBER
CHECK 4 - 64

F&ONE TOUCH BUTTON

MODE SELECTION
4 - 65
(for KX-T30850, KX-T30825,
“2”: for DND/ FWD/Account code
KX-T61650, KX-T123250)

STATION PROGRAM
CLEAR
0 Following programs can be reset to the default data. 4 - 66
Auto CO Hunting, Automatic Answering Selection,
Intercom Voice Alerting Mode, CO Line Ringing
Selection, Call Waiting Tone Selection, F3-One Touch
Button Mode Selection.
 NAME AND LOCATION

Reset Button-, Alarm Indicator

Day Indicator

Power Indicator

Power Switch
External Music Jack
. Battery Backup
EIA Connector Connector
(RS-232C)

INSTALLATION
Installation

Cautions
l Avoid installing in the following places. (Doing so may result in malfunction, noise, or discoloration.)
1. In direct sunlight and hot, cold, or humid places. (Temperature range:32”F-104°F)
2. Sulfuric gases produced in areas where there are thermal springs, etc. may damage the equipment or
contacts.
3. Places in which shocks or vibrations are frequent or strong.
4. Dusty places, or places where water or oil may come into contact with the unit.
5. Near high-frequency generating devices such as sewing machines or electric welders.
6. On or near computers, telexes, or other office equipment, as well as microwave ovens or air conditioners.
(It is preferable not to be installed in the same room with the above equipment_)
7. Install at least 6 feet from televisions. (both the electronic modular switching system and EMSS proprietary
telephones)
8. Do not obstruct area around the electronic modular switching system. (for reasons of maintenance and
nspection-be especially careful to allow space for cooling above and at the sides of the electronic modular
switching system)

Wiring
Cautions
1. Do not wire the telephone cable in parallel with an AC power source, computer, telex, etc. If the cables are
run near those wires, shield the cables with metal tubing or use shielded cables and ground the shields.
2. If cables are run on the floor, use protectors or the like to protect the wires where they may be stepped
on. Avoid wiring under carpets.
3. Avoid using the same 120 VAC power supply outlet for computers, telexes, and other office equipment.
Otherwise, the KX-T123211’s system operation may be interrupted by the induction noise from such
. .
equipments.
4. Please use one pair telephone wire for extension connection of (telephone) equipments such as standard telephone,
data terminal, answering machine, COmpUter etc., except proprietary telephone (KX-Tl23230, KX-T123220,
KX-T123250 etc.,).

2-l
 1. Unscrew the front cover of the unit. screws
There are four screws.

2. Open the front cover in the screws

direction of arrow @ =0

When a power failure takes place, there is no memory loss except for the camp-on, saved number redial, the last
number redial, Call park and Message waiting. During power failure, memory is protected by 21 day rechargeable battery.
rechargeable battery.

1. Connect the battery (included) as shown

(Fig.1)

2. Install the battery into the battery

compartment. (Fig.2)
Fig.1.
l Replace the battery every 5 years

with (P-OlH-F2Gl). To remove

connector, depress the lock to release

and slide (pull) apart connector. (Fig3)

depress

Fig.3

2-4
 CONNECTION

l The Power Switch of the KX-T123211 must be off during wiring.

After all the wiring are completed, turn the Power Switch ON.
o Mis-Wiring may cause the KX-T123211 to operate improperly.
Refer to “During Installation” page 6-l and “During Connection” page e-2.
l 50 pin configuration and Color coding
(Refer to page 2-10.)
l Max. length and kind of wire
(Refer to pages 2-8; 2-29, 2-30 and 2-34.)
l Insertion of Option Card
(Refer to page 2-25.)
0 Connection of printer
(Refer to page 2-12.)
0 If an extension does not operate properly (for example : The LCD of the KX-T123235/KXYT123230/KX-T61 631/
KX-T61630/KX-T30830 does not display properly.), disconnect the telephone from the extension line and then
connect again, or turn OFF the power switch of the KX-T123211 and then ON again.

l This product is equipped with a 3-wire grounding type plug, a plug having a third (grounding) pin. This plug
will only fit into a grounding-type power outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug
into the outlet, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the purpose of the
grounding-type plug.
l In areas of frequent electrical storms and/or power failures, we recommend for additional equipment
protection, surge protectors such as TELESPIKE BLOK MODEL TSB (TRIPPE MFG. CO.), SPIKE BLOK
MODEL SK6-0 (TRIPPE MFG. CO.), Super MAX’” (PANAMAX) or MPl (ITW LINX).

Paging Speaker 1

0 Avoid using the same AC outlet for

office equipment and KX-T123211.
Use dedicated AC outlet only.

Paging Speaker 2 AC Surge Protector

.Batterv Adaotor KX-A26

Automobil type
_ batteries
Radio
0 Consisting of two 12VDC (24VDC)
I I .

2-5
 ti Off Premise Extension Unit Standard Telephone

‘;I
&

r__________-___-__________,

I I
I I
I I
I I (C.O. Surge Protector) 2 of 32 extensions
I I
I I
I I
I I
I
I
: 2 ; Initial
_--_

12 CO Lines toC06 1
r ----~-~~~---~~---__--~~~
7
____---___---, I toco7 - 1
. r----------- I
I I i
I I I toC08 I
I I I
I I toco9
I
10 addition
I I I
I I to co
I I
I I I
I I I
taco 11 I
I I I to co 12 _ I
i KX-Tl23240 I
KX-T61640 ; I I
i___________________--_i L_______________________-_i

32Extension Lines extension connected

1
16 Extension Lines=lnitial to jack number 1

(two
~---~~~--~--~~----~~~--,
(one pair) 116 Extension Lines.addition l
L_-____________________~

c pair)

KX-T61631 KX-Tl23230 or KX-Tl23235

Standard
Telephone (two pair) 0 Extension connected jack
KX-T30830
number 1 must always be a
:two pair)
KX-Tl23230 or KX-T123235.

KX-T61630
(two pair)
KX-T30820
Data Terminal
(two pair) KX-T123235

KX-T61620
(two oair)
KX-T30850
KX-Tl23220
:twq pair)
Phone

KX-T61650

KX-T30825 KX-T123250
Telephone
with Answering I ; l Parallel connections of telephone
I I
: need Optional Cards or Adaptor
Machine L--J is impossible.
0 When the KX-T30830 is connected to the KX-T123211, enter
“DSS Number” or “One Touch Dialing Button” to DSS button.
See page 4-61.
2-6
l We recommend that telephone CO jack is used RJll.

Insert the modular plug of the telephone

line cord (2-conductor wiring) into the

modular jack on the KX-T123211.

R : Ring
T : Tip

View of TEL Jack (CO)

To Terminal Board or Modular Jacks

G7
from the Central Office (CO).

\
Use 2-conductor

wiring cord

l Mis-connection may cause the KX-T123211 to operate improperly.

See “During Installation” page 6-1 and “During Connection” page 6-2
before connecting. co
co
co
co

2-7
To connect jack number 1 through 8 and 9
through 16, insert connector to the KX-T123211
as shown right.
Jack no Jack no
1 through 8 - 9 through 16
K K

Connector type
50 pin (Amphenol 57JE
series or the equivalent)

To Extensions (jack number 1 through 8)

+
To Extensions (jack number 9 through 16 ) *

Cable Pin Numbers to be connected

See page 2-10.

l The max. length of the extension line cord (twisted cable) that connects the KX-T123211 and the extension
is shown below.

26 AWG: Under 460 feet

24 AWG: Under 750 feet
22 AWG: Under 1180 feet

6 AWG: Under 2290 fe

I
24 AWG: Under 3700 feet I
22 AWG: Under 5900 feet I
. ,I
I
0 If a telephone or answering machine with an A-Al relay is connected to the KX-Tl23211, set the A-Al
relay switch of the telephone or answering machine to OFF.

0 Mis-connection may cause the KX-T123211 to operate improperly.

See “During Installation” page 6-1 and “During Connection” page 6-2 before connecting.

2-8
 To connect Amphenol 57JE type (screw-attach-type 50-pin
connector) to the KX-T123211, follow the procedure below.

1. Loosen the three screws to move the metal 4. To attach the Amphenol 57JE type
bar aside. (PLUG) to the connector, drive the
accessory Screw at the upper part, .
I Metal bar and fasten the accessory Wire Tie
around the lower hook-pin and the
Amphenol 57JE type, as shown.

317

50-pin*
connector

Screws
Hook-.pin

Accessary
2. Pull the Expansion Card (LC#l)
Wire Tie

3. The 50-pin connector (JACK) on the

Expansion Card has two hook-pins.
Remove the upper hook-pin, taking
out the screw.

/Expansion
Card When connecting a connector of the type shown
below, unscrew the lower hook-pin, too. Then drive
both accessory Screws.
I Expansion Card

,50-pin
connector

5d-pin Aonnector

5. Replace the Expansion Card (LC#l).

6. To connect to the other Expansion Card

(LC#2), repeat the steps 2 to 5.

7. Replace the bar and tighten the screws.

2-9
Cable Pin Numbers to be connected
l Connection of the KX-T123235 (Proprietary 0 Connection of a Standard Telephone
Telephone) Connect the only pin number of “T” and “R”.
T : Tip Dl : Data 1 Pl : 3 Pair Voice
R : Ring D2 : Data 2 P2 : 3 Pair Voice
0 Connection of the Proprietary Telephone
Connect the only pin number of “T”, “R”, “Dl ” and
“D2”.

ONN CABLE CLIP

PIN COLOR NO
LC-1 LC-2 LC-3 LC-4
26 WHT-BLU 1 T T T T
1 BLU-WHT 2 R R R R
27 WHT-ORN 3 JACK DI JACK ~1 JACK D1 JACK Dj
2 ORN-WHT 4 No.1 D2 No.9 D2 No.17 D2 No.25 D2
28 WHT-GRN 5 Pl PI Pi Pl
3 GRN-WHT 6 P2 P2 P2 P2
29 WHT-BRN 7 T T T T
4 BRN-WHT 8 R R R R

23 GRN-VI0 46 No.8 ;: No.16 ;: No.24 E: ,No.32 E;

19 VIO-BRN 47
24 BRN-VI0 48 P2 P2 P2 P2
50 VIO-SLT 49
25 SLT-VI0 50

Station wrnng (Y-Parr twtsteu cablrng):

50 Pi

Bridging Clips
 If the telephone you are using with the KX-T123211 is polarity sensitive. -

1. Connect all extension wiring to the KX-T123211. 6. Confirm that dialing can be done on the
following extensions using a tone telephone.

2. Confirm that dialing can be done from all the Extension of jack number l--CO1
extensions using a tone telephone. Extension of jack number %-CO2
Extension of jack number g--CO5
Extension of jack number lo--CO6
3. If a dialing can not be done, the polarity between Extension of jack number 17--CO9
the extension and the KX-T123211 must be reversed. Extension of jack number 18--CO10

7. If dialing can not be done, the polarity between

KX-Tl23211 the KX-T123211 and the Central Office Line must
be reversed.
KX-Tl23211

Extension
Central Office Line

Reverse here
4. Set the Power Switch on the KX-T123211 to the

OFF position. 6. If any extension is changed or replaced, repeat

these procedures (from step 1 through step 7).

5. Connect all Central Office (CO) Lines.

2-11
 Serial Printer

\ Make cables so that the printer may be connected

to the KX-Tl23211 as shown in the chart. Serial Interface
Cables must be shielded and the maximum length ( RS-232C )

is 6.5 feet.

Connection Chart :
When using special accessories such as cable, the
KX-T123211 RS-232C Printer RS-232C
I user should use those specified in this installation
Circuit Circuit
Signal Pin Pin Signal manual to comply with the limits for a Class A
Type Name No. No. -Name llg
(EIA) computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15

FG l-l FG AA of FCC Rules.

BA TXD 2 - 3 RXD BB
The pin configuration of EIA (RS-232C) connector is
BB RXD 3 - 2 TXD BA as follows.

Circuit Type
Pin
DTR CD Signal Name
Number
EIA 1 CCITT

FG Frame Ground AA 101

TXD Transmitted BA 103
Data

RXD Received ,Data BB 104

RTS Request To CA 105
l Panasonic data terminal ;
Send
KX-D491 OD, KX-D4911, KX-D4920, KX-D4985, etc.
CTS Clear To Send CB 106
If you connect this unit to a Panasonic Data DSR Data Set Ready cc 107
Terminal, the Communication Parameter
7 SG Signal Ground AB
Transmit XON / XOFF on the Data Terminal must 8 DCC Data Carrier CF
Detect’
be set to the “YES” position.

For further details, see the Operating 20 DTR Data Terminal CD 108.2
Ready
Instructions of the Data Terminal.

2-12
 Data Set Ready(DSR);.......................(input)
EIA (RS-232C) SIGNALS:
An On condition of circuit DSR indicates the
Frame Ground (FG);
printer is ready. Circuit DSR ON does not indicate
Connects to the unit frame and the earth ground
that communication has been established with
conductor of the AC power cord.
the printer.

Transmitted Data (TXD); . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..@Jtpuq

Signal Ground (SG);
Conveys signals from the unit to the printer. A
Connects to the DC ground of the unit for all
“Mark” condition is held unless data or BREAK
interface signal.
signals are being transmitted.

Received Data (R)(D);. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .(input) Data Terminal Ready (DTR)...............(output)

This signal line is turned ON by the unit to indicate
Conveys signals from the printer.
that it is ON LINE. Circuit DTR ON does not
indicate that communication has been
Request To Send (RTS); . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .((-Jutput)
. established with the printer. It is switched OFF
This lead is held ON whenever DSR is ON.
when the unit is OFF LINE.

Clear To Send (CTS);..................... **(input)

Data Carrier Detect (DCD)..................(input)
An ON condition of circuit CTS indicates that the
The ON condition is an indication to data terminal
printer is ready to receive data from the unit. The
(DTE) that the carrier signal is being received.
unit dose not attempt to transfer data or receive
data when circuit CTS is OFF.

i
1. If the Panasonic printer which is used has a (KX-PI 1 D or KX-P17) board and is connected to the
KX-T123211 , set the communication parameters below.

KX-Pl 1D KX-P17
KX-T123211
DIP switch Setting DIP switch Seth ng

Word length 7 bit (default) SWl-1 ON SWl-4 ON

Program to “EVEN” SWl-2 ON SWl-5 OFF

Parity SWl-6
(See page 3-32) SWl-3 ON OFF

SWl-5 ON
SWl-6 OFF SWl-1 OFF
Baud Rate 12008 (default) SWl-2
SWl-7 OFF OFF
SWl-8 OFF SWl-3 ON

XON / XOFF mode

Protocol SW2-8 OFF SWl-8 ON
only

2. If the Panasonic data terminal is a KX-D4985 or KX-D4920 and is connected to the KX-T123211, the default value
of communication parameter is the same a.s that of the KX-T123211.
If the KX-D491 OD is connected to the KX-T123211, set the baud rate of the KX-D491 OD to 1200 baud, the other
default value is the same as that of the KX-Tl23211.

2-l 3
 Paging jack 1

Use an RCA connector.

l Output impedance:
Speaker
/ \ 6OOfl
Amplifier
0

CL 0

Speaker
0

Paging equipment 1
Useshielded cable.

/ \
Amplifier
0

Paging equipment 2

Use a two-
conductor plug
(9/64 inch in diameter)
l Input impedance

0 Input Level
-1OdBm

External Music Source

Adjust the sound level
of the music on hold
with the Volume
control.

1 1. EXT MUSIC Jack

2-14
 OPTION

The optional cards are following.

Model No. Description Reference Page

Expansion Cards KX-T123270 This card adds 8 Extensions. 2-26

KX-Tl23271 This card adds 4 Extensions. 2-26

KX-T123280 This card adds 4 CO’s. 2-27, 2-28

KX-T123281 This card adds 2 CO’s. 2-27

-
DSS Console Card KX-T123241 The DSS Console requires the DSS 2-29
Console Card for the operation.

Off Premise Extension KX-T123285 Enables a standard telephone

s
(OPX) Card installed outside the premise to work
as well as an extension. 2-30 a
Off Premise Extension KX-T123286
(OPX) Unit

Direct Inward System Enables to access system from

Access (DISA) Cards KX-T123291 outside of system as well. 2-31

Outgoing Message Card In case access from outside by

KX-T123292 installed this card, enable to send 2-31
the recorded message instead of
dial tone.

Diagnostic Card KX-Tl23295 Diagnosis of system can be done 2-32

MODEM Card KX-T123296 This card is necessary for data

2-32
communication with remote.

2-15
 OPTION (cont.)

4 CO Lines (initial)

L 2, 4 or 6 CO Lines can be added.

n The following optional cards are necessary.

l To add the 2 CO Lines ---.*- Expansion card KX-Tl23281
l To add the 4 CO Lines ------ Expansion card KX-Tl23280
l To add the 6 CO Lines --*--- Expansion card KX-T123280 (2 cards)

16 extensions (initial)

L 4, 8, 12 or 16 extensions can be added.

n The following optional cards are necessary.

l To add the 4 extensions ----= Expansion card KX-T123271
0 To add the 8 extensions ----- Expansion card KX-T123270
0 To add the 12 extensions -.-- Expansion card KX-Tl23271
I: Expansion card KX-Tl23270
0 To add the 16 extensions - - =- Expansion card KX-T123270 (2 cards)

2- 16
The DSS console (KX-T123240 or KX-T61640) needs a paired telephone (EMSS Proprietary Telephone) for
proper operation, because the DSS console cannot work by itself.

The DSS console let you dial to the extension by simply pushing the DSS Button.

The programmable feature buttons on the DSS console let you access various features of the KX-T123211 and
speed dialing using the CO line in addition to the numbers programmed into the KX-T12321 l’s memory.

An EMSS Proprietary Telephone (such as KX-T123220, KX-T123230, KX-T123235, KX-T123250) is required

as the paired telephone for dialing, storing, etc.

n The following optional DSS Console and card are necessary.

l DSS Console KX-T123240 (32 DSS’s, 16 Feature buttons)
l DSS Console KX-T61640 (16 DSS’s, 16 Feature buttons)
0 DSS Console Card KX-T123241

Paired Telephone DSS Console

(EMSS Proprietary KX-T123240
Telephone) KX-T61640

Pair

When using the KX-T123240 or KX-T61640, programing must be done. Refer to

“Paired Telephone Assignment for DSS Console” page 3-l 0.

2-17
 OPTION (cont.)

This feature enables access system from outside.

For example, you can call the desired extension directly by dialing the extension number and the desired CO line
directly by dialing the number 9 or trunk group access number, following the regular CO number.

KX-T123211 I I
Telephone Line

n The following optional card is necessary.

0 Direct Inward System Access Card KX-T123291.

n When execute a remote administration, the following optional card is necessary with DISA cards.
l MODEM Card KX-T123296

n If outgoing message is necessary when receive a call from CO line, the following optional card is necessary with
DISA cards.
0 Outgoing Message Card KX-T123292

n Programing must be done to use this feature.

Refer to “CO Mode (Normal / Direct In Line / Direct Inward System Access) Assignment” on page 3-67 and
“Direct Inward System Access (DISA)” on page 3-42.

n A rotary phone will not function.

2-18
 -

From outside of System

Operation
I q When disconnect
to CO calling.
CO line after finish CO

Dial tone (First dial tone) will be

heard.
0 If the Outgoing Message Card is Dial “st” You will hear Dial ‘I*” Hang up
first or
Make a call installed to KX-T123211, outgoing second dial
to the line tone
message will be heard instead of dial

1
which is
beforehand tone. (refer to page 2-21)
p-yyFAed

. Line on the
KX-’ 3211.
. To call to Extension To access the System
(Remote Administration)
n If Security Type is set to None Security or
Trunk Security.

Dial remote
security code
-
Dial extension number (70000 through 79999)
(100 through 199)
0 Data Terminal equipment display as
n If Security Type is set to All Security. follows.
@J... 0

Dial user
security code
I \
.
.. ....

You will hear

second dial
Dial extension
number (100
; Welcome to KX-TI 23211

;** Jan.1.1988 12
remote administration
ver 2.0 Panasonic CO., LTD

: 00’ AM **
s
s
(60000 through tone through 199)
69999)
; The “HLP” displays command informations
. To call to CO line

n If Security Type is set to None Security. ; > E1

Please refer to the manual “EVVREMOTE

PROGRAMMING NANUAL”.

Dial “8” Dial trunk You will hear D$&ne Note 0 Dial Security Code or Extension number
roup number CO dial tone or CO line access number in 10 seconds
91 through 8)
after outgoing message is finished or first,
0 You may-dial automatic line access second dial tone are heard.
number “9” instead of “8” and trunk 0 If Outgoing Message Card is installed and
group number. outgoing message is not recorded, Direct
Inward System Access (DISA) doesn’t
n If Security Type is set to Trunk Security work.
or All Security. When operator is registered in System,
call to operator automatically and When
operator is not registered in System, call
to general Extension.
When dial the wrong security code 3
Dial user Dial “8” Dial trunk You will hear Dial phone
group CO dial tone number times, the call is disconnected.
tEzrity number It is necessary for security code to be
(60000 through (1 through 8)
69999) programmed beforehand.
DISA can receive up to 2 calls and can’t
l You may dial automatic line access
number “9” instead of “8” and trunk receive more than 3 calls at the same time.
group number.
2- 19
 OPTION (cont.)

Retry Function Time Over of Receiving Call

When press the “ * ” button while hearing a ringback When time over of receiving call, the call moves as
tone, reorder tone, busy tone or talking over the follows.
telephone, back to the situation of dial tone and you
can call again, but you can’t retry while calling CO When outgoing message is registered.
line to extension with DISA.

Example I Dial to KX-T123211 with DISA. I

When Outgoing Message Card is not installed
Outgoing message will be heard
(If Security Type is set to None Security or Trunk
Security.)

Dial to KX-Ti 23211 with DISA. (If you don’t dial in 10 secinds after outgoing
& message is finished. or dial the wrong number.)
.
I I I
First dial tone will be heard. I I
w- ~
Dial to extension. + (When operator is registered in System)
+ 4
When dial the wrong number or call another
Call the Operator

+ (When operator is not registered in System)

(If Security Type is set to All Security.)

I”“‘““‘““‘;“‘“‘*“‘“1
Dial to KX-T123211 with DISA.

If the a button is not pressed in 10 seconds,

( First dial t;;z;; be heard. 1
the call will be disconnected.
Dial the User Security Code (60000 through If the 18/ button is pressed in 10 seconds, First
dial tone will be heard and you can enter.

l-4 Second dial tone will be heard. II

I I * When Outgoing Message Card is not installed.
II Dial to extension.

When dial the wrong number or call another

n If press the qbutton in case of as follows,

(If you don’t dial in 10 seconds)
the call will be disconnected.
0 While outgoing message is heard. q1
0 While dial tone (1st or 2nd) is heard.
0 While Silence after outgoing message is
finished. If the q button is not pressed in 10 seconds,
n When Outgoing Message Card is installed and the call will be disconnected.
outgoing message is not recorded, the call If the m button is pressed in 10 seconds, First
which is sent to DISA CO is sent to general
dial tone will be heard.
extension.
2 - 20
 To extend the call duration time
while calling CO line
I Security Code

Security Code is used to protect from abusing

l If you call to any outside line using DISA, the KX- system with DISA.
T123211 will disconnect the call from the line There are User Security Code and.Remote Security
after 10 minutes. For changing the time, see “CO Code in Security Code.
to CO Duration Time Limit” on page 3-30.
3 beeps tone will be heard every 5 seconds for 15 User Securitv Code
seconds before the call is disconnected from the User Security Code is used when dial to extension
. or CO line with DISA.
line.
If you press button except the q button in 15 n Security code can be set by 3 modes as follows.
seconds, the call duration time can be extended 5
None Security
minutes. This is the mode in which Security Code is
1 beep tone will be heard when button except the unnecessary when dialing both extension and
q is accepted. For changing the time, see outside line.
“Direct Inward System Access” on page 3-42. Trunk Security
This is the mode in which Security Code is
Outgoing Message necessary when dialing an outside line, but
unnecessary when dialing an extension.
Enable to send outgoing message to the telephone
All Security
called with DISA. This is the mode in which Security Code is
Refere to page 4-66 as to the registration of necessary when dialing both extension and
outgoing message. outside line.

w User Security Code can be set by 4 types.

Example
0 User Security Code 1:60000
This is ABC company. Would you dial to your
desired post’? Operator number is 00, Business 0 User Security Code 4:60000

is 100 and Account’s department is 180. -II enable to enter last 4

digits with program
mode
Remote Security Code
Operator
Remote Security Code is used when Remote
Administration is done with DISA.
lf operator is registered in System Program and
outgoing message has been recorded, the call is n Remote Security Code can be set by 1 type.

sent to operator automatically. 0 Remote Security code:70006

0 When time out -II enable to enter last 4

0 When the called extension doesn’t answer in digits with program
LIST OF TONES mode
20 seconds.
IseC
I-;
0 When the called extension is set to Do Not 1st dial tone I II ,
I
Disturb. 2nd dial tone

Reorder tone

Busy tone
Ringback tone

Disconnect
warning tone
: - : ; I i
Prolong II I
confirmation tone 1 l-l 1
2 - 21
 OPTION (cont.)

Enables a standard telephone installed outside the premise to work as an extension through public or private rate
lines (under 6 miles).

KX-T123286
I Standard Telephone

Jack number 32

Jack number 31

KX-Tl23211

n The following optional card and unit are necessary. 0 OPX can’t function with Doorphone.
l Off Premise Extension (OPX) Card KX-T123285 l The Ring Tone from extension or CO line are as follows.
l Off Premise Extension (OPX) Unit KX-T123286

n Programing is necessary to use this feature.

Refer to “Off Premise Extension” on page 3-45.

The doorphone can be installed to the KX-Tl23211.

Doorphone 1 Doorphone 2

n The following optional doorphone and adaptor are necessary.

0 Doorphone KX-T30865
0 Doorphone adaptor KX-T30860D (only)

2 - 22
By using data terminal connected to RS-232C on KX-Tl23211 or remote data terminal connected to KX-T123211
through MODEM, diagnosis of KX-T123211 system can be done.

Remote Administration

Telephone Line

Data terminal equipment KX-T123211

n The following optional cards are necessary.

0 Diagnostic Card KX-T123295
0 Direct Inward System Access Cards KX-T123291
l MODEM Card KX-T123296

On-Site Administration

Data terminal equipment KX-T123211

w The following card is necessary.

0 Diagnostic Card KX-1123295

2 - 23
 OPTION (cont.)

KX-T12321 l’s diagnostic feature has two command systems.

One is a “Test commands” system which actually executes the diagnostic process, and the
other is a “Control commands” system which controls the state of diagnosis.

1. All components test 6. DISA module and OGM card test

The system consecutively executes test items as The KX-T123211 system allovys you to test the
following description. DISA-A card which controls all the DISA system,
the DISA-B card which consists of crosspoint
switches etc. and the OGM card which consists
of voice processors etc.
2. CPU card and system control circuit test

The system executes the test of i/o circuit, real

time clock chip on the CPU card and i/o circuit on 7. OPX interface card and unit box test
each card.
Off premise extension (OPX) test allows you to
This is the basic test on the KX-T123211
check the OPX interface card which consists of
system.
You should execute this test at first, because, if the bi-directional amplifiers and analogue
switches, and the OPX unit box which consists of
i/o circuits have defects, the following test items
hook detectors, ring trip circuits, loop current
will be meaningless.
sources, ringing generators and so on.

3. Cross point card test

6. MODEM card test
The system executes the test of DTMF generator
and receivers at first, and executes the test of the This test allows you to check the digital and
cross point switch circuits. analogue circuits on the MODEM chip with 300
bps and 1200 bps communication speed.
You can use this test on the on-site diagnostic
mode only.
4. CO card test

This test allows you to check of relays, analogue

switches, bell detection circuits CPCLOOP current
detection circuits and bidirectional amplifiers on
the CO card no. 1 through no. 3.

5. Line circuit (LC) card test

The system executes the test of loop current

sources, ringing relays, hook detection circuits
and ring trip circuits on each LC card.
And it will execute the check of data
communication capability on the LC cards and
DSS console interface card.

2 - 24
 Card Installation

1. To protect the printed circuit board from static 0 Insert the optional card with holding a levers of
electricity, first discharge any body static by the card into the KX-T123211 surely.
touching the metal board. Do not touch parts on the card.

2. Loosen the screws to remove the metal board.

metal board
3. The location of the optional cards for the
KX-Tl23211 is shown in the following.

-
v
Screws

0
(KX-T123292) 3
l!h
$1
_ --__ I \\ \\ I I // / (KX-T123241)
P

2 - 25
 OPTION (cont.)

To add eight extensions (jack number 17 through

24), use the optional expansion card
KX-T123270.
To add four extensions (jack number 17 through
20), use the optional expansion card
KX-T123271.
1. Insert the expansion card KX-Tl23270 or
KX-Tl23271 into the KX-Tl23211
2. Insert connector to the KX-T123270 or
KX-T123271 as shown at right.

Cable Pin Numbers to be connected

See page 2-10.

0 Mis-connection may cause the KX-T123211

to operate improperly.
See “During Installation” page 6-l and
“During Connection” page 6-2 before
connecting.
To Extensions (jack number 17 through 20, w=
or 17 through 24 )
Expansion/card
KX-T123270 . . jack number 17 through 24
KX-T123271 . . . jack number 17 through 20

To add eight extensions (jack number 25 through

32), use the optional expansion card
KX-T123270.
To add four extensions (jack number 25 through
28), use the optional expansion card
KX-T123271.
1. Insert the expansion card KX-T123270 or
KX-T123271 into the KX-T123211.
2. Insert connectorto the KX-T123270 or
KX-T123271 as shown at right.

Cable Pin Numbers to be connected

See page 2-10.
0 Mis-connection may cause the KX-T123211 to
operate improperly.
See “During Installation” page 6-1 and
“During Connection” page 6-2 before
connecting.
To Extensions (jack number 25 through 28,
or 25 through 32 )
Expansion card
KX-T123270 . . . jack number 25 through 32
KX-T123271 . . . jack number 25 through 28
2-26
 To add four Central Office Lines (CO 9
through 12), use the optional expansion
card KX-Tl23280. R : Ring
T :Tip
1. Insert the expansion card KX-T123280 into
the KX-Tl23211. Vi ack (CO)

2. Insert the modular plug of the telephone

line cord (2-conductor wiring) into the
modular jack on the KX-T123280.
.
0 Mis-connection may cause the KX-T123211
to operate improperly.
See “During Installation” page 6-l and
“During Connection” page 6-2 before
connecting.

To Terminal Board or Modular Jacks + 0

)rn the Central Office (CO).
Use 2-conductor wiring cord
s
P

To add two Central Office lines (CO9 and

b
COlO), use the optional expansion card co9
KX-Tl23281. R :Ring
co10
T : Tip
1. Insert the expansion card KX-T123281
into the KX-T123211.
View of TEL Jack (CO)
2. Insert the modular plug of the telephone
\\
line cord (2-conductor wiring) into the
modular jack on the KX-T123281.

0 Mis-connection may cause the KX-Tl23211

to operate improperly.
See “During Installation” page 6-l and
“During Connection” page 6-2 before
connecting.

To Terminal Board or Modular Jacks

from the Central Office (CO).

Use 2-conductor wiring cord
2-27
 OPTION (cont.)

When you remove the card,

pull upward.
To add four Central Office lines (CO5 through 8),
use the optional expansion card KX-T123280.

Insert the expansion card KX-T123280 into

the KX-T123211.

Insert the modular plug of the telephone

line cord (2-conductor wiring) into the
modular jack on the KX-T123280.

Mis-connection may cause the KX-T123211

to operate improperly.
See “During Installation” page 6-l and
“During Connection” page 6-2 before
connecting.

co5

R : Ring CO6
T : Tip co7
CO8

View of TEL Jack (CO)

To Terminal Board or Modular Jacks @

from the Central Office (CO). Use 2-conductor wiring cord

2-28
To connect the optional DSS Console (KX-T123240 or KX-T61640), the optional DSS Console card (KX-T123241)
is required.

The DSS Console (KX-T123240 or KX-T61640) needs a paired Telephone (EMSS Proprietary Telephone) for
proper operation, because the DSS console cannot work by itself.
The EMSS Proprietary Telephone (such as KX-T123220, KX-T123230, KX-T123235, KX-T123250) is required as
the paired telephone for dialing, storing, etc.
Place the KX-T123240 or KX-T61640 and the paired telephone side by side on your desk.

1. Insert the DSS Console card (KX-Tl23241) into the DSS Console Ca{d KX-T123241
KX-Tl23211
2. Insert the modular plug of the console line cord
(4-conductor wiring) into the modular jack on the
KX-T123241.

“DSS” is written on the Card. Dl : Data 1 D2 : Data 2

-

0
s
View of TEL Jack
P

k -
Console 1
Console 2

Notes:
htp 4conductor
6”,q;i;:;f;l;he
wiring is

Up to 2 KX-T123240’s or KX-T61640’s can be connected

to the KX-T123211.
paired telephone.
Each console requires its own
=7----l
KX-Tl23240 or KX-T61640 can not be connected in
pair with a standard telephone.
The max. length of the console line cord (twisted
cable) that connects the KX-T123211 with the DSS
Console is shown below.
Pair Telephone DSS Console
(EMSS Proprietary KX-T123240
Telephone) KX-T61640
26 AWG: Under 460 feet
24 AWG: Under 750 feet
22 AWG: Under 1180 feet . Pair

When using the KX-T123240 or KX-T61640, program

must be done. Refer to “Paired Telephone Assignment
for DSS Console” page 3-10.

2-29
 OPTION (cont.)

Enables a standard telephone installed outside the premise to work as an extension through public orprivate lines.
To avail of this feature, an optional Off Premise Extension Unit KX-T123286 is necessary aside from KX-T123285.

1. Insert the Off Premise Extension Card

Extension Card
KX-T123285 into the KX-T123211.

Connector
2. Insert the connector from the KX-T123286 to
(24 pin)
the Off Premise Extension Card.
\
3. Insert the modular plug of the Standard
Telephone Line (2conductor wiring) into the
modular jack on the KX-T123286.

4. Connect the frame of the KX-T123286 to

earth ground properly to protect the unit.

5. Plug in the AC Power cord from the

KX-T123286.

6. Turn on the Power Switch on the

KX-T123286.
l The Power indicator will be lit.

Power Switch
“OPX” is written on the Card.

Off Premise Extension Unit + Standard Telephone

KX-T123286

Jack number 32

c Jack number 31

To earth
ground Use 2-conductor wiring cord
L I

.
n Programing must be done to use this feature. W Primary Power Fuse, (800 mA, 250 V) xl:
Refer to “Off Premise Extension” on page 3-45. If the Power Indicator light goes off, the Primary Power
Fuse must be replaced after remove the cause.

2 - 30
This feature enables to access System from outside of System and then call to extension or outside line.
For example, you can call the desired extension directly by dialing the extension number following the regular CO
number.
Optional KX-T123292 card is necessary to program KX-T123211 to send Outgoing Message when called with this
feature.

1. Insert the Direct Inward System Access Cards A Direct Inward System Access Cards KX-T 123291
and B into the KX-T123211.

DISA-B Card DISA-A Card

“DISA-A” and “DISA-B” are written

on each Card.

An Outgoing Message can be sent from the KX-T123211 when a call is received using the “Direct Inward System
Access” feature.

1. Insert the Outgoing Message Card KX-T123292 Outg

into the KX-Tl23211. Card

“OGM” is written on the Card.

For how to record OUtgOing Message, refer to “Outgoing Message” on page 4-67.
2 - 31
 OPTION (cont.)

By using the data terminal connected to RS-232C on KX-T123211 or remote data terminal connected to KX-Tl23211
through MODEM, diagnosis of KX-Tl23211 system can be done.

Remote administration

H The following optional cards are necessary.

0 Diagnostic Card KX-T123295
0 Direct Inward System Access Cards
KX-T123291
(See page 2-31)
0 MODEM Card KX-T123296
(See page 2-32)

Data terminal equipment KX-Tl23211

On-site administration

RS232C Cable
n The following card is necessary.
0 Diagnostic Card KX-Tl23295

Data terminal equipment KX-T123211

1. Insert the Diagnostic Card KX-T123295 into the

KX-T123211.

jgfxp!g

“DIAG”is written on the Card.

This card is necessary for data communication to execute confirmation or registration of System data or diagnosis of
the System using remote data terminal equipment.

1. Insert the MODEM Card KX-T123296 into the

KX-T123211.

MODEM Card
KX-T123296 \ /

“MODEM” is written on the Card.

2 - 32
For installing the doorphone, use the Optional Doorphone Adaptor (Use the KX-T30860D only).

Installation of the doorphone Installqtion of the Doorphone Adaptor

Loosen the screw to How to install the Doorphone Adaptor into the
separate the KX-Tl23211.
doorphone into 2
1. Connect a 4-conductor modular connector to
halves.
the doorphone adaptor.

Install the lower case doorphone adaptor (KX-T30860D)

to the wall with 2
screws.
4-conductor wiring
l 2 kinds of screws
are included. Please
choose according to
your wall type. See
the followings.

been fixed to the wall.

w-------When you wish to install the
doorphone directly to the wall. 2. Install the doorphone adaptor into the
adaptor compartment.

3. Connect the wires

from the terminal
box to the screws
located in the
upper case.

to the terminal box

(See page 2-34)

4. Secure both halves together and ,re-install the

screw.

3. After drawing a CPU Card, insert the adaptor

connector into connector on the CPU Card
(circuit board).

Adaptor Connector

Connector CPU Card

2-33
 OPTION (cont.)

Doorphone Wiring
(4 Connect the doorphone adaptor to the terminal box using a 4-conductor modular connector.
(W Connect the wires of doorphone 1 to the red and green screws of the terminal box.

(C) Connect the wires of doorphone 2 to the yellow and black screws of the terminal box.

:or
.\

Doorp hone 1 (KX-T30865) Doorphone 2 (KX- ,T30865)

BLACK
YELLOW
RED GREEN

0 The max. length of the telephone line cord (twisted cable) that connects the KX-T123211 and the doorphone
(KX-T30865) is shown below.

26 AWG: Under 230 feet

24 AWG: Under 370 feet

Automobile type batteries which customer supplied is available as a backup power supply of the FX-T123211
to operate all the features in the event of power failure.

For connecting automobile type batteries, use the Optional Battery Adaptor KX-A26.

1. Connect the Battery Adaptor KX-A26 to automobile type batteries.

2. Connect the Battery Adaptor KX-A26 to the Battery Backup Connector of the Kx-TI 23211.

KX-T123211

0 Consisting of two 12 VDC (24 VDC)

 PROGRAMMING

To activate this system, the requirements from telephone company and the customer must be programmed once
the Power Switch has been turned on.

1. At extension connected to jack number 01: All system 4. Press the MEMORY button to clear system.
programming changes’(example : system clear,
5. To return to the initial program mode, press the
toll restriction, system speed dialing entry-..) are
END button.
done through extension connected to jack
.
number 01. 0 The following parameters are preset as the default
data.

0 Extension connected to jack number 01 must System parameters

CO parameters
Extension parameters
DSS parameters
Speed dial
2. System Program Switch setting:
The System Program Switch located on the
KX-T123211 must be set to the “PITS”
(Proprietary Integrated Telephone System)
position while making program change. After
all programming changes are completed, return
the program switch to the “SET” position.

3. Overlay:
This overlay is used for programming the
system and the program function names are
inscribed on this card. Refer to page 3-2.

4. Before system programming, operate the

system clear to set to the default data of the
program. See page 3-78.

System Clear:
0 Set the System Program Switch of the
KX-T123211 to the “PITS” position.

1. Dial (99).
“System Clear” will be displayed.

2. Press the NEXT button.

3. Re’peat pressing the SELECT button until the

“Menu: All Para” is displayed.
When the System Program Switch on the KX-T123211 is set to the “PITS” position, the function of the
KX-T123230 or KX-T123235 connected to jack number 01 will change as follows.

CLEAR button

PROGRAMMABLE

button7
FEATURE button

+ button
LIQUID CRYSTAL
+ Display (LCD)

r-

Overlay
\

KX-T123230 or KX-T 123235

i ZiSEEFIy) button
FLASH button

END button

3-2
1. Turn the Power Switch ON.

2. Set the System Program Switch to “PITS” position.

The LCD on the KX-T123230 or KX-T123235 will show “SYS-PGM NO ?&‘I.
l Be sure the handset of the extension connected to jack number
01 is in the cradle and the speakerphone button is off.

3. To program automatic line access number 9 and the phone

number 987-654-3210 into speed access code 00. (Refer to
page 3-5.)

KX-T123230 or KX-T123235 at extension connected to

KX-T123211 I
jack number 01.
(Extension connected to jack number 01 must be a
KX-T123230 or KX-T123235.1

1. Dial (01) or press the Display

AUTO button. Speed Dialing

2. Press the NEXT button. ‘m;

3. Dial (00) or press the l If nothing is stored in

NEXT button. access code “OO”,

11

o If already stored the

automatic line access
number 9 and the phone
number 123-456-7890,

1oo:9-123-456_7891

4. 0 Dial “9”.
If you make a mistake while programming,
0 Press “ - ” button.
@ Dial “987”.
1. Press the “END” button.
@ Press “ - ” button. 1oo:-987-654_32101
@ Dial “654”.
2. Start programming procedure from the
@ Press “ - ” button.
beginning.
@ Dial “3210”.

5. Press the MEMORY

(oo:-987-654-32101
button. l You will hear a beep after pressing the
MEMORY button.
6. l To program the next access code, press the NEXT
button.
l To program a desired access code, press the SELECT l The MEMORY indicator light will go on
button and dial speed access code. when the MEMORY button is pressed,
and then the Indicator light will go out
7. Repeat steps 4 to 6.
when the NEXT or PREV button &pressed.
8. To return to the initial
program mode, press the ISYS_PGMl
END button.

4. Return the System Program Switch to “SET” position.

l To make program change, start from the beginning.
?_a
 System Feature

r.............................................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _
enterthe year with 2digits.

1811813
988 year
,......-.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . until the desired month is

displayed

i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . enter the day with 1 or 2 digits

.I. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._ until the desired day of the

week is displayed

;““““’ enter the hour with 1 or 2 digits

: :“..- enter the minutes with 2 digits

: :
: :
: i :‘- until the desired AM/PM is
: :
:: : ; displayed
:. :
: ;. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._
: ;
: . .. . ... ._

Description 7. Press the m button. “12:OO AM” will be

Entry of the current day, date and time. displayed.

8. Enter the hour with 1 or 2 digits.

Programming 9. Press the m button and then enter the

1. Dial(OO). minute with 2 digits.

“Day/Time Set” will be displayed. 10. Press the m button and then repeat

2. Press the NEXT button. pressing the SELECT button until the desired

“‘88 Jan.1 FRI” will be displayed and “‘88” AM/PM is displayed.

will blink. 11. Press the MEMORY button.

3. Enter the year (last 2 digits) using the dialing 12. To return to the initial program mode, press
button. the END button.

4. Press the m button and then repeat

pressing the SELECT button until the desired
month is displayed. Condition

l If m button ispressed, the display will

5. Press the a button and then enter the day
with 1 or 2 digits. return to the previous sequence in the
programming step.
6. Press the m button and then repeat
pressing the SELECT button until the desired 0 Instantly after pressing the MEMORY button,

day of the week is displayed. the. new time will start.

However, the LCD of extension connected to
jack number 01 will display the new time only
after the System Program Switch is set to
‘SET”.
3-4
 AB=[r)(Ol : speed access code 00
. ..
piE[ : speed access code 99

CD= pj : automatic line access number

: .. . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MFi : access number of Trunk Group1

dm : access number of Trunk Group8

or
;-‘--‘--.“.‘- until the desired speed access code (00 through 99) appears

filfijI(NEXT~l~hone number I~MEMORY lm

I 1

Description 4. Enter automatic line access number or trunk

100 system phone numbers can be stored with group number.
See page 4-2, regarding automatic selection.
each number capable of storing 32 digits and
See page 3-52 and 4-3, regarding trunk group.
may be accessed from any extension.
9 : automatic line access number
Pushing the “*I’, ‘I#” “PAUSE”, “-‘I, 81 : access number of trunk group 1
“FLASH” or “ICM (Secret)” button counts as 1 82 : access number of trunk group 2
digit. 83 : access number of trunk group 3
84 : access number of trunk group 4
Refer to “Speed Dialing” on page 4-3.
85 : access number of trunk group 5
Programming 86 : access number of trunk group 6
1. Dial (01) or press the AUTO button. 87 : access number of trunk group 7
“Speed Dialing” will be displayed. 88 : access number of trunk group 8

2. Press the NEXT button. 5. Enter the phone number.

You may enter punctuations in a phone number.
‘Speed NO?-” will be displayed.
3. Dial (00 through 99) or press the NEXT To erase a wrong entry, press the CLEAR
button, for speed access code entry. button.
Example : : When you don’t want to display the dialed phone z
b
number, press the ICM (SECRET) button before
When dialing (00) or pressing the NEXT
and after dialing the phone number. Do not press
button. :
the ICM button before line access number (9 or 81
l The LCD will show “0O:Not Stored” when through 88) and account code.
nothing is stored in speed access code
“00”. When the automatic line access Example:

number 9 and the phone number

g-123- w
123 - 456 - 7890 are stored, press the KM button
“00: 9- 123- 456- 789” will be displayed. The display shows as follows when programming.
01 : 9-123 [456]
The display shows as follows when dialing.
-123...

3-5
 Conditions
6. Press the MEMORY button. Use the “ e”, or “ G” button for scrolling
o The memory indicator will be lit.
the display.
7. l To advance to the next speed access code, Automatic line access number 9 or trunk
press the NEXT button.
group access number (81 through 88)
l To return to the previous speed access
code, press the PREV button. must be stored.
l To go to the desired speed access code, When dialing, the pause is automatically
press the SELECT button and then dial the entered after automatic line access number 9
speed access code.
or trunk group access number (81 through
8. Repeat steps 4 to 7, to program the other 88) has been dialing.
phone numbers.
Continuous use of speed dialing is possible.
9. To return to the initial program mode, press Example :
the END button.

To change In this case, speed access code “02” should

Repeat steps 1 to 9. not include the automatic line access number
or trunk group access number.
To erase after programming When dialing, the dialed number will be displayed
1. Dial (01) or press the AUTO button. on the LCD of the KX-T123230 I KX-T123235 /
“Speed Dialing” will be displayed. KX-T61631 / KX-T61630 / KX-T30830.

2. Press the NEXT button. The limit of the LCD is 16 characters but
“Speed NO ? +” will be displayed. will scroll all numbers stored.
3. Dial (00 through 99 ) or press the NEXT To erase all entries, refer to “System Data
button, for speed access code entry. Clear” on page 3-78.
The speed access code and the phone
number will be displayed.
There is a blank phone number directory on
4. Press the CLEAR button,
page 7-l.
5. Press the MEMORY button.

6. l To advance to the next speed access code,

press the NEXT button.
l To return to the previous speed access
code, press the PREV button.
l To go to the desired speed access code,
press the SELECT button and then dial the
speed access code.

7. Repeat steps 4 to 6, to erase the programmed

other phone number.

8. To return to the initial program mode, press

the END button.

3-6
Examples
1) To enter trunk group access number 81 and telephone number 201-392-4.669 into speed access codeb0.

(01 NEXT 09 8.1 201-392-4669 MEMORY END_)

: :
Speed access: Telephone
code number
Trunk’group
access number

l If punctuation is not entered in a phone number, the LCD will show as below
( 00 : 812013924869 )

2) To enter automatic line access number 9, account code 1234 and telephone number 201-392-4669 into
speed access code 02.

(01 l Refer to “Account code Input mode” page

--_ NEXT02 9: 3c .x- 1234201-392-4669
‘ MEMORY END)
: : 3-71 and “Account code” Dane
. _ 4-40.
Telephone number
Speed access;
code account code

automatic line
access number

3) To access MCI
(01 NEXT $l 9 123-4567 PAUSE PAUSE 9876 201-348-7000 MEMORY END)
_ . . . . ... . . . . .
zEi:d acceSS : MCI number i Security Telephone
code number

automatic line PAUSE button

access number

4) To access ITT
(01 NEXT 02 81 765-4321 PAUSE
-- PAUSE 201-348-7000 6789 MEMORY END)

zl;;d access _ ; . . .._...... .

ITT numb.er i Telephone S$$tY
PAUSE button number
Trunk group access number

When required to change the dialing mode from the pulse mode to the tone mode. (See page 4-49)

pulse mode tone mode

I+ 4
(01 NEXT 02 81 765-4321 JC PAUSE 201-348-7000 6789 MEMORY END)
_T # PAUSE
; # button
*button

3-7
 :..................,until the desired Jack number (01 through 32) appears

,............................... CDE=~1~1~~ : to assign phone number 100

mmki : to assign phone number 199~

i
. default
is assigned to extension of Jack number 01

.
pzjliiEq NEiT
IlCtrEll
4
MEMORY
I
lpiiq 132 is assigned to extension of Jack number 32

riiEdsE&m

I............................................

I AB=mo[ : to assign to Jack number 01

I*[ : to assign to Jack number 32

7. Repeat steps 4 to 6, to program the extension

number on the other jack number.
Description
8. To return to the initial program mode, press
Enables programming of a 3 digits extension
the END button.
number (100 through 199) for each extension
l The LCD will show the initial program
phone. This provides the freedom to develop a
mode, “SYS-PGM NO ? +“.
logical extension numbering system by
department or by building floor as desired.
Conditions
Programming 0 The extension number that has been already
1. Dial (02). programmed can not be entered.
“Extension No Set” will be displayed. In case programmed extension number is the
same as what was previously stored, when the
2. Press the NEXT button. MEMORY button is pressed, three beeps will
“Jack NO ?+” will be displayed. be heard.
3. Press the NEXT button or dial the Jack 0 When the extension number 125 have been
number (01 through 32 ). already assigned to the jack number 25, for
“Jack 01 : EXTlOl” will be displayed and programming to assign the extension number
“101 “will blink. ’ 125 to the jack number 02, after
4. Dial the extension number which is set programming to assign ,the other extension
newly ( 100 throug hl99 ). number (100 through 199) to the jack number
l When dialing (150) the LCD will show 25, program to assign the extension number
“Jack 01 : EXT150” will be displayed. 125 to the jack number 02.
l To erase a wrong entry, press the CLEAR
button. Programming Table
5. Press the MEMORY button. See page 7-3.
8. l To advance to the next jack number, press
the NEXT button.
0 To return to the previous jack number,
press the PREV button.
0 To go to the desired jack number, press
the SELECT button and then dial the jack
number.
3-8
 -..........until the desired operator number (1 or 2) appears
b
.-.......... AB= mr[ : to assign extension (Jack no. 01) for Operator use

m’k[ : to assign extension (Jack no. 32) for Operator use

default ...... Nothing is stored

Description
Up to 2 of any extensions can be selected as the
5. Press the MEMORY button.
operator extensions.
The LCD will stop blinking.
00 can be dialed to call operator 1, and 01 can be
dialed to call operator 2. “CO Mode (Direct In Line) 6. Repeat steps 3 to 5, to program the jack

Assignment (on page 3-57)” can be used to program number which is set the operator 2.
all incoming calls to be answered by the operator. 7. To return to the initial program mode, press

the END button.

Conditions
Programming To clear the jack number which is set

1. Dial (03). operator, press the CLEAR button at step 4.

“Operator Ext” will be displayed.

2. Press the NEXT button. Programming Table

“Operate NO?--” will be displayed. See page 7-3.

3. Press the NEXT button.

“OPT1 : Disable” will be displayed and

“Disable” will blink.

4. Dial the jack number which is set the operator 1.

l When you dial (01) ,
“OPT1 : Jack-01” will be displayed.

3-9
 I.........,...... To activate an extension as a paired telephd&$f& console 1
AB=[rin : extension (Jack number 01)

n’E[ : extension (Jack number 32)

To activate an extension as a paired telephone for console 2

CD= mm : extension (Jack number 01)
m.121: extension (Jack number 02) ...... default

lTiE[ : extension (Jack number 32)

L7D~Ir~~l3nEl
04 NEXT NEXT A6 MEMORY NEXT CD MEMORY END

Description 7. Dial the jack number which is paired with

The extension number paired with the DSS the console 2.
Console (KX-T123240) must be assigned when
the DSS Console is used. The jack number of the 8. Press the MEMORY button.
extension phone is programmed to identify the The LCD will stop blinking.
paired phone. Up to two DSS Consoles can be 9. To return to the initial program mode, press
used for each 32 extension phones. the END button.
When all incoming calls on outside lines are set
(using “CO Mode Assignment” on page 3-57) t0 Conditions
ring at the operator extension phone, assigning 0 Up to two DSS consoles can be connected.
the DSS Console to the operator extension will l The DSS console can not be connected in
make the operator’s job much easier. pair with a standard telephone.
l Two DSS consoles can’t be entered to one
jack number.
Programming
Example :
1. Dial (04)
If Mr Jay’s secretary has KX-T123230 at
“DSS Assign”will be displayed.
extension jack number 10 and it is to use the
2. Press the NEXT button. DSS console (KX-Tl23240), the console should
“DSS NO ? + ” will be displayed. be connected to the modular jack!marked MJl)
of the DSS card (KX-T123241).
3. Press the NEXT button.
(Paired extension is jack number 10.)
“DSS 1 : Jack - 01” will be displayed and
“01” will blink. If Mr Brown’s secretary has KX-T123220 at
extension jack number 20 and it is to use the
4. Dial the jack number which is paired with
DSS console (KX-T123240), the console should
the consolel.
be connected to the modular jack (marked MJ2)
5. Press the MEMORY button. of the DSS card (KX-T123241).
The LCD will stop blinking. (Paired extension is jack number 20.)
0 If console 2 is not connected, proceed to
step 9.

6. Press the NEXT button.

“DSS 2 : Jack - 02” will be displayed and
“02”will blink. Programming Table
See page 7-3.

3-10
 ~..............................11
until the desired mode appears

Description Programming Table

Outside calls can be transferred to any See page 7-3.
extension manually.

l While an extension paired with the DSS

Console having a conversation with outside

calls, “With Transfer” mode allows you to

transfer outside call by only pressing the DSS

button of the DSS Console.

e While an extension paired with the DSS Console

having a. conversation with outside calls, “Without

Transfer” mode allows you to transfer outside call

by pressing the TRANSFER button and then DSS

button of the DSS Console.

Programming

1. Dial (05).

“DSS Mode” win be displayed.

2. Press the NEXT button.

“With Transfer” will be displayed and blink.

3. Repeat pressing the SELECT button to alternate

between “With Transfer” and “Without

Transfer” to select the desired mode.

4. Press the MEMORY button.

The LCD will stop blinking.

5. To return to the initial program mode,

press the END button.

3-11
 : .......................... until the desired mode appears
Man ....... .-Day/Night service is manually switched ....... default
Auto ......... Day/ Night service is automatically switched

:.

pjc-lmNEXTllSELECTlfi1
.

Description Programming
Allows Day/Night service to be selected 1. Dial (06).
manually or automatically. “Day/Night Mode” will be displayed.
In case of manual switching, refer to “Flexible
2. Press the NEXT button.
Night Service” on page 4-38.
“Mode Change : Man” will be displayed
In case of automatic switching, set the “Starting
and “Man” will blink.
Time (Day/Night Service mode)” on page 3-13.
The following features will be switched 3. Press the SELECT button to alternate
Day mode or Night mode. between “Man” and “Auto” to select the
l “Flexible Outward Dialing Assignment” on desired mode.
page 3-53. 4. Press the MEMORY button.
l “Flexible Ringing Assignment” The LCD will stop blinking.
on page 3-54.
5. To return to the initial program mode, press
l “Delayed Ringing Assignment” on page 3-56. the END button.

l ‘CO Mode (Normal/Direct In Line/Direct Inward

System Access) Assignment” on page 3-57.
Conditions
When the Switching of Service Mode (Day/Night
l ‘Service Class Assignment of Toll Restriction” Service Mode) is set to”Auto”, the present
on page 3-67. Day/ Night Service mode will not change after
you finish programming.To change the present
0 “Ringing Assignment of Doorphone” on
mode,manual operation is required. After you
page 3-76.
select the Starting time (Day/Night Service Mode)
on page 3-l 3, select the present Day/Night mode
by “Flexible Night Service” on page 4-38.

Programming Table
See page 7-4. ,

3-12
r---------Until the desired day of the week appears
1

. to start at 1 o’clock for day service

: to start at 9 o’clock for day service

mm : to start at 12 o’clock for day service

i- CD=m.m : to start at 0 rninute........................default

,
I
I
I
I
ml-G-l : to start at 59 minutes
I

l------ - until the desired mode appears

r-
I 1EF= 111 : to start at 1 o’clock for night service

: to start at 5 o’clock for night service.........default I

II r-i-.
1 2 to start at 12 o’clock for night service

r GHd?-/k] : to start at 0 minute.......,....... default

I1
I
I
I ntl
5 9 : to start at 59 minutes
I

until the desired mode appears

I
I

I I
I
I I

(To advance to the next day of the week)

3-13
Description 11. Press the MEMORY button.
The LCD will stop blinking.
If you select the automatic switching mode for day/
night service, enter the starting time. 12. Press the SELECT button.
Starting time can be programed for every day of the “Night: 500 PM” or “Night: None” will be
week. Refer to “Switching of Service Mode (Day/Night displayed as the default value and “Night” will
Service Mode)” on page 3-12. blink.
13. Press the “q” button.
Programming “5” or “None” will blink.
0 If “Night: None” will be displayed, press the
1. Dial (07).
SELECT button.
“Day/Night Time” will be displayed.
“Night: 500 PM” will be displayed.
2. Press the NEXT button.
14. Enter the starting time for night service using 1
“Day of The Week” will be displayed.
or 2 digits.
3. Press the NEXT button. 0 To set a same mode as last day made, press
“Sunday” will be displayed. the SELECT button,and then proceed to step
0 To advance to the next day. 19.
Press the NEXT button.
15. Press the I‘a ” button.
0 To return to the previous day.
“00” will blink.
Press the PREV button.
18. Enter the minutes using 2 digits.
4. Press the SELECT button.
“Day: 9:00 AM” or “Day: None” will be 17. Press the “+‘I button.

displayed as the default value and “Day” will “PM” will blink.

blink. 18. Press the SELECT button*to alternate between

“AM” and “PM” to select the correct setting.
5. Press the “e” button.
“9” or “None” will blink. 19. Press the MEMORY button.
The LCD will stop blinking.
l If “Day: None” is displayed, press the
SELECT button. 20. e To advance to the next day of the week, press
“Day: 9:00 AM” will be displayed. the NEXT button.

8. Enter the starting hour for day service using 1 0 To return to the previous day of the week,

or 2 digits. press the PREV button.

l To set a same mode as last night mode, 21. Repeat steps 4 to 20 to program the starting
press the SELECT button and then proceed times for each day of the week.
to step 11. :
22. To return to the initial program mode, press the
l To erase a wrong entry, press the CLEAR END button.
button.

7. Press the “ 9” button. Programming Table

“00” will blink. See page 7-4.
8. Enter the minutes using 2 digits.

9. Press the LLG” button.

“AM" will blink.

10. Press the SELECT button to alternate between

“AM” and “PM” to select the correct setting.

3-14
 i............“....‘.....-until the desired extension group number (1 through 8) appears

_.................................. until the desired mode appears

Disable : to disable “Hunting’:.--....default
(all 8 groups)
Enable : to enable “Hunting”

:. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. A=B : to assign the same of all 8 extension groups

Description
Enables programming to automatically locate 5. Press the MEMORY button.
an idle extension within the same extension The LCD will stop blinking.
group as the dialed extension when the
dialed extension number is busy. 6. l To advance to the next extension group
Call Hunting is set by group units. “Extension number, press the NEXT button.
Group Assignment” (on page 3-66) is used to l To return to the previous extension group
specify which extensions belong to each number, press the PREV button.
group. l To go to the desired extension group
number, press the SELECT button and then
Programming dial the extension group number.
1. Dial (08).
“Hunting Group” will be displayed. 7. Repeat steps 4 to 6, to program the assignment
of the other hunting groups.
2. Press the NEXT button.
“Group NO ? --) ” will be displayed. 8. To return to the initial program mode,
press the END button. ‘-
3. Press the NEXT button or dial the extension
group number ( 1 through 8 ). Conditions
“Group 1 : Disable” will he displayed and o When you dial “4 instead of pressing the
“Disable” will blink. NEXT button at step 3, in case all of 8 groups
have been programmed to “Disable”,
4. Press the SELECT button to alternate between “Group */: Disable” will be displayed.
“Disable” and “Enable”. In case each of 8 groups has been programmed
either “Disable” or “Enable”,
“Group x’: Mixed” will be displayed. _’

Programming Table
See page 7-4.

3-15
 i................until the desired extension group number (1 through 8) appears.

;” until the desired hunting type appears

; Terminate : searching for larger jack numbers upward ..... default-(all 8 groups)
; [ Circular : circular searching for other numbers

A=m : to assign the same of all 8 extension groups

~.,.............................~

Discription
Specifies the order in which idle extensions 3. Press the NEXT button or dial the extension
are searched when “Call Hunting” is used. group number (1 through 8).
The “Terminate Mode” searches for idle “Group 1 : Terminate” will be displayed and
extensions with a higher order extension than “Terminate” will blink.

the jack number of the dialed extension, and

4. Press the SELECT button to alternate
terminates when the search reaches the
highest jack number of extension in the same between “Terminate” and “Circular”.

group. If all higher order numbers are busy, a

5. Press the MEMORY button.
busy tone will be heard.
The “Circular Mode” searches for any idle The LCD will stop blinking.
extension in the same group.
6. To advance to the next extension group
If all extensions are busy, a busy tone will be
number, press the NEXT button.
heard.
To return to the previous extension group
The “Setting (Call Hunting)” on page 3-l 5 must
number, press the PREV button.
be set to “Enable” mode for Hunting Type to To go to the desired extension group
be used. number, press the SELECT button and then
dial the extension group number.
Programming
7. Repeat steps 4 to 6, to program the
1. Dial (09).
hunting Type of the other groups.
“Hunting Type” will be displayed.

8. To return to the initial program mode,

2. Press the NEXT button.
press the END button.
“Group NO ?+” will be displayed.

Programming Table
See page 7-4.
3-16
 The selective use of this feature permits restricted dialing to specific stations. A Class of Service can be
assigned to a particular station which prohibits or limits that station’s dialing ability. The following are the
available eight Classes of Service.

I\ 1’ 2 3
Service
4
Class
5 6.7 8

operator calls A D D D D D D D

international calls A D D D D D D D

I toll calls IA IA IE ID ID ID ID ID I
I local calls(charged)l A I A I A I A I F I D I D I D I
I I I I I I I I

local calls A A A A A A G D

A : Allow
D : Deny
E (Service Class 3) : Only area code selected can be dialed.
F (Service Class 5) : Only Exchange code selected can be dialed.
G (Service Class 7) : Only Exchange code selected cannot be dialed.

The following should be set.

l “Area Type Selection” on page 3-18.
l “CO Operator Call-Boundary Class” on page 3-l 9.
l “Toll Restriction of System Speed Dialing” on page 3-20.
l “Allowable Exchange Code Selection” on page 3-21.
l “Area Code Entry For Class 3” on page 3-22.
l “Exchange Code Entry For Class 5” on page 3-23.
l “Exchange Code Entry For Class 7” on page 3-24.
l “Service Class Assignment of Toll Restriction” on page 3-67.

3-17
 until the desired type appears
type A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . default

type B
type C

. I

Description
Area types specific to local telephone numbers can be selected for toll restrictions.
There are three area types available as shown below.

Type A : Toll calls (long distance) Area code Exchange code

Local calls .................................. Exchange code Subscriber number

Type B : Toll calls (long distance) ........... Apa ,.ode Subscriber number

Local calls ................................. Exchange code Subscriber number

Type C : Toll calls (long distance) .......... 1 - Areacode

Local calls (charge) ....................

Local calls ................................ Exchange code Subscriber number

“Service Class Assignment of Toll Restriction” (on page 3-67) should be programmed.
When area type 6 or C is selected, the selected Exchange Code must be entered using the “Allowable Exchange
Code Selection” (on page 3-21) programming.

Programming Programming Table

1. Dial (10). See page 7-5.
“Area Type” will be displayed.

2. Press the NEXT button.

“Area Type - A” will be displayed and the
“A” will blink.

3. Repeat pressing the SELECT button until

the desired type (A, B, C) is displayed.

4. Press the MEMORY button.

The LCD will stop blinking.

5. To return to the initial program mode, press the

END button.

3-18
 ,................................... A=m : to select boundary class l...... default
121: class 2
131: class 3

cl4 :class4
05 :class5
cl6 : class 6
171 : class 7
q : class 8

Description Programming
“Toll Restriction”, if it is programmed, prohibits 1. Dial (11).
CO Operator Calls. However, the desired “Operator Class” will be displayed.
extensions can be permitted to call to CO
Operator by programming a boundary number 2. Press the NEXT button.
of service class. “Boundary Class-l” will be displayed and
CO Operator Calls are allowed at all the “1 ” will blink.
extension from service class 1 to the same
3. Dial the boundary class number (1 through 8).
service class number as the programmed
boundary number, but are prohibited at the 4. Press the MEMORY button.
extensions which has not done the above setting. The LCD will stop blinking.
Example : If Boundary Class 4 is set for
5. To return to the initial program mode, press
All extension numbers for which service classes 1 to
the END button.
4 have been assigned, then CO operator calls are
allowed, but extensions assigned service class 5 to
8 will be prohibited from placing CO operator calls. Programming table
(See the table below.) See page 7-5.

Boundary Class Number

Service Class of
Toll Restriction

A : CO Operator Calls are allowed.

D : CO Operator Calls are denied.

See “Service Class Assignment of Toll

Restriction” on page 3-67.

3-19
 ~.~~.~.‘..‘.‘..~.‘.~....~ until the desired mode appears
Restriction : will be restricted by a Service Class......:..default
No Restriction: will not be restricted.

Description Programming Table

Through programming, Toll restrictions (service See page 7-5.
classes 1 through 8) set for each extension can
be applied to System Speed dialing, too.
In the “Restriction” mode, System Speed dialing is
restricted according to the Service Class.
In the “No Restriction” mode, System Speed dialing
is not restricted according to the Service Class.

Programming
1. Dial (12).

“Restrct of SSD” will be displayed.

2. Press the NEXT button.

“Restriction” will be displayed and blink.

3. Press the SELECT button to alternate

between “Restriction” and “No Restriction”

to.select the desired mode.

4. Press the MEMORY button.

The LCD will stop blinking.

5. To return to the initial program mode, press

the END button.

3-20
 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~‘
until the desired
~~- memory code number (01 through 20)
appears

.-.............. .................._ CDE= exchange code with 3 digits

Nothing is stored . . . . . ..-default (all 20 memory codes)

m.............................................
AB=(Olm : memory number 01

12(kl: memory number 20 ’

Description Programming
The exchange code and area code usually differ 1. Dial (13).
for local and long distance calls, but in some “Ext. Local Code”will be displayed.

when Area Type B or Type C is selected with the 2. Press the NEXT button.
“Area Type Selection” (on page 3-18) programming. “Local NO ? + “will be displayed.
When you select these Area Types, you should 3. Dial the memory code number (01 through
register these exchange code as a local number. 20) or press the NEXT button.
So these registered exchange codes will allow you to Example:
make a local call. It is therefore necessary to register When dialing (01) or pressing the NEXT
these Exchange Codes to enable dialing of these button.
numbers. l The LCD will show “Local 01: ... ” when
nothing is stored in memory code number
“01 “.
When area code 212 has beenstored,
“Local 01 : 212” will be displayed.
Local call Exchange Codes when Type B is selected
4. Dial the local code, using 3 digits.
Exchange code
l To erase a wrong entry, press the CLEAR
button.
hod-oooo
5. Press the MEMORY button.
t : l The memory indicator will. be lit.
“O”or”1”
6. l To advance to the next memory code
Local call (charge) Exchange Codes when Type C is number, press the NEXT button.
l To return to the previous memory code
selected
number, press the PREV button.
Exchangecode l To go to the desired memory code
I ’ I
number, press the SELECT button and
then dial the memory code number.
7. Repeat steps 4 to 6. _.
“O”or”1 ”
8. To return to the initial program mode, press
the END button.
A maximum 20 Exchange Codes can be registered.

Programming Table.
See page 7-5.

3-21
 ,...........,.................. until the desired memory number (01 through 20) appears

i . . ...’. . . . . . . . . . ............... CI)E = areacode with 3 digits

Nothing is stored ,.....,defauIt (all 20 memory numbers)

.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . AB= [~~~~ : memory number 01 for storage of an area code

/a’k[ : memory numb& 20 for storage of an area code

Description 4. Dial the area code, using 3 digits.

l To erase a wrong entry, press the CLEAR
For Service Class 3 (see “Toll Restriction” on
button.
page 3-17) up to 20 area codes can be selected
for use in toll dialing. 5. Press the MEMORY button.
All area codes except those entered will be l The memory indicator will be lit.
denied.
6. l To advance to the next memory number,
All the extensions that are programmed for
press the NEXT button.
Service Class Selections 3 are assigned to the
l To return to the previous memory number,
same area code selection plan.
press the PREV button.
l To go to the desired memory number,
Programming
press the SELECT button and then dial the
1. Dial (14). memory number.
“Cls-3 Area Code” will be displayed.
7. Repeat steps 4 to 6.
2. Press the NEXT button.
8. To return to the initial program mode, press
“Area NO ? --)‘I will be displayed.
the END button.
3. Dial the memory number (01 through 20)
or press the NEXT button.
Programming Table.
Example:
See page 7-5.
When dialing (01) or pressing the NEXT
button.
l The LCD will show“Area-01 : .--” when
nothing is stored in memory number
“01 “.
When area code 212 has been stored,
“Area - 01 : 212” will be displayed.

3-22
 ~.~......~~.~........“‘..‘.‘.’ until the desired memory number (01 through 20) appears

: ........................ CDE = exchange co& with 3 digits

Nothing is stored ......... default (all 20 memory numbers)

. AB=pi/il: memory number 01 for storage of.exchange code

: memory number 20 for storage of exchange code

Description
For Service Class 5 (See “Toll Restriction” on 4. Dial the exchange code, using 3 digits.
l To erase a wrong entry, press the CLEAR
page 3-17), up to 20 exchange codes can be
button.
selected for use in local dialing (charged).
All exchange codes except those entered will 5. Press the MEMORY button.
be denied. l The memory indicator will be lit.
All extensions programmed for Service Class
Selections 5 are assigned to the same exchange 6. l To advance to the next memory number,
press the NEXT button.
code selection plan.
l To return to the previous memory number,
Programming press the PREV button.
l To go to the desired memory number,
1. Dial (15). press the SELECT button and then dial the
“Cls-5 Local Code” will be displayed. memory number.

2. Press the NEXT button.

7. Repeat steps 4 to 6.
“Local NO ? -+ ” will be displayed.
3. Dial the memory number (01 through 20) 8. To return to the initial program mode, press
the END button.
or press the NEXT button.
Example:
When dialing (01) or pressing the NEXT
Programming Table.
button.
See page 7-6.
l The LCD will show “Local 01 : --.” when
nothing is stored in memory number
“01 “.
When exchange code 392 has been
stored, “Local 01 : 392” will be
displayed.

3-23
 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~“
until
~‘~~~~~~~
the desired memory number (01 through 20) appears

I I
:........................... CDE = exchange digits

I
code with 3

Nothing is stored,..... default (all 20 memory numbers)

I I

I
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AB=mrl: memory number 01 for storage of exchange code

I ml
2 0 : memory number 20 for storage of exchange code I

Description
4. Dial the exchange code, using 3 digits.
For Service Class 7 (See “Toll Restriction” on
l To erase a wrong entry, press the CLEAR
page 3-17), up to 20 exchange codes can be
button.
selected for use in local dialing.
Exchange codes programmed will be denied. 5. Press the MEMORY button.
All the extensions that are programmed for l The memory indicator will be lit.
Service Class Selections 7 are assigned to the
6. l To advance to the next memory number,
same exchange code selection plan.
press the NEXT button.
l To return to the previous memory number,
Programming
press the PREV button.
1. Dial (16). l To go to the desired memory number,
“Cls-7 Local Code” will be displayed. press the SELECT button and then dial the
memory number.
2. Press the NEXT button.
“Local NO ? +” will be displayed. 7. Repeat steps 4 to 6.

3. Dial the memory number (01 through 20) 8. To return to the initial program mode, press
or press the NEXT button. the END button.
Example:
When dialing (01) or pressing the NEXT
Programming Table.
button.
See page 7-6.
l The LCD will show “Local 01 : . ..“when
nothing is stored in memory number
“01 “.
When exchange code 392 has been
stored, “Local 01 : 392” will be
displayed.

3-24
 A= 111: to sound after 1 minute
02 :after 2 minutes
cl3 :after 3 minutes ....... ..default
cl4 :after 4 minutes
cl5 :after 5 minutes
cl6 :after 6 minutes
cl7 : after 7 minutes
cl6 :after 8 minutes:
q9 : after 9 minutes

Description 4. Press the MEMORY button.

The LCD will stop blinking.

An alarm tone will be heard at the holding extension

to remind that you still has a call on hold. 5. To return to the initial program mode, press

The reminder will sound after 3 minutes but can the END button.

be changed.

There are 9 choices ranging from 1 minute to 9.

An alarm tone is heard from the built-in speaker Conditions

of the proprietary telephone and the handset
The hold time reminder is activated, even if the
receiver of the standard telephone.
hold recall time set is programmed to “Disable”.
See “List of Tones” on page 6-7.

Example:

4 minutes= lfim1411MEMORYl

Programming
Programming Table
1. Dial (17).
See page 7-6.
“Auto Hold Alarm” will be displayed.

2. Press the NEXT button.

“Time: 3 min” will be displayed and “3” will

blink.

3. Dial the time number (1 through 9).

3-25
 _.....,........................................ until the desired time appears

30sec--default
1 min.

1.5min.’
:
2min.

: Disable

Description Example:

When the handset of the holding extension is 1.5 minutes= [18Im ~ ml

replaced on call, you may have the automatic @GGzlFq

hold recall after the desired time elapses.

The hold recall can be removed or added.

Programming Table
See page 7-6.

Programming

1. Dial (18).

“Hold Recall Time” will be displayed.

2. Press the NEXT button.

“Time: 30 set” will be displayed and “30 set”

will blink.

3. Repeat pressing the SELECT button until the

desired time (30 set, 1 min, 1.5 min, 2 min,

Disable) is displayed.

4. Press the MEMORY button.

The LCD will stop blinking.

5. To return to the initial program mode, press

the END button.

3-26
 until the desired mode appears
..................

Description Programming ’

If a call is transferred to an extension, and the 1. Dial (19).

other extension does not answer the transferred “Transfer Recall” will be displayed.

call within 30 seconds, the call will return to you.

2. Press NEXT button.
The time may be changed to 2 minutes.
“Time: 30 set” will be displayed and the “30”
Refer to “Call Transfer-To Extension” on page 4- 18.
will blink.

3. Press the SELECT button to alternate between

“2 min” and “30 set” to select the desired

mode.

4. Press the MEMORY button.

The LCD will stop blinking.

5. To return to the initial program mode, press

the END button.

Programming Table

See page 7-6.

3-27
 until the desired time appears
1ring delay
2rings delay
3rings delay ._ default
4rings delay -. ‘_ _ -

Description Programming
Enables programming the call forwarding 1. Dial (20).
delayed start time (after 1, 2, 3, or 4 rings) in “Call FWD Delay” will be displayed.
case of no receiving the call when the “Call
Forwarding-Busy or No Answer” (on page 4-27) 2. Press the NEXT button.
feature is set. “3 rings delay” will be displayed and will
blink.

3. Repeat pressing the SELECT button until the

desired time is displayed.

4. Press the MEMORY button.

The LCD will stop blinking.

5. To return to the initial program mode, press

the END button.

Programming Table
See page 7-7.

3-28
 until the desired time appears
lsec : dials after I second
2sec : dials after 2 seconds
3sec : dials after 3 seconds .. ......-.default
4sec : dials after 4 seconds

Description Programming Table

Enables programming of the pickup dial (on See page 7-7.

page 5-18) start time (the delay between

picking up the handset and automatic dialing).

The default is 3 sec.,Which can be changed to 1,

2, or 4 sec.

Programming
1. Dial (21).
“Pickup Dial Time” will be displayed.
2. Press the NEXT button.
“PUD Time : 3sec” will be displayed and “3”
will blink.
3. Repeat Pressing the SELECT button until the
desired time ( lsec, 2sec, 3sec, 4sec ) is
displayed:
4. Press the MEMORY button.
The LCD will stop blinking.
5. To return to the initial program mode, press
the END button..

3-29
 _............................................_ AB= a_ : to limit the time to 1 minute
!

1 0 :to limit the time to 10 minutes

OD ..... . default

Description Conditions
Enable limiting of the time any outside line can be l To erase a wrong entry, press the CLEAR

used when “Call Transfer-To Outside Line” (on button.

page 4-19) or “Call Forwarding-To Outside Line”

Programming Table
(on page 4-29) is used to forward a outside call
See page 7-7.
to an outside line or when you call to any outside

line using DISA.

The default time is 10 min., but this can be

changed from 1 minute through 32 minutes.

Programming
1. Dial (22).

“CO-CO Dur. Limit” will be displayed.

2. Press the NEXT button.

“Time : 10 min” will be displayed and “10”

will blink.

3. Enter the duration limit with 1 or 2 digits

(1 through 32). z

4. Press the MEMORY button.

The LCD will stop blinking.

5. To return to the initial program mode, press

the END button.

3-30
 Description
By plugging output unit such as a printer with RS-232C, record of all incoming and outgoing calls, the contents registered
in System Programming and System Working Report can be confirmed.

n Information prints out on outside line calls.

l Starting time of call (Date, time) 0 Dialed number 0 Transfer mark “x”
l Extension number 0 Duration time of call l DISA Security Code
l CO number 0 Account code

Example of print out

Date Time EXT. CO Dial Number Duration Code

81201 a8 8:OOAM 101 06 l-201 -234-5678 00 :00’30” 0123

I
::: : : :
::: CL : : :
: : : : s....-second
:. :.. . . . .-. . . . . war day number called :. :.. . . . . . . . . . minute account
party code
;. . . . . . . . . . . . . . mont,, i . . . . . . . . hour
:..... Extension number
8120188 8:l OAM 120 03 ( DISA incoming) 00:00’50” 0

DISA
: *..*incoming call
Security
Code

OThe previous number of “=‘I that appears in the 0 Incoming calls

l Number of incoming calls
dial number indicates the line access number of the
l Number of answered calls
Host PBX (See page 3-51.) l Number of unanswered calls
0 The “ * ” that appears in front of the Time means l Percentage of answer
that the call is transferred. l Average ring time
l Average duration
0 DISA Security Code
0: No security mode 0 Outgoing calls
1: Security code 1 l Number of access requested
2: Security code 2 l Number of access succeeded
3: Security code 3 l Number of access failed
4: Security code 4 l Percentage of access succeeded I
5: Remote code l Average duration
0 CO Line number is indicated instead of Extension
nThe following features should be set.
number when call to CO line by using Direct Inward 0 “RS-232C Communication Parameters” on page 3-32.
System Access. l “SMDR Parameters“ on page 3-35.
n System programming contents are printed out. l “Incoming/Outgoing Call Selection for printing” on page 3-36.
0 System parameter l “Secret Speed Dial/One Touch Dial Printing” on page 3-36.
0 CO parameter l “System Data Dump” on page 3-37.
l Extension parameter
l “Duration Time Count Start Mode” on page 3-40.
l DSS parameter
0 “Account Code Input Mode” on page 3-71.
l Speed Call
n System Working Report is printed out. When plugging a printer into the KX-Tl23211
l Date of record make sure that the printer power is off.
l Starting date of recording
l Date and time printed out
3-31
(Carriage return for a new line)
until the desired code appears

(Baud rate)
:........................................... until the desired baud rate appears
- IlOB
1508
300B
600B
1200B ... .. . . . . . . . ..default
2400B
48008
_ 96008

(Word length)
; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . until the desired

(Parity)
!........... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . until the desired mode appears

_ None
Mark .... . .. .. ... .. . d,efault
Space
Even
L Odd

(Stop bit length)

i . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . until the desired

3-32
Carriage return for a new line Word length -
A new line code indicates what type of code is A word length code indicates how many bits
needed for the print head on a printer to move the compose a character.
first character position on the next line.
7 bits when 7 bits are required.
when “CR+LF”is required from 8 bits when 8 bits are required.

when “CR” is required from a printer.

Stop bit length

CR=Carriage Return
LF=Line Feed. A stop bit length code indicates the end of a bit
string which composes a character.

Baud rate when one bit is required for end detection.

A baud rate code indicates the data transmission

speed from the system to a printer.

1lOB when 110 baud is required.

150B when 150 baud is required.
300 B when 300 baud is required. The default value is the same as that of the
600 B when 600 baud is required. Panasonic data terminal, KX-D4985, KX-D4910D,
1200 B when 1200 baud is required. KX-D4911, KX-D4920, etc, except baud rate.
2400 B when 2400 baud is required.
4800 B when 4800 baud is required.
9600 B when 9600 baud is required.

Parity
A parity code indicates what type of parity is used
to detect an error in a string of bits composing a
character.

None when an error checking function is not

r
%
required from a printer.
Mark when a Mark is required from a printer. 8
Space when a Space is required from a printer. F
Even when an Even is required from a printer. E
Odd when an Odd is required from a printer.
z

3-33
 Programming
1. Dial (23). 12. Repeat pressing the SELECT button until the
“RS232C Parameter” will be displayed. desired parity code is displayed.

2. Press the NEXT button. 13. Press the M EMORY button.

“NL-Code : CR + LF” will be displayed and The LCD will stop blinking.
“CR+ LF” will blink.
14. Press the NEXT button.
3. Press the SELECT button to alternate “Stop Bit : 1bit” will be displayed and the
between “CR + LF” and “CR” to select the “1 bit” will blink.
desired mode.
15. Press the SELECT button to alternate
4. Press the MEMORY button. between“1 bit”and “2bits” to select the
.
The LCD will stop blinking. desired mode.

5. Press the NEXT button. 16. Press the MEMORY button.

“Baud Rate : 1200B” will be displayed and the The LCD will stop blinking.
“1200B” will blink.
17. To return to the initial program mode,press
6. Repeat pressing the SELECT button until the the END button.
desired baud rate is displayed.

7. Press the MEMORY button. Programming Table

The LCD will stop blinking. See page 7-7.

6. Press the NEXT button.

“Word Lengt : 7bit” will be displayed and the Conditions
“7bit” will blink. 0 To return to the previous mode, press the
PREV button instead of the NEXT button.
9. Press the SELECT button to alternate between
“7bit” and “8bit” to select the desired mode. 0 The following combinations are disallowed.
mode.
parity I word length I stop bit length I
10. Press the MEMORY button.
mark 1 8 2
The LCD will stop blinking.
space 8 1
11. Press the NEXT button. space 8 2
“Parity : Mark” will be displayed and the
“Mark” will blink.
If any of the above disallowed combinations are
selected, Warning tone will be heard. Press
the NEXT button and then repeat the procedure
of programming.

3-34
 (Page length)

(Skip perforation)

Page length
0 print head does not skip.
The page length may be selected to position a 1 print head skips the last line.
title and data on each page. 2 print head skips the last 2 lines.
A page length code indicates the numbe’r of . i

lines per page. !& print head skips the last 95 lines.
A title will be printed on the first 3 lines of each
page.
Programming
4 4 lines per page 1. Dial (24).
“SMDR Parameter” will be displayed.

99 99 lines per page 2. Press the NEXT button.

“Page Length : 66” will be displayed and the
‘66” will blink.
STANDARD CONTINUOUS PAPER(ll inches)
3. Dial (4 through 99) for the page length
entry.

4. Press the MEMORY button.

paw 0 66 lines z The LCD will stop blinking.
length
skip 5. Press the NEXT button.
I perforation ‘Skip Perf : 0” will be displayed and the “0”
_~ ____....._......._ ‘6’
will blink.
0 0
0 0
0 t 0 6. Dial (0 through 95) for the skip-perforation
0 machine code entry.
z perforations 0
E
7. Press the MEMORY button.
The LCD will stop blinking.

To print data, page length must be longer than 8. To return to the initial program mode, press
skip perforation by 4 or more lines. the END button.

Skip perforation
Programming Table
The skip perforation code indicates the number See page 7-8.
of lines to be skipped. When the print head
reaches the line designated, the print head
moves to the top position of the next page.
3-35
 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. until the desired mode appears
Outgoing : On __ to print outgoing calls __ default
[ Outgoing : Off __ to stop printing

, .. .. until the desired mode appears

Incoming : On __ to print incoming calls __ default
[ Incoming : Off __ to stop printing

00ti00~0~
25 NEXT SELECT MEMORY NEXT SELECT MEMORY END

Description 4. Press the MEMORY button.

It is possible to print outgoing calls or The LCD will stop blinking.
. incoming calls or both.
5. Press the NEXT button.
“Incoming : On” will be displayed and the
Programming
“On” will blink.
1. Dial (25).
6. Press the SELECT button to alternate between
“Duration Log” will be displayed.
“On” and “Off” to select the desired mode.
2. Press the NEXT button.
7. Press the MEMORY button.
“Outgoing : On” will be displayed and the
The LCD will stop blinking.
“On” will blink.
8. To return to the initial program mode, press
3. Press the SELECT button to alternate between
the END button.
the “On” and” Off” to select the desired
mode. -
Programming Table
See page 7-8.

,............................. until the desired mode appears

I I

Description ’ 3. Press the SELECT button to:alternate

Enables programming to print out secret dialing between “No Printing”’ and “Printing” to
numbers, even though these secret numbers are select the desired mode.
not displayed on the LCD during speed dialing
4. Press the MEMORY button.
(“System Speed Dialing Entry” on page 3-5) or
The LCD will stop blinking.
one-touch dialing (on page 4-4) are used.
5. To return to the initial program mode, press
Programming the END button.

1. Dial (26)
“Secret Printing” will be displayed. Programming Table:
2. Press the NEXT button. See page 7-a.
“No Printing” will be displayed and blink.

3-36
0 stop output
i..............‘.‘..- until the Stop Output appears

l All Parameters ,..................................... until desired data dump mode appears

i
- All Para ..... ..... ...... ..... ... default
0 System Parameter
System Para
l Speed Dial
co Para
EXT Para
DSS Para
Speed Dial
- stop output

o CO Parameter (Outside)
................. until the CO Para appears

i . . . . . . .1 ABEN : to assign the same on all 12 CO’s

mliJ: on CO 01

i 1 m:onCO12

El~nn~nn
27 NEXT SELECT MEMORY AB MEMORY END

l Extension Parameter
i.‘.‘.“...‘..‘.““- until the EXT Para appears

: to assign the same on all 32 jack numbers

l DSS Parameter
~~~~~~~~~~~~‘~‘
until
~~‘~~-
the DSS Para appears

.. . . A= q : to assign the same on all 2 DSS’s

[71 :onDSSl
.

02 :onDSS2

OO”O’ $‘~
27 NEXT SELECT MEMORY A MEMORY END

3-37
Description Extension parameters

Six separate printouts are available. nWhen the Proprietary telephone is connected
They are (1) System parameters (2) CO at extension.

parameters (3) Extension parameters (4) DSS Telephone type

parameters (5) Speed dial and (6) All parameters Extension name
Extension group
System parameters
Toll restriction
Day/ Night
Account code input mode
Trunk group assignments
CO transfer mode
Extension number assignments CO forward mode
Extension group assignments Executive busy override
Hunting.group Executive busy override deny
Operator extension DND override
DSS console set Outgoing preference
DSS operation mode Incoming preference
Doorphone receive extensions Line ringing assignment

Area type Intercom call

BGM mode
Speed dial restriction
Do not disturb
Operator call class
Call forwarding
Area code of class-3
Call waiting
Exchange code of class-5
Call waiting tone
Exchange code of class-7
Data line security
Exchange code with exception
Dial Call pickup deny
SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) Absent message
parameters
Timed reminder
RS-232C parameters Station lock
Hold recall time Auto answer mode
Auto hold alarm time CO button assignments
Transfer recall time DSS button assignments
Call forwarding count Feature button assignment
Pickup dial waiting time <DSS Console Items>>
External paging access tone Console type
Active DTM F receiver DSS connection
CO-CO Duration time limit DSS button assignments

DISA parameters Feature button assignments

OPX
OHCA mode n When the standard telephone is connected at
extension
CO parameters
Telephone type
Connection
Extension name
CO mode
Extension group
Dialing parameters
Toll restriction
Trunk group
Account code input mode
Access with “9” CO transfer mode
Host PBX access code
CO forward mode
Hookswitch flash time Executive busy override
Disconnect time Executive busy override deny
Pause time DND override
CPC detection
Outgoing extension
 To print CO Parameter ;

1. Dial (27).
Do not disturb 2. Press the NEXT button.
Call forwarding
Call waiting 3. Repeat pressing the SELECT button until
Data line security the “CO Para” is displayed. _
Dial call pickup deny 4. Press the MEMORY button.
Absent message “CO NO ? +” is displayed.
Timed reminder
Station lock 5. Dial the CO number (01 through 12).
Pickup dial When dialing (Ol),
“CO NO ? + 01” will be displayed.
DSS parameters
6. Press the MEMORY button.
Console type
SMDR printer will print out.
Pair extension
DSS connection 7. Repeat steps 5 to 6, to print the other CO
DSS button assignment parameter.
Feature button assignment
To print Extension Parameter ;
Speed dial
Speed access codes (00 through 99) in 1. Dial (27).
which phone numbers are stored may be
2. Press the NEXT button.
printed.
3. Repeat pressing the SELECT button until the
All parameters
“EXT Para” is displayed.
System parameters
CO parameters 4. Press the MEMORY button.
Extension parameters “Jack NO ? +” will be displayed.
DSS parameters
5. Dial the jack number (01 through 32).
Speed Dial
When dialing (Ol),
“Jack NO ? + 01” will be displayed.

Operation 6. Press the MEMORY button.

SMDR printer will print out.
To stop the printout ;
7. . Repeat steps 5 to 6, to print the other jack
1. Dial (27).
number.

2. Press the NEXT button.

To print DSS Parameter ;

3. Repeat pressing the SELECT button until 1. Dial (27).

Stop Output is displayed.
2. Press the NEXT button.
4. Press the MEMORY button. 3. Repeat pressing the SELECT button until the
“DSS Para” is displayed.

4. Press the MEMORY button.

To print System Parameters, Speed Dial or
“DSS NO ? +” will be displayed.
All Parameters ;
5. Dial the DSS number (1 or 2j.
1. Dial (27).
When dialing (l),
“System Data Dump” will be displayed.
“DSS NO ? + 1” will be displayed.
2. Press the NEXT button.
6. Press the MEMORY button.
“Menu : All Para” will be displayed and
SMDR printer will print out.
“All Para” will blink.
7, . Repeat steps 5 to 6, to print the other DSS
3. Repeat pressing the SELECT button until
parameter.
the desired data dump mode is displayed.

4. Press the MEMORY button. After completing printihg, to return to the initial
SMDR printer will print out. mode ;

5. Repeat steps 3 to 4, to print the other data 1. Press the END button.
dumps.
Programming Table
See page 7-9.
 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. . .. . . . . . until the desired time app&&
Instantly
5s after dial ............................. default
1OS after dial -_ .:
15s after dial
~IINEXTIISELECTIIMEMORY

Description Example:

The duration time of the conversation is 10 seconds after dialing

displayed on the LCD and is printed on the = ~l1NEXTIISELECTIIMEMORY]
printer.
Program the starting time of the record. Programming Table
l Instantly after the CO line is captured. See page 7-9.
l 5 seconds after the dialing.
l 10 seconds after the dialing.
l 15 seconds after the dialing.

Programming
1. Dial (28).
“Durat-Time Count” will be displayed.

2. Press the NEXT button.

“5s after dial” will be displayed and blink.

3. Repeat pressing the SELECT button until the

desired time (Instantly, 5s after dial, 10s after
dial, 15s after dial) is displayed.

4. Press the MEMORY button.

The LCD will stop blinking.

5. To return to the initial program mode, press

the END button.

3-40
 ,..............until the desired external paging equipment number (1 or 2) appears
I
_........................... , until the-desired mode appears
Enable- . ..-...default (external pagingj and 2)
Disable =&

Description
6. Repeat steps 3 to 5, to program the access tone
The acknowledge tone that is heard after of the other external paging equipment.

accessing the external paging equipment can be 7. To return to the initial program mode, press
removed or added at the customer’s request. the END button.

Refer to “Paging-External” on page 4-25.

Example:
Programming To eliminate the access paging tone on external

1. Dial (29). paging 1.

“Ext-Pag Ack-Tone” will be displayed.

piqiEElINEXTIJSELECTIIMEMORY[
2. Press the NEXT button.
“Pag NO?+” will be displayed.

3. Press the NEXT button. Programming Table

“Pag 1: Enable” will be displayed and See page 7-9.
“Enable” will blink.

4. Press the SELECT button to alternate between

“Enable” and “Disable” to select the desired
mode.

5. Press the MEMORY button.

The LCD will stop blinking.

3-41
 Description Programming
c
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) is the 1. Dial (31).
feature that enables outside line incoming calls to “DISA Parameters” will be displayed.
be directed to an extension phone by designating
it or to an outside line through the KX-Tl23211. 2. Press the NEXT button.
When programmed, the following contents of “Control Code “ x “‘I will be displayed.
DISA can be set up. 0 You may repeat pressing the NEXT button
until the desired mode (Control code “3~ “,
n Control code “ * ” Prolong Time, Answer. Delay Time, Tone
Sets to ignore the signal of ‘I*” key. Detect, Security Type, Remote Security
Code, User Security Code) is displayed.
n Prolong Time
Sets duration time of talking past CO-to-CO
3. Press the SELECT button.
Duration Time Limit when dialing out on an
“Code “ *” : Enable” will be displayed and
. outside line (2, 3, 4 or 5 minutes)
“Enable” will blink.
n Answer Delay Time
Changes the time from receiving a call to 4. Press the SELECT button to alternate between
answering it. (0, 5, 10 or 15 seconds) “Enable” and “Disable” to select the desired
mode.
n Tone Detect
KX-T123211 is set whether detect that the
5. Press the MEMORY button.
call is disconnected after finish having a
The LCD will stop blinking.
conversation on CO line with Tone.
Enable . . . . detect with Tone.
6. Press the NEXT button.
Disable . . . don’t detect with Tone.
“Prolong Time” will be displayed.
n Security Type
Sets to require or not a Security Code when 7. Press the SELECT button.
dialing an extension or outside line. “Prolg Time: 5 min” will be displayed and “5”
l None Security will blink.
This is the mode in which Security Code
is unnecessary when dialing both an 6. Repeat pressing the SELECT button until the
extension or outside line. desired add time (2, 3, 4 or 5 minutes) is
l Trunk Security displayed.
This is the mode in which Security Code
is necessary when dialing an outside line, 9. Press the MEMORY button.
but unnecessary when dialing an The LCD will stop blinking.
extension.
l All Security 10. Press the NEXT button.
This is the mode in which Security Code “Ans. Delay Time” will be displayed.
is neccessary when dialing both extension
and outside line. 11. Press the SELECT button.
“Delay Time: 10 set” will be_displayed and
n Remote Security-Code
“10” will blink.
Remote Security Code is used when
Remote Administration is done with DISA.
12. Press the SELECT button until the desired
n User Security Code delay time (0, 5, 10 or 15 seconds) is
User Security Code is used when dial to displayed.
extension or CO line with DISA.
User Security Code can be set by 4 types. 13. Press the MEMORY button.
The LCD will stop blinking.
I

3 - 43
14. Press the NEXT button. 29. Dial the code number with 4 digits (0000
“Tone Detect” will be displayed. through 9999)..
0 To erase an incorrect entry, press the
15. Press the SELECT button. CLEAR button.
“Tone Det: Enable” will be displayed and
“Enable” will blink. 30. Press the MEMORY button.
The LCD will stop blinking.
16. Press the SELECT button to alternate between
“Enable” and “Disable” to select the desired 31. To return to the initial program mode, press the
mode. END button.

17. Press the MEMORY button. Programming Table

The LCD will stop blinking.
See page 7-10

16. Press the NEXT button.

Conditions
“Security Type” will be displayed.
0 The Direct Inward System Access (DISA) cards
19. Press the SELECT button. are necessary to program the Remote Security
“Trunk Security” will be displayed and blink. Code and User Security Code.

20. Repeat pressing the SELECT button until the

desired security mode (None Security, Trunk
Security or All Security) is displayed.

21. Press the MEMORY button.

The LCD will stop blinking.

22. Press the NEXT button.

“Remote Sec. Code” will be displayed.

23. Press the SELECT button.

“RMT-Code : 70000” will be displayed and
“0000” will blink.

24. Dial the code number with 4 digits (0000

through 9999).
l To erase an incorrect entry, press the
CLEAR button.

25. Press the MEMORY button.

The LCD will stop blinking.

26. Press the NEXT button.

“User Sec. Code” will be displayed.

27. Press the SELECT button.

“USR-Code 1 : 60000” will be displayed and
“0000” will blink.

26. Repeat pressing the SELECT button until the

desired user code (1, 2, 3 or 4) is displayed.
 ~............~Iuntil the desired mode appears

Description Programming
Enables a standard telephone installed outside the 1. Dial (32).
premise to work as an extension in the premise “OPX Feature” will be displayed.
through public or private lines.
2. Press the NEXT button.
Optional Off Premise Extension (OPX) Card
“OPX: Disable” will be displayed and
KX-T123285 and Unit KX-T123286 are
“Disable” will blink.
necessary.
3. Press the SELECT button to alternate between
Enable and Disable to select the desired mode.

4. Press the MEMORY button.

The LCD will stop blinking.

5. To return to the initial program mode, press the

END button.

Programming Table
See page 7-11.
 until the desired mode appears

Description Programming
Allows an extension user to intrude through the 1. Dial (33).
speaker into another extension that is in “OHCA Feature” will be displayed.
conversation using the handset. 2. Press the NEXT button.
(This feature only is available when KX-T123235 “OHCA: Enable” will be displayed and
sets are used.) “Enable” will blink.

3. Press the SELECT button to alternate between

Enable and Disable to select the desired mode.

4. Press the MEMORY button.

The LCD will stop blinking.

5. To return to the initial program mode, press the

END button.

Programming Table
See page 7-l 1.
 until the desired mode appears
Dump Start . . . . . . . . - - default
Dump Stop
SWR Data Clear

. I

Description Programming
KX-Tl23211 automatically records the working 1. Dial (34).
state of System. “Working Report” will be displayed.
The recording starts when the System Working
2. Press the NEXT button.
Report is cleared.
“Dump Start” will be displayed and blink.
Programming this feature enables to clear the
record or output the records of working state to 3. Repeat pressing the SELECT button until the
SMDR. desired mode (Dump Stan, Dump Stop or
SWR Data Clear) is displayed.
Contents Recorded 4. Press the MEMORY button.
1. Date of record The LCD will stop blinking.
0 The date and time cleared. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4, to select another
“
0 The date and time printed out.
mode.
2. Incoming calls
6. To return to the initial program mode, press the
The number of incoming calls
END button.
The number of answered of incoming calls
The number of unanswered of incoming calls
Programming Table
The ratio of the answered calls to the
incoming calls See page 7-11.
Number of answered calls
x 100 (%)
Number of incoming calls
The average time from receipt of call to
answer of the incoming and answered calls
The average duration time of talk of the
answered calls

3. Outgoing calls
l The number of access requested
0 The number of access succeeded
0 The number of access failed
0 The ratio of access succeeded
Number of access succeeded
x 100 (%)
Number of access requested
0 The average duration of the dialed calls.

3 - 47
 Outside Line Feature

......... until the desired CO number (01 through 12) appears.

until the desired mode appears

Connect . . ..-......default (all 12 Cd’s)
Not Connect

i. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . /I@= q

1.
: to assign the same on all 12 CO’s
ml?J :onCOOl

lij~l : on CO 12

IDescription 7. Repeat steps 4 to 6, to program the mode

You can program which outside line is on the other CO lines.
connected and which one is not connected.
When an extension automatically selects an 8. To return to the initial program mode,
idle outside line, the extension can be press the END button.
connected to it quickly.

Programming Conditions
1. Dial (40). 0 When you dial “4’ instead of pressing the
“CO Connection” will be displayed. NEXT button at step 3, in case all of 12 CO’s
have been programmed to “Connect”,
2. Press the NEXT button.
“CO *: Connect” will be displayed.
“CO NO ? +” will be displayed.
In case each of 12 CO’s has been
3. Press the NEXT button or dial the CO programmed either “Connect” or “Not
number (01 through 12). Connect”, “CO *: Mixed” will be displayed.
“CO 01 : Connect” will be displayed and
“Connect” will blink.

4. Press the SELECT button, to alternate

between Connect and Not Connect to select Example :
the desired mode. CO 1 and 2 .................... Connect
CO 3 ........................ Not Connect
5. Press the MEMORY button.
The LCD will stop blinking. 1. I40JINEXTJINEXTJJl
8. l To advance to the next CO number, 2. I~~~
press the NEXT button. 3. WISELECTJliGKFllKJ
0 To return to the previous CO number,
press the PREV button.
0 To go to the desired CO number, Programming Table
press the SELECT button and See page 7-12.
then dial the CO number.
3-48
 !.....................-unti I the desired CO number (01 through 12) appears
, ...................................... until the desired dial mode appears
..
DTMF Mode . . . . . . default (all 12 CO’s)
Pulse Mode
Call Blocking Mode

;.................................................... AB= q : to assign the same on all 12 CO’s

lolj?J : on CO 01
!

nr;il :onCO12

Description
Allows the user to select the dialing mode (tone, 4. Repeat pressing the SELECT button until the
pulse or call blocking) of each CO (Central Office) desired dial mode isdisplayed.
line. 5. Press the MEMORY button.
DTMF Dial Mode The LCD will stop blinking .
The dial signal from the extension (with tone
6. l To advance to the next CO number,
or pulse dial mode) will be converted to TONE.
press the NEXT button.
TONE will be transmitted to the Central Office.
l To return to the previous CO number,
PULSE Dial Mode
press the PREV button.
The dial signal from the extension (with tone
l To go to the desired CO number,
or pulse dial mode) will be converted to PULSE.
press the SELECT button and then dial the
PULSE will be transmitted to the Central Office.
CO number.
Call Blocking Mode
7. Repeat Steps 4 to 6, to propgram the dialing
Set this mode on outside lines that can receive both
mode on the other central office lines.
DTMF (Tone) and Pulse dial, but under contract with
the Central Office for Pulse dialing only. 6. To return to the initial program mode, press
When dialing the outside line using a touch the END button.
tone telephone, only Pulse dial is sent to the
Central Off ice. Conditions
l If the KX-Tl23211 is connected to the Central
Programming
Office directly or installed behind a host PBX,
1. Dial (41). which receives both tone and pulse dials, the
“CO Dial Mode” will be displayed. KX-Tl23211 must be used only in the tone dial
2. Press the NEXT button. mode.
“CO NO ?+” will be displayed. 0 If your extension is not a Proprietary
3. Press the NEXT button or dial the CO number telephone but a standard telephone, and the
(01 through 12). dial tone frequency of CO Lines is 600H2, the
“CO 01 : DTMF Mode” will be displayed and KX-Tl23211 must be used only for the pulse
“DTMF Mode” will blink. dialing mode for the CO Lines. -.

Programming Table
See page 7-12.

3-49
 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -until the desired CO number (01 through 12) appears

........................ up to 8 outside access codes each with a

....~~~~~~~~
default (all 12 CO’s)

. .. .. .. ... .. ... .. .. .. .. ... .. .. ... AB= r;;l : to assign the same on all 12 CO’s
ml :onCOOl

&I1 2 :onCO12

Description
If KX-T123211 is installed behind a host PBX, the 6. l To advance to the next CO number,
host PBX may require a pause time to access press the NEXT button.
Central Office Lines. This feature enables the host l To return to the previous CO number,
PBX to automatically pause via programming the press the PREV button.
outward dialing access codes of the host PBX. l To go to the desired CO number,
press the SELECT button and then dial the
CO number.
Programming r
7. Repeat steps 4 to 6 to program each of the
1. Dial (43). CO’s of the KX-T123211.
“HostPBXAccess”wiII be displayed. l
8. To return to the initial program mode, press
8
2. Press the NEXT button. the END button.
F
“CO NO ?+” will be displayed.
E
Example:
3. Press the NEXTbutton or dial the CO number
K
(01 through 12). l AccessCodes ,82,83,9onCOl
l The LCD will show “CO 01 : Not Stored”
when nothing is stored in CO 1.
1MEMORY IIENDI
When the outside access codes 81,82 has
been stored, “CO 01 : 81,82” will be Programming Table
displayed.
See page 7-12.
4. Enter up to 8 outward access codes each
with a maximum of 2 digits, punctuating each
code with the “ 1” button.
l To erase a wrong entry, press the CLEAR
button.

5. Press the MEMORY button.

3-51
 :..............,........until the desired CO number (01 through 12) appears

I”“““““““““““““““” C= dial the trunk group number (1 through 8) I

q : trunk group number 1

q : trunk group number 8 _- _

efault
CO 01 is assigned to Trunk group 1.

CO’07 is assigned to Trunk group 7

~INEXT*h~(IENDI CO 08,09, 10,ll and 12 are assigned to Trunk group 8.

;m$akl
..................... AB= El : to assign the same on all 12 CO’s
mlil :onCOOl

mm :onCO 12 D

Description 2. Press the NEXT button.

When outside lines are grouped, an idle line “CO NO ? +” will be displayed.
within the trunk group is automatically found and 3. Press the NEXT button or dial the CO number
connected when an outside call is placed. (01 through 12).
A maximum 8 groups can be assigned. “CO 01: TRK GRP-1” will be displayed and “1”
For example, if subscribing with multiple will blink.
telephone service companies, the CO lines can be
4. Dial the trunk group number (1 through 8).
grouped as shown below by each company.
5. Press the MEMORY button.
The LCD will stop blinking.
Trunk Group 1
Service Company A
6. l To advance to the next CO number,
press the NEXT button.
Trunk Group 2 l To return to the previous CO number,
press the PREV button.
0 To go to the desired CO number,
Trunk Group 3
Service Company C press the SELECT button and then dial the
CO number.
Refer to “Outward Dialing (Individual Trunk Group
Access)” on page 4-3 and “Flexible CO Button (To 7. Repeat steps 4 to 6, to program the trunk group
_.
Assign into Trunk Group Access Button)” on page number on the other CO lines.
4-57.
6. To return to the initial program mode, press the
rrogrammmg END button.
1. Dial (44). Programming Table
“Trunk Group” will be displayed.
See page 7-13.
3-52
 _....................................- until the desired CO number (01 through 12) appears

(...................................................
until the desired jack number appears
m : on jack number 01

_-
m : on jack number 32 _ :_
. fi[ : to assign the same on all 32 jacks

until the desired mode appears

(all 32 jack numbers)

EF =m : to assign the same on all 32 jack numbers

i ~~~~~~~~” ‘zbn jack number 01
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I i I

; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ;, CD=m : to assign the same on all 12 CO’s ’

Description 7. l To advance to the next jack number,
Through programming, you can select which press the m button.
extensions may be used for outward dialing by
l To return to the previous jack number,
using the day or night mode of operation.
press the m button.
Programming l To go to the desired jack number,
1. l Dial (45) for day mode.
“Day Out CO” will be displayed.
press the q button and then dial the
jack number.
l Dial (46) for night mode
“Night Out CO” will be displayed. 8. Repeat steps 5 to 7, to program the assignment
2. Press the NEXTbutton. of the other jack numbers.
“CO NO ? +” will be displayed. 9. l To advance to the next CO number, press
3. Press the NEXT button or dial the CO number the NEXT button.
(01 through 12). l To return to the previous CO number, press
“CO 01 : TFnable” will be displayed. the PREV button.
jack number l To go to the desired CO number, press the

4. Repeat pressing the m button until the SELECT button and then dial the CO number.
desired jack number appears, or press the 10. Repeat steps 4 to 9, to program the
q button and then dial the jack number. assignment of the other CO numbers. .
5. Press the SELECT button to alternate between 11. To return to the initial program mode, press
“Enable” and “Disable” to select the desired the END button.
mode.
Programming Table
6. Press the MEMORY button.
The LCD will stop blinking. See page 7-14 or 7-15.

3-53
 i.......-..............................until the desired CO number (01 through 12) appears

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . until the &sired jack number appears

-I : on jack number 01 _

& :onjacknumber32 ___I

m : to assign the same on all 32 jacks

until the desired mode appears

.=......default (all 32 jack numbers)

CD=[;;l : to assign the same on all 12 CO’s

Description l To advance to the next jack number,

Through programming, you can select which press the m button.
extensions will ring on incoming calls from the l To return to the previous jack number,
Central Office during the day or night time.
press the m button.
Programming l To go to the desired jack number,
1. 0 Dial (47) for day mode. press the q button and then dial the
“Day In CO” will be displayed. jack number.
0 Dial (48) for night mode.
“Night In CO” will be displayed. 8. Repeat steps 5 to 7, to program the
assignment of the other jack numbers.
2. Press the NEXT-button.
“CO NO ?+” will be displayed. 9. l To advance to the next CO number, press
the NEXT button.
3. Press the NEXT button or dial the CO number l To return to the previous CO number, press
(01 through 12). the PREV button.
“CO 01 : vnable” will be displayed. l To go to the desired CO number, press the
lack number SELECT button and then dial the CO
4. Repeat pressing the m button until the number.
desired jack number appears, or press the 10. Repeat steps 4 to 9, to program the
# button and then dial the jack number.
cl assignment of the other CO numbers.

5. Press the SELECT button to alternate between 11. To return to the initial program mode, press
“Enable” and “Disable” to select the desired the END button.
mode. Programming Table
6. Press the MEMORY button. See page 7-16 or 7-l 7.
The LCD will stop blinking.
3-54
Example:
l Company XYZ would like incoming calls from the Central Office during the day mode to be received at
the following zone.

Jack no. of Extension Programming CO no.

KX-Tl23211

Jackno.05,06“-,,’

Programming .

1. 14 m E\ kl m m ‘k ......*.. ’ . . . . . .; ;
All CO numbers
“~isable”on all
have been set to
jack numbers.
l

*a

2. ( H or m m ) CFCT] m .... .‘... .n. .(. CO number 01 has been set to

_
. * “Enable” on jack number 01.

* ‘CO’number 01 has been set to

3. ( m or m ) jFFi%FllhnEMORYl............... ’” “l%able” on jack number 02.

CO number 02 has been set to

4. ( m Or m m ) q m lsEtECTl llVIEMoRVl ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ “Enable” on jack number 03,

CO number 02 has been set to

5. ( m or ml ) lsELECd -1. ...............
’ ’“Enable” on jack number 04.

CO number 03 has been set to

6. ( l&?l or lsELECTl m ) •l lQsl lsELECTl m.. . . ’“Enable” on jack number 05.

CO number 03 has been set to

7. ( m or lsod )lsElm ................
. “Enable” on jack number 06.
I

6.

Conditions
l When an operator is not set and OGM card is installed, program the CO line which is set with DISA to
ring on any extensions.
3-55
 :.................,......,..............-until the desired CO number (01 through 12) appears .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . until the desired jack number appears

m : on jack number 01

: on jack number 32 ,
n : to assign the same on all 32 jacks

until the desired mode appears

default (all 32 jack numbers)

EF =B : to assign the same on all 32 jack numbers

uescnpuon
m----:-a:--

The ringing start time during the day can be 7. l To advance to the next jack number,
delayed on a designated extension(s) when an press the m button.
incoming call is received from the CO.The CO line l To return to the previous jack number,
that you want to delay the ring start time during the press the m button.
day or night mode can be selected through the l To go to the desired jack number,
programming. press the m button and then dial the
Programming jack number.
1. l Dial (49) for day mode.
“Day Delayed CO” will be displayed. 8. Repeat steps 5 to 7, to program the
0 Dial (50) for nrght~mode. assignment of the other jack numbers.
“Night Delayed CO” will be displayed. 9. l To advance to the next CO number, press
2. Press the NEXT button. the NEXT button.
“CO NO ? +” will be displayed. l To return to the previous CO number, press
3. Press the NEXT button or dial the CO number the PREV button.
IA4 +hr..,,nh i3\ _ -I-_ -- I_ AL_ -I--:.._-I fir\ _..__I-__ -..---*I-_
\” I Llll”ULJll IL,. m I u go w III~:uf3slrw bu numoer, press trte
“CO 01 : ~mmdtly” will be displayed. SELECT button and then dial the CO
lack number number.
4. Repeat pressing the m button until the 10. Repeat steps 4 to 9, to program the
desired jack number appears, or press the assignment of the other CO numbers.
- q
button and then dial the jack number. j!. Tn rat, ,rn tn the, initinl nrnnrnm
I” ICZLUIII L” LI1-z ,lIILIcII p’“y,a”
mnrln
llI”“G,
,-.rdec
fJl.zPS

5. Repeat pressing the SELECT button until the the END button.
desired mode is displayed. Programming Table
6. Press the MEMORY button. See pages 7-18 through 7-21.
The LCD will stop blinking. 3-56
 n Selecting the “Normal” or “DISA” mode

:~.~..............‘......‘.~..~.~.~....~- until the desired CO number (01 through 12) appears.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . ............ . . . . ...... . . . until the Normal or DlSA mode appearS
Normal . . . . . default (all 12 CO’s)

I . .. ... .. ... .. .. ... .. ... .. ... . ... .

I CD= q : to assign the same on all 12 CO’s 1
mliJ :onCOOl
n Selecting the “DIL” mode

I
,........................................ unti! the rienird
_--.._.. Cfl
__ nlm-nhnr
II”.II”“I lf11
\“’ thrmmh
.‘““..y” 171 ~nrm~rc
‘L,Lyp#“U’U.

I F . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EF =[a_m : jack number 01

laE[ : jack number 32

-ISELECT I

i . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CD=
El : to assign the same on all 12 CO’s
[iTim : on CO 01

_ m’m :onCO12

Description
The Outside line mode can be set to the “Normal” mode, “Direct In Line (DIL)”
mode or the “Direct Inward System Access (DISA)” mode during the day or night mode.
l Normal mode
Enables outside line incoming calls to be received to assigned extension.
l Direct In Line (D!L) mode
Enables all outside line incoming calls to be directed to a specific extension phone
(e.g., the assigned operator extension)
By programming an outside line to the jack number of the corresponding extension
phone, all incoming calls on that outside line will be received at the assigned
extension phone. The call can be accepted by simply picking up the receiver.
l Direct Inward System Access (DISA) mode
Enables outside line incoming calls to be directed to an extension phone by
designating it or to an outside line through KX-T123211.
Programming of “Direct Inward System Access” on page 3-42 is necessary.
3-57
Programming

H Selecting the “Normal” mode or the “DISA” mode H Selecting the “DIL” mode

1. l Dial (51) for day mode. 1. 0 Dial (51) for day mode.
“CO Day/Mode” wiJ( be displayed. “CO Day/Mode” will be displayed.
0 Dial (52) for night mode. 0 Dial (52) for night mode.
“CO Night/Mode” will be displayed. “CO Night/Mode” will be- displayed.
2. Press the NEXT button. 2. Press the NEXT button. .
“CO NO ? +” will be displayed. “CO NO ? --)I’ will be displayed.

3. Press the NEXT button or dial the CO 3. Press the NEXT button or dial the CO
number (01 through 12). number (01 through 12).
“CO 01 : Normal” will be displayed and “CO 01 : Normal” will be displayed and
“Normal” will blink. “Normal” will blink.

4. Press the SELECT button until 4. Press the SELECT button until
the “Normal” or “DISA” mode is displayed. the “DIL” mode is displayed.
“CO 01 : DIL : Jack-” will be displayed.
5. Press the MEMORY button.
The LCD will stop blinking. 5. Dial the jack number (01 through 32).

6. l To advance to the next CO number, 6. Press the MEMORY button.

press the NEXT button. The LCD will stop blinking.
l To return to the previous CO number,
7. To advance to the next CO number,
press the PREV button.
press the NEXT button.
l To go to the desired CO number,
To return to the previous CO number,
press the SELECT button and then dial
press the PREV button.
the CO number.
To go to the desired CO number,
7. Repeat steps 4 to 6, to program the press the SELECT button and then dial
assignment of the other CO numbers. the CO number.

8. To return to the initial program mode, press 8. Repeat steps 4 to 7, to program the
the END button. assignment of the other CO numbers.

9. To return to the initial program mode, press

the END button.

Programming Table
See page 7-22.

3-58
Example:

l Company XYZ would like incoming calls from Central Office During the day mode
to be received by operators 1 and 2.

Operator 1 has been connected to jack number 01.

Operator 2 has been connected to jack number 02.

KX-Tl23211

Line

Extension jack number 01 only has been set

1. mm( lNFXTl or m )lsELECTlmm.... to receive all incoming calls through CO 01.

Extension jack number 01 only has been set

2. ( ~ or j?GIiGj a ) lsELECTl m lnnEMoRv.*. ....
to receive all incoming calls through CO 02.

Extension jack number 02 only has been set

3. ( Ej or j5iGA m ) IsELECTl lo lUEMoRV e.. . . .
to receive all incoming calls through CO 03.

Extension jack number 02 only has been set

4. ( m or jGiIi%A 1041 ) lsELECTl Ia IhnEMoRVI
. . . . . . to receive all incoming calls through CO 04.

5. lENal

3-59
 :.......................until the desired CO number (01 through 12) appears.

_....................................... until the desired time appears

1.5sec _e_;< _
2.5 set
3.5 set .... ... .. ... ... .. ...default (all 12 &O’s)
:
4.5 set

: to assign the same on all 12 CO’s

Description
The KX-T123211 may require a pause time to 5. Press the MEMORY button.
access Central Office Line or computer accessed The LCD will stop blinking.
line.
The pause time may be changed to 1.5sec,
6. e To advance to the next CO number,
2.5sec, 3.5sec or4.5sec.
press the NEXT button.
l To return to the previous CO number,
Programming press the PREV button
1. Dial (53). l To go to the desired CO number,
“Pause Time” will be displayed. press the SELECT button and then dial the
CO number.
2. Press the NEXT button.
7. Repeat steps 4 to 6, to program the
“CO NO ? +” will be displayed.
assignment of the other CO numbers.
3. Press the NEXT button or dial the CO number
8. To return to the initial program mode, press
(01 through 12).
the END button.
‘CO 01 : 3.5sec”will be displayed and 3.5sec

will blink. Programming Table i

4. Repeat pressing the SELECT button until the See page 7-23.

desired time (1.5sec, 2.5sec, 3.5sec 4.5sec) is

displayed.

3-60
 :~~~~~~......‘.‘.‘.“‘.- until the desired CO number (01 through 12) appears

until the desired flash timing appears

300ms
600ms .. ... default (all 12 CO’s) :
900ms
1200ms

n.................................

onC0 12

Description
The timing of the hookswitch flash signal must 6. l To advance to the next CO number,
be within the requirements from your Central press the NEXT button.
Office. There are four choices available 0.3, 0.6, 0 To return to the previous CO number,

0.9, or 1.2second. press the PREV button.

0 To go to the desired CO number,
press the SELECT button and then dial the
CO number.
Programming
7. Repeat steps 4 to 6, to set the hookswitch
1. Dial (54).
timing of the other CO’s.
“Flash Time Set” will be displayed.
6. To return to the initial program mode, press
2. Press the NEXTbutton.
the END button.
“CO NO ?+” will be displayed.

3. Press the NEXT button or dial the CO number

(01 through 12). Example:
“CO 01 : 600ms” will be displayed and
0.3 set on al I 12 CO’s =
“600ms” will blink.

4. Repeat pressing the SELECT button until the

desired value is displayed. .

5. Press the MEMORY button.

Programming Table
The LCD will stop blinking. See page 7-23.

3-61
 :..........,.................. . . .. . until the desired CO number (01 through 12) appears

.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AB= q q : Disable

q m: under 5m seconds r :

:. 14 Is] : 62m seconds

m 17]:70
:

. default (all 12 CO’s)

&m :6,4

See the CPC Signal Detect Time table

I

:. ............ until the desired detect time appears

i ................................... El : to assign the same on all 12 CO’s

q 1m:onCO12

Description 5. Press the MEMORY button.

Thn
I I IU ILVY
c?n bill dnn
““111vrup hlinkinn
“ill 11\11
‘3.
To detect that an outside party has hung up and
then terminated the outside line (after a 6. 0 To advance to the next CO number, press
conversation, conference etc.) a CPC signal is the NEXT button.
needed. CPC signal detection time can be l To return to the previous CO number, press
removed or changed at customer’s request. the PREV button.
l To go to the desired CO nu:mber, press the
Programming SELECT button and then dial the CO
number.
1. Dial (55).
“CPC Detection” will be displayed. 7. Repeat steps 4 to 6, to program the detect
time of the other CO number.
2. Press the NEXT button.
“CO NO? -.‘I will be displayed. 8. To return to the initial program mode, press the
END button.
3. Press the NEXT button or dial the CO number
(01 through 12). ~“--I---:-_ T-L,,
IdUlt:
rruyrarrlrrllrly .
“CO 01 : N=42” will be displayed and “42”
will blink. See page 7-23.

4. Dial the CPC Signal Detect Time number (00,

Conditions
01, 06 through 75).
0 CPC Signal Detect Time number 02 through
05 can not be used.
 CPC Signal Detect Time

No. DetectTime (m set) No. Detect Time (m set)

00 Disable 40 334
01 under 5 41 342
I
02through 05 can not use 42 350 (default)
06 62 43 358
07 70 44 366 ’
08 78 45 374
09 86 I 46 I
10 94 I 47 I
. 11 102 48 398
12 110 49 406
13 118 I 50 I 414
14 126 51 422
15 134 52 430
I 16 I 142 I 53 I
17 150 54 446
18 158 55 454
19 166 I 56 I
20 174 57 470
21 182 58 478
22 190 I 59 I
23 198 60 494
24 206 61 502

25 214 I 62 I 510
26 222 I 63 I 518
27 230 64 526
28 238 65 534
29 246 I 66 I
30 254 67 550
31 262 68 558
32 270
33 278 70
69 566
574 c

34 286 71 582
35 294 I 72 I 590
36 302 73 598
37 310 I 74 606
38 318 75 614
39 I 326

3 - 63
 Extension Feature

;.....‘.“. until the desired jack number (01 through 32) appears.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A= m :extension group 1 __ default (all 32 jacks)

a :extension group 8

i. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ..- ,JB= r;;l : to assign the same on all 32 jack numbers

/IFI : on jack number 01

13121 : on jack number 32

Description 5. Press the MEMORY button.

Enables grouping of extension numbers by The LCD will stop blinking.

department or floor by all extension numbers 6. l To advance to the next jack number,
into a maximum of 8 separate extension groups. press the NEXT button.
Each group has access to the “Paging Group” (on o To return to the previous jack number,
press the PREV button.
page 4-25), “Call Hunting” (on page 3-15) and
l To go to the desired jack number,
“Dial Call Pickup” (on page 4-l 1) functions. press the SELECT button and then dial the
jack number.

Programming 7. Repeat steps 4 to 6, to program the

assignment of the other jack numbers.
1. Dial (60).
“Extension Group” will be displayed. 8. To return to the initial program mode, press
the END button.
Conditions
2. Press the NEXT button.
l When you dial ‘Y’ instead of pressing the
“Jack NO ? + ” will be displayed.
NEXT button at step 3, in case all of 32 jack
numbers have been programmed to
3. Press the NEXT button or dial the jack
extension group 1, “ # *:EXT GRP-1” will be
number (01 through 32 ).
displayed.
“#Ol : EXT GRP-1” will be displayed.
In case each of 32 jack numbers has been
L jack number
programmed from extension group 1 to
extension group 8, “# *: Mixed” will be
4. Dial the extension group number
displayed.
(1 through 8).
Programming Table
See page 7-25.
3-66
 ,.........
__
_______
_--------- --------until the desired jack number (01 through 32) appears.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . C= 111 : service class 1 --_.- default (all 32 jacks) L

: service class 8

i.. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. (-0 =

El : to assign the same on all 32 jack numbers

mr[ : on jack number 01

I ~~‘~~ : on jack number 32

Description
Used to prohibit selected extensions from making

long distance calls during the day or night mode.

Toll restriction can help eliminate telephone abuse

and contribute to saving telephone costs.

There are eight service classes available for each

extension.

“Area Type Selection” on page 3-18 should be set.

To allow or deny dialing an Operator Call, see “CO

Operator Call-Boundary Class” on page 3-19.

3-67
\
\
I
I
Service Class Selections
t
Programming
Allowed Denied 1. 0 Dial (61) for day mode.

“Day Toll Restrct” will be displayed.

all calls
0 Dial (62) for night mode. _
2. ltoil calls linternational calls
“Nig Toll Restrct” will be displayed.
llocal calls (charged)
llocal calls
2. Press the NEXT button.
3. lselected area codes linternational calls
llocal calls (charged) lany calls other than “Jack NO ? + ” will be displayed.
llocal calls specific area code
programmed
3. Press the NEXT button or dial the jack number
4. llocal calls (charged) linternational calls (01 through 32 ).
llocal calls atoll calls
“#Ol : Class-l” will be displayed and “1” will
5. lselected exchange linternational calls x jack number
blink.
codes (charged) atoll calls
llocal calls lany calls other than
specific exchange codes
4. Press the service class number (1 through 8).
(charged) programmed

6. llocal calls linternational calls

5. Press the MEMORY button.
atoll calls
llocal calls (charged) The LCD will stop blinking.

7. lany calls other than linternational calls

specific exchange atoll calls 6. l To advance to the next jack number,
codes programmed llocal calls (charged)
press the NEXT button.
@selected exchange codes
I
I
0 To return to the previous jack number,
8. all calls
press the PREV button.

For service class 3, up to 20 area codes can be 0 To go to the desired jack number,
selected for use in toll dialing. See “Area Code press the SELECT button and then dial the
Entry for Class 3” on page 3-22.
jack number.
For service class 5, up to 20 exchange codes
(charged) can be selected for use in local dialing
(charged). See “Exchange Code Entry for 7. Repeat steps 4 to 6, to program the assignment
Class 5” on page 3-23. on the other jack numbers.

For service class 7, up to 20 exchange codes

can be selected for no use in local dialing. 8. To return to the initial program mode,
See “Exchange Code Entry for Class 7” on
page 3-24. press the END button.

For an area that uses Area code type as the

exchange code, up to 20 exchange codes can be
selected for use in local dialing. See “Allowable Programming Table
Exchange Code Selection” on page 3-21.
See pages 7-25 and 7-26.

3-68
 i”““““““““‘...- until the desired jack number (01 through 32) appears
......................... Dial (Othrough 9, 3c ore)

:. ................................... until the desired letter appears

;. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . 0
AB
= mk[ : jack number 01

[-El: jack number 32

Description 0 \
? ’
Each extension can be programmed by name and Display
will be displayed on the display when making or
Dial Press the SELECT button
receiving intercom calls.

Programming
1. Dial (63).
“Extension Name” will be displayed.

. 2. Press the NEXT button.

“Jack NO ? +” will be displayed.

3. Press the NEXT button or dial jack number

(01 through 32).
“SO1 : ” will be displayed.
x jack number

4. To program the-extension name,

0 Dial (0 through 9, * or #)
@ Press the SELECT button until the desired
* ” + - =
letter appears. < >

@ Repeat steps @ and 0, to program the # $ %&@()

desired name.

5. Press the MEMORY button. 7. Repeat steps 4 to 6, to program the other

The LCD will stop blinking. extension names of jack numbers.

6. l To advance to the next jack number, 8. To return to the initial program mode, press the
press the NEXT button. END button.
l To return to the previous jack number,
press the PREV button.
l To go to the desired jack number,
press the SELECT button and then dial the
jack number.
3-69
Conditions
l To erase all letters, press the CLEAR button.
l To erase one letter, press the m button.
l The maximum numbers of letters can not exceed ten.

Example:

l To program jack number 01 for _~~~ Mr.Brown

1. m1NEXi1m Display

2. Dial (2). _............................................................... I a01 : 21

3. Press the SELECT button three times. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . #Ol : B

4. Dial (7). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . {#Ol : B7 I

5. Press the SELECT button four times. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. a01 : Br 1

6. Dial (6). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . a01 : Br6

7. Press the SELECT button six times. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I #Ol :

6. Dial (9). _............................................................... I #Ol : Bro9 1

9. Press the SELECT button two times. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. tio1 :

Brow

10. Dial (6). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . #Ol : Brow6

11. Press the SELECT button four times. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. #Ol : Brown

There is a phone number directory on page 7-l

3-70
 ;...“.‘........ until the desired jack number (01 through 32)appears.

i........‘.‘.‘.‘............ until the desired mode appears

Option .-.=*.....’ default(all 32 jack numbers)
Forced J

:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
: to assign the same on at132 jack numbers

Description 5. Press the MEMORY button.

This feature gives each message of the SMDR The LCD will stop blinking.
to an account code of the called or calling party.
6. l To advance to the next jack number,
This feature has two modes “Forced” and
press the NEXT button.
“Option” .In the “Forced” mode, the account
l To return to the previous jack number,
code must be entered every time extension
press the PREV button.
user dials.
l To go to the desired jack number,
In the “Option” mode, the account code may
press the SELECT button and then dial
be entered when a record is needed. Refer to
the jack number.
“Account Code” page 4-46.
7. Repeat steps 4 to 6, to program the account
code of the other jack numbers.
Programming
8. To return to the initial program mode, press
1. Dial (64).
the END button.
“Call Accounting” will be displayed.
Programming Table _
2. Press the NEXT button.
See page 7-26.
‘*Jack NO?+” will be displayed.

3. Press the NEXT button or dial the jack

number (01 through 32).
WOl : Option” will be displayed and the
x jack number

“Option” will blink.

4. Press the SELECT button to alternate

between “Option” and “Forced” to select
the desired mode.

3-71
 :......................-unti I the desired jack number (01 through 32) appears

............................. until the desired mode appears

Disable ..... ..-....defaul t (all 32 jack numbers)
Enable I

AB= El : to assign the same on all 32 jack numbers

mm : on jack number 01

]~j~[ : on jack number 32

Description
“Call Forwarding To Outside Line” (on page 7. Repeat steps 4 to 6 to program the
4-29) enable for each extension. assignment of the other jack numbers.

8. To return to the initial program mode,

Programming press the END button.
1. Dial (66).
“CO Forward” will be displayed. -

2. Press the NEXT button. Programming Table

“Jack NO ? + ” will be displayed. See page 7-27.
3. Press the NEXT button or dial the jack number
( 01 through 32 ).
“WI1 : Disable” will be displayed and “Disable”
-c_ jack number
will blink.

4. Press the SELECT button to alternate between

“Enable” and “Disable” to select the desired
mode.

5. Press the MEMORY button.

The LCD will stop blinking.

6. l To advance to the next jack number,

press the NEXT button.
l To return to the previous jack number,
press the PREV button.
l To go to the desired jack number,
press the SELECT button and then dial the
jack number.

3-73
 :...............- ............ until the desired jack number (01 through 32) appears

i.. ........................... until the desired mode appears

Disable .......... ..default(al I 32 jack numbers)
Enable I

: to assign the same on all 32.jack numbers

Description
This feature can call to the extension that is setting
7. Repeat steps 4 to 6, to program the
the Do Not Disturb by programming.
assignment of the other jack numbers.
Refer to “Do Not Disturb Override” on page 4-32.
Programming 6. To return to the initial program mode,
1. Dial (68). press the END button.
“DND Override” will be displayed.

2. Press the NEXT button. Conditions

“Jack NO ? + ” will be displayed. This feature allows you to ring an extension that is
set for the “Do Not Disturb” mode.
3. Press the NEXT button or dial the jack
number (01 through 32 ). Programming Table
“SO1 : Disable” will be displayed and “Disable” See page 7-28.
x jack number

will blink.

4. Press the SELECT button to alternate

between “Enable” and “Disable” to select the
desired mode.

5. Press the MEMORY button.

The LCD will stop blinking.

6. lTo advance to the next jack number,

press the NEXT button.
lTo return to the previous jack number,
press the PREV button.
lTo go to the desired jack number,
press the SELECT button and then dial the
jack number.
3-75
 Doorphone Feature

_........................,............ until the desired doorphone number (1 or 2) appears’

,...............................,................... until the desired jack number appears

m : on jack number 01

m : on jack number 32
m : to assign the same on all 32 jacks

. . ;) until the desired mode appears

-------ea.default (all 32 jack numbers)

Description 6. Press the MEMORY button.

Allows each extension to be programmed for The LCD will stop blinking.
receiving calls from up to 2 doorphones during
the day or night mode. 7. l To advance to the next jack number,
(Doorphone is an option.) press the m button.
l To return to the previous jack number,
Programming press the m button.
1. l Dial (70) for day mode.
l To go to the desired jack number,
“Day Door Phone” will be displayed.
press the q button and then dial the
l Dial (71) for night
mode. jack number.
“Night Door Phone” will be displayed.
6. Repeat steps 5 to 7, to program the assignment
.2. Press the NEXT button.
“Door NO ? +” will be displayed. of the other jack numbers.

3. Press the NEXT button or dial the doorphone 9. Repeat steps 3 to 8, to program the assignment
number (1 or 2).
of the another doorphone.
“DP-1:~Enable” will be displayed.
jack number 10. To return to the initial program mode, press the
END button.
4. Repeat pressing the m button until the
desired jack number appears, or press the
q button and then dial the jack number.

Programming Table ’
5. Press the SELECT button to alternate between
“Enable” and “Disable” to select the desired See pages 7-28 and 7-29.
mode.
 .......................... until the desired mode appears

Hold-l ......... ..Flas h hookswitch only ....................... ... default

Hold_2.. ......... Flash hookswitch and dial 20

Description Programming
If the following happens frequently with a standard 1. Dial (91)
telephone, program the HOLD MODE 2. “Option 1” will be displayed.
l Nobody answers when you receive a call.
2. Press the NEXT button.
0 A CO line is busy although nobody is using “Hold-l” will be displayed and blink.
the line.
3. Press the SELECT button to alternate
l The Trunk (CO) Indicator of the system unit
between “Hold-l” and “Hold-2” to select
does not turn off even after you hang up.
the desired mode.
If a call is not terminated reliably after you hang up,
the above-mentioned cases are caused. To avoid 4. Press the MEMORY button.
these problems, program the HOLD MODE 2. Every The LCD will stop blinking.
call will be terminated reliably except those calls that 5. To return to the initial program mode, press
you dialed 20 after flashing the hook-switch in this the END button.
mode.

The following operation is changed when Programming Table

“Hold-2” mode is set.
See page 7-29.
Call Park (on page 5-4)
Call on Hold (on page 5-4)
Conference (on page 5-5)
Call Waiting (on page 5-5)
Call Splitting (oripage 5-6)
Call Transfer (on page 5-6)
Paging And Transfer (on page 5-8)
External Feature Access (on page 5-9)
Account Code (on page 5-10)

3-77
l All Parameters ~.....‘...................................’ until the desired mode appears
0 System Parameter
All Para ... ... . ... .. ... default
l Speed Dial
System Para
co Para
: . EXT Para
DSS Para
Speed Dial

bIE[ ISELECTI IMEMORY @iiiil

t I

l CO Parameter (Outside)
:.................... until the CO Para appears

: to assign the same on all 12 CO’s

O~~nlQLgn
99 NEXT SELECT MEMORY AB MEMORY END

l Extension Parameter

:....................-until the EXT Para appears

;.. AB= q : to assign the same on all 32 jack numbers

mr[ : on>ack number 01

m’E[ : on jack number 32 I

OlIIIOlcjl~O
99 NEXT SELECT MEMORY AB MEMORY END
I I

l DSS Parameter
:......................unti I the DSS Para appears
........ A= @ : to assign the same on both DSS’s

Cl
1 :onDSSl‘
q2 :onDSS2 I

3-78
Description Extension parameters

The system Data features are preset as the default Extension Group Assignment

data of the programming. Service Class Assignment of Toll

Restriction
All parameters
Extension Name
System parameters
Account Code Input Mode
CO parameters
Call Transfer to Outside Line
Extension parameters
Call Forwarding to Outside Line
DSS parameters
Executive Override ’
Speed dial
Do not Disturb Override f
System parameters
Extension Number Assignment One Touch Access for System Features
Operator Assignment CO Line Ringing Selection
Paired Telephone Assignment for Auto CO Hunting
DSS Console Automatic Answering Selection
Automatic CO Hold Using DSS Button Flexible CO Button
Day/Night Service Mode Intercom Voice Alerting Mode
Call Hunting Background Music
Toll Restriction Station Number Check
Hold Time Reminder F3 -One Touch Button Mode Selection
Hold Recall Time Set Call waiting Tone Selection
Transfer Recall Time
Call Forwarding Starting Time Call Forwarding
Pickup Dial Delay Time Do Not Disturb
Co-to-Co Duration Time Limit Dial Call Pickup Deny
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Data Line Security
Duration Time Count Start Mode Pickup Dial
External Paging Access Tone Absent Message Capability
Call on Hold for Standard Telephone Call Waiting Tone Deny
Ringing Assignment of Doorphone Flexible Night Service
Direct Inward System Access Executive Override Deny
Off Premise Extension Station Lock
Off Hook Call Announcement Timed Reminder

CO parameters
DSS parameters
CO Connection Assignment
DSS button of the DSS Console
Dial Mode (DTMF/Pulse/Call Blocking)
Feature button of the DSS Console
Host PBX Access Codes Assignment
Trunk Group Assignment
Speed dial
Flexible Outward Dialing Assignment
Speed access codes (00 through 99) in which
Flexible Ringing Assignment
phone numbers are stored may be preset.
Delayed Ringing Assignment
CO Mode Assignment
Pause Time Assignment
Hookswitch Flash Timing
Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal
Disconnect Time
Automatic Designated CO Line Access
3-79
Programming
To set System Parameters, Speed Dial or All To set Extension Parameter to the default data ;
Parameters to the default data ; 1. Dial (99).
1. Dial (99).
“System Clear” will be displayed. 2. Press the NEXT button.

2. Press the NEXT button. 3. Repeat pressing the SELECTbutton until the
“Menu : All Para” will be displayed and “EXT Para” is displayed.
“All Para” will blink.
4. Press the MEMORY button.
3. Repeat pressing the SELECT button until the “Jack NO ? +” is displayed.
desired data mode is displayed.
5. Dial the jack number. (01 through 32)
4. Press the MEMORY button. When dialing (Ol),
The LCD will stop blinking. “Jack NO ? + 01” will be displayed.

5. Repeat steps 3 to 4, to clear the other system 6. Press the MEMORY button.
data. The LCD will stop blinking..

7. Repeat steps 5 to 6, to clear the other extension

To set CO Parameter to the default data ; parameter.

1. Dial (99).
To set DSS Parameter to the default data ;
2. Press the NEXT button. 1. Dial (99).

3. Repeat pressing the SELECT button until the 2. Press the NEXT button.
“CO Para” is displayed.
3. Repeat pressing the SELECT button until the
4. Press the MEMORY button. “DSS Para” is displayed.
“CO NO ?+” is displayed.
4. Press the MEMORY button.
5. Dial the CO number (01 through 12). “DSS NO ? +” is displayed.
When dialing (Ol),
“CO NO ? + 01” will be displayed. 5. Dial the DSS number (1 or 2).
When dialing (l),
6. Press the MEMORY button. “DSS NO ? + 1” will be displayed.
The LCD will stop blinking.
6. Press the MEMORY button.
7. Repeat steps 5 to 6, to clear the other CO The LCD will stop blinking.
parameter. -
7. Repeat steps 5 to 6, to clear the another DSS
parameter.

After completing clearing, and to return to the

initial mode ;

1. Press the END button.

3-80
When you connect EMSS PROPRIETARY TELEPHONE (KX-T61631, KX-T61630, KX-T61620, KX-T61650,
KX-T30830, KX-T30825, KX-T30820 or KX-T30850) to the KX-T123211 system, change the programming of CO
button or DSS button to have them operate properly.

The default of CO button or DSS button is assigned as following.

l In case of KX-T61631, KX-T61630, KX-T61620 and KX-T61650,

CO button on which ‘COl” is printed CO1 Line

CO button on which “CO2” is printed CO2 Line
CO button on which “C03” is printed CO3 Line
CO button on which “C04” is printed CO4 Line
CO button on which “CO5” is printed CO5 Line
1 CO button on which “CO6” is printed CO6 Line

l In case of KX-T30830, KX-T30825, KX-T30820 and KX-T30850,

CO button on which “COl” is printed CO1 Line

CO button on which “CO2” is printed CO2 Line
CO button on which “CO3” is printed CO3 Line

l In case of KX-T30830 only,

‘DSS button on which “DSSll” is printed <Extension no. of Jack no. 01

DSS button on which “DSS12” is printed Extension no. of Jack no. 02
DSS button on which “DSS13” is printed Extension no. of Jack no. 03
DSS button on which “DSSl4” is printed Extension no. of Jack no. 04
DSS button on which “DSS15” is printed Extension no. of Jack no. 05
DSS button on which “DSS16” is printed Extension no. of Jack no. 06
DSS button on which “DSS17” is printed Extension no. of Jack no. 07
_DSS button on which “DSS18” is printed Extension no. of Jack no. 08

Change the default of CO button or DSS button by the programming of “Flexible CO Button” or “Flexible DSS
Button”.

Flexible CO Button
“To change into other CO button” on page 4-57
“To assign into trunk group access button” on page 4-571
“To change into DSS button” on page 4-58
“To change into one touch dialing button” on page 4-58
“To change into message waiting button”on page 4-59
“To change into other all CO button” on page 4-59

Flexible DSS Button (KX-T30830 only).

“To change into other DSS button” on page 4-61
“To change into one touch dialing button”on page 4-61
“To change into message waiting button” on page 4-62

3-81
Examples
The outside lines of KX-T123211 is connected 8 CO’s from Central Office (CO).
Extension No 105 (Jack No. 05) is set up beforehand by System Programming as followings.

System Programming
Flexible Outward Dialing Assignment CO1 through CO7 are “Enable”
(Both Day and Night Mode) CO8 is “Disable”.
Flexible Ringing Assignment CO1 through CO7 are “Enable”
(Both Day and Night Mode) CO8 is “Disable”.

r Trunk Group 1 : COl, C02, CO3

If you connect KX-T30820 at Extension 105 (Jack No. 05) and set the CO button of KX-T30820 as shown in Fig.1,
Outgoing calls and Incoming calls in Extension 105 (Jack No. 05) are operated as followings.

KX-T123211
KX-T30820

y!g$F- -
Fig. Extension no. 105

Change
CO Button on which “COl” is printed- CO3 Button. 0 To change into other CO Button, see
CO Button on which ‘CO2” is printed- CO4 Button. page “To change into other CO
CO Button on which “CO3” is printed . CO5 Button. button” on page 4-57.

Outgoing calls:

Pressing CO3 Button t Access CO3 Line

Pressing CO4 Button . Access CO4 Line
Pressing CO5 Button . Access CO5 Line

Dialing FIrI (Trunk group 1) . Access only CO3 Line

Dialing mm (Trunk group 2) . Access only CO4 and CO5 Lines

Dialing mm (Trunk group 3) l No access CO Line

You cannot dial through CO1 Line, CO2 Line and CO6 Line through CO8 Line

Incoming calls:
l The calls which reaches through the CO3 Line through CO5 Line can be received.
l The calls which reaches through the CO1 Line, CO2 Line, CO6 Line through CO8 Line can not be received
but can be received with Directed Call Pickup or Direct Inward System Access.

1The CO Line which is not assigned to the CO Button cannot be dialed or received. 1
 If you connect KX-T30820 at Extension 105 (Jack No. 05) and set the CO button of KX-T30820 as shown in Fig.
2, Outgoing calls and Incoming calls in Extension 105 (Jack No. 05) are operated as followings.

Change
CO Button on which “COl” is printed F CO Button which can access to Trunk group 1
CO Button on which “CO2” is printed - CO Button which can access to Trunk group 2
CO Button on which “CO3” is printed w CO Button which can access to Trunk group 3
l See page “To assign into trunk group access button” on page 4-57.
Outgoing calls:
Pressing CO Button which can access to Trunk group 1 - Access CO1 Line through CO3 Line
Pressing CO Button which can access to Trunk group 2- Access CO4 Line through CO6 Line
Pressing CO Button which can access to Trunk group 3- Access only CO7 Line
Dialing mm (Trunk Group 1) l Access CO1 Line through CO3 Line

Dialing m p[ (Trunk Group 2) b Access CO4 Line through CO6 Line

Dialing m Fi (Trunk Group 3) + Access only CO7 Line

lYOU cannot dial through CO8 Line

Incoming calls:
l The calls which reaches through the CO1 Line through CO7 Line can be received.
l The calls which reaches the CO8 Line can not be received but can be received with Directed Call Pickup
or Direct Inward System Access.
,m
If you connect KX-T30820 at Extension 105 (Jack No. 05) and set the CO Button of KX-T30820 as shown in Fig.
3, Outgoing calls and Incoming calls in Extension 105 (Jack No. 05) are operated as followings.

KX-T123211

Change
CO Button on which “COl” is printed- CO Button which can access to Trunk group 1
CO Button on which “CO2” is printed- CO4 Button
CO Button on which “CO3” is printed- CO Button which can access to other all CO Line
(which are not assigned to CO button)
l See page “To change into other all CO button” on page 4-59.
Outgoing calls
l Pressing CO Button which can access to Trunk group 1 - Access CO1 Line through CO3 Line
l Pressing CO4 Button * Access CO4 Line
l Pressing CO Button which can access to other all CO Line -Access CO5 Line through CO7 Line

l Dialing mr\ (Trunk Group 1) t Access CO1 Line through CO3 Line

l Dialing l?lp[ (Trunk Group 2) . Access CO4 Line through CO6 Line

l Dialing F\ pl (Trunk Group 3) . Access only CO7 Line .

l You cannot dial through CO8 Line

Incoming calls:
l The calls which reaches through the CO1 Line through CO7 Line can be received.
l The calls which reaches the CO8 Line can not be received.

3-83
 OPERATION OF EMSS PROPRlE.TARY TELEPYONES
(KX-T123235, KX-T123230, KX-T123220, KX-T123250, KX-T61631, KX-T61630,
KY_TM KY_TRnARn KY-TRnnm KY-TRnElm
KY-TM
.\I\- I ” I cm
“fi”. ,\I\_,” ,“c;r;n
““, ,.I. . ““w-w, KY-TRnR35
. . . . . ..“W_“, ..I. . ““V-r, ..I. . “““““,

To operate this system, after making program changes, set the System Program Switch located on the KX-T12321i .
( Electronic Modular Switching System ) to the SET position.

Making Calls
When the unit is unused, Liquid Crystal Display will show the month, day and the present time.

_ l -.. -,

Using the Handset Hands-free

Lift Dial Talk Hang up Press Dial Talk

handset extension SP-PHONE extension SP-PHONE
number number
(100 through 199) (100 through 199)

l You may press the ICM (Intercom) button instead of the first SP-PHONE button.

When changing CO button into DSS (Direct Station Selection) button ;

l For changing, see “Flexible CO Button” on page 4-57.

Lifthandset Press CO
or press which has
SP-PHONE been changed
into DSS

Description Conditions
Station to station dialing within the KX-T123211 l The extension number is set below. Through
system. programming, you may change the extension
number to other number.See the page 3-8.
Operation Default;
Using the handset
101 : is assigned to extension of jack number 01
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial the extension number (100 through 199). [; 132 : is assigned to extension of jack number 32
3. Start talking
0 When a called party has the KX-T123230 1
4. Hang up upon completion of the conversation. KX-T123235 / KX-T61631 / KX-T6j 630 / KX-T30830
Hands-free equipped with an LCD, the extension number of
1. Press the SP-PHONE or ICM button. the calling party will be displayed on the LCD Of
the called party.
2. Dial the extension number (100 through 199).
3. Start talking 0 The extension number of the calling party will
4. Press the SP-PHONE button again after be displayed on the LCD of the KX-T123230
KX-T123235 / KX-T61630 / KX-T30830 / KX-T61631.
completion of the conversation.
When changing CO button into DSS (Direct Station 0 The ICM indicator willbe lit green while-using
the unit.
Selection) button ;
0 The KX-T123250, KX-T61650 or KX-T30850
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE button.
will not function for hands-free mode
2. Press the CO button which has been changed
but can hear the other party’s voice in the
into DSS. on-hook mode.
4-l
n Automatic Line Access n Individual Line Access

Usingthe Handset

I I I I
Dial “9 ” Wait for C.O. -.
Lift handset -:
or press dial tone Lift Press Wait for
SP-PHONE handset co C.O. dial tone

I I
Dial phone Talk Hang up
Dial Talk Hang up or number
phone press
number SP-PHONE
Hands-free

Description
Each extension can automatically select an
Press Wait for Dial phone
idle line within the CO line enable to call. C.O. dial tone
co number

Operation
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
Talk Press
button. SP-PHONE
2. Dial (9).
Dial tone from CO (Central Office) will be
Description
heard.
Any of the 12 CO’s may be directly selected.
l The CO indicator will be lit green at your
extension and lit red at other extensions. Operation
3. Dial the phone number. Using the handset
4. Start talking. 1. Lift the handset.
5. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button 2. Press the CO button.
upon completion of the conversation. Dial tone from CO will be heard.
3. Dial the phone number.
Conditions 4. Start talking.
n The 9 dialed, will be displayed on the LCD 5. Hang up.
of the KX-T123230 / KX-T123235 / KX-T61631 / Hands-free
KX-T61630 / KX-T30830 and you will hear
1. Press the CO button.
following.
Dial tone from CO will be heard.
Dial tone from the CO : indicates that the 2. Dial the phone number.
CO line is captured. 3. Start talking.
Busy tone : indicates that all the CO lines 4. Press the SP-PHONE button.
are busy. The phone number dialed will be displayed
Reorder tone : indicates that the extension on the LCD of the KX-T123230 / KX-T123235 /
is denied access to any KX-T61631 / KX-761630 / KX-T30830.
outside lines. You can not use the CO button whose
indicator is lit (red) as this CO line is use.
The KX-Tl23250, KX-T61650 or
KX-T30850 will not function for hands-free
mode but can hear the other party’s voice in
the on-hook mode.
4-2
1 Individual Trunk Group Access

Lift handset Dial “8 ” Dial trunk

or press group number Lift handset Press AUTO Dial speed
SP-PHONE (1 through 8) or press access code
SP-PHONE (00 through 99)

Wait for Dial Talk Hang up

C.O. phone handset or Description
dial tone number Press There are 100 memory locations of system
SP-PHONE
speed dialing available. A maximum of each
BYOU may press the CO button instead of dialing
8 and trunk group number (1 through 8). In this memory location is 32 digits.
case, you must assign the trunk group access For programming, refer to “System Speed
number to the CO button. Dialing Entry” on page 3-5.
To assign, see “Flexible CO button” on page
4-57. Operation
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
Description button.
Each extension can automatically select an idle 2. Press the AUTO button.
CO line within the same trunk group. Through
3. Dial the speed access code (00 through 99).
programming, 12 CO lines can be divided up to 8
o You may press the CO button to select the
groups. See the page 3-52.
CO line directly after lifting the handset or
Operation press the SP-PHONE button.
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
button. Conditions
2. Dial (8) and the trunk group number (1 through e The dialed number will be displayed on the
8) or press the CO button,which is changed into LCD of the KX-T123230 / KX-T123235 /
trunk group access number. KX-T61631 / KX-T61630 / KX-T30830.
Dial tone from the CO (Central Office) will be l Continuous use of speed dialing is possible.
heard. ex. [AUTO] [0] [0] [AUTO] [0] [l]
3. Dial the phone number. Chaining together two or more memory
4. Start talking. locations.
5. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button. l Combinations of speed dialing, one touch
Conditions dialing and manual dialing is possible.
l The CO line which is not assigned to the CO
Button cannot be dialed.
l The CO lines that is assigned to the trunk
group are set below.
Default;
CO 1 is assigned to Trunk group 1.
CO 2 is assigned to Trunk group 2.
CO 3 is assigned to Trunk group 3.
CO 4 is assigned to Trunk group 4.
CO 5 is assigned to Trunk group 5.
CO 6 is assigned to Trunk group 6.
CO 7 is assigned to Trunk group 7.
CO 8 through CO 12 are assigned to
Trunk group 8.

n Each extension can access a new

CO line without hanging up.
While having a conversation,

l The original conversation will be

terminated and a new CO line
will be accessed.
Press
another CO 4-3
l Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the SP-PHONE or MONITOR button is OFF.
l Set the MEMORY switch of the Proprietary telephone to “PROGRAM”.

n Storage When the MEMORY button is pressedi’a beep will be

heard.
l two beeps _ The entry is the same as what was
previously stored.
l one beep ..... The entry is different from the one
Press Dial “9” Dial Press
PROGRAMMABLE phone MEMORY that was previously stored.
FEATURE number Repeat the procedure of
programming.

l You may dial 81 through 88 instead of 9 . n To Erase after Programming

9 - - - An extension automatically selects an idle line
within the CO line enable to call.
81 through 88 - - - An extension selects a trunk
group designated.
Press Press Press
19or 81 through 88 must be dialed for storage. i PROGRAMMABLE CLEAR MEMORY
FEATURE (TRANSFER)

W To Correct an Error while Proarammina l The TRANSFER button is used as the CLEAR
button.
TRANSFER

l After pressing the CLEAR button, After programming all the numbers, return the
/[ I I
I I reprogram the correct number. MEMORY switch to the “SET” position.
Press I I
CLEAR
(TRANSFER) l The TRANSFER button is used as
instead of
MEMORY the CLEAR button.

W To Change a Stored Number

I I
Repeat “Storage” above. Lift Press
or press PROGRAMMABLE
SP-PHONE FEATURE

n To Confirm a Stored Number n You may press the CO button to select the CO
Repeat programming the same number into the same line directly after lifting the handset or pressing the
station. SP-PHONE button.

Description
-. .^ . .. , .. I. I. l For your convenience, program private
I nere are 12 memory iocatrons ror auromartc ararrng phone numbers into the KX-T123230,
available. (KX-T123230, KX-Tl23235, KX-Tl23220,
KX-Tl23235, KX-T123220, KX-T123250,
KX-T61631, KX-T61630, KX-T61620, KX-T30830,
etc. .
KX-T30820)
There are 3 memory locations for automatic dialing
available. ( KX-T123250,KX-T61650, KX-T30850 )
Up to 16 digits can be stored into each of the 12 or 3
memory locations. The “k’, “#I’, ” - ” “FLASH”,
“PAUSE” and “ICM (Secret)” button can be registered
as 1 digit.
4-4
Programming Dialing
Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the 1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
SP-PHONE or MONITOR button is OFF.
button.
1. Set the MEMORY switch to “PROGRAM”.
2. Press a programmable feature button.
“PITS-PGM NO ? +” will be displayed.
0 You may press the CO button to select the
2. Press a programmable feature button.
CO line directly after lifting the handset or
The LCD will show “MOl/ P : Not Stored”
press the SP-PHONE button.
when nothing is stored in the
programmable feature button “1”. Conditions
When automatic line access number 9 and Use the “+(FWD/DND)“, or “t(CONF)”
the phone number 123-456-7890 has button for scrolling the display from side to
,
been stored, “MOl/P : g-123-456-” will side.
be displayed.
The dialed phone number will be displayed
3. Enter the line access number. on the LCD of the KX-Tl23230 / KX-T123235 /
9 : automatic line access number
KX-T61631 / KX-T61630 /KX-T30830. The
81: access number of trunk group 1
dialed phone number can be kept secret by not
82: access number of trunk group 2
being displayed also.
83: access number of trunk group 3
84: access number of trunk group 4 The combinations of speed dialing, one-
85: access number of trunk group 5 touch dialing and manual dialing is possible.
86: access number of trunk group 6
The line access number (9) or trunk group
87: access number of trunk group 7
access number (81 through 88) should be
88: access number of trunk group 8
stored I
4. Enter the phone number.
Continuous use of one touch dialing is
You may enter punctuations in a phone
number. possible.
The SAVE button is used as the “-‘I Example :
button. [PROGRAMMABLE FEATURE l]
To erase a wrong entry, press the CLEAR
[PROGRAMMABLE FEATURE 21
button.
In this case, programmable feature button
The TRANSFER button is used as the
CLEAR button. “2” should not include the line access
When you don’t want to display the dialed number or trunk group access number.
phone number on the LCD in OneTouch When dialing, the pause is automatically
Dialing, press the ICM button before and after entered after line access number (9) or trunk
dialing the phone number that you want to
group access number (81 through 88) are stored.
keep secret. Do not press the ICM button before
line access number (9 or 81 through 88).
Features that can be accessed by using the
Example: dialing button also can be programmed into
memory.
Refer to “One Touch Access for System
Features” page 4-52.
press the ICM button
Examples:
The display shows the following when programming.
Automatic line access number 9 and phone
IMOllP: 9-123[456] 1 number 123-4567 into the programmable
feature button ‘? “.
The display shows the following when dialing.
Programming:
1
Set the MEMORY switch to “PROGRAM”
position.
5. Press the MEMORY button.
Press [PROGRAMMABLE FEATURE l]
The MEMORY indicator will be lit.
Dial [9] [123-45671
6. Repeat steps 2 to 5, to program on other Press [MEMORY]
programmable feature button. Return the MEMORY switch to “SET”
position. .
7. After programming all the numbers, return
the MEMORY switch to the “SET” position. Dialing
The MEMORY indicator will go out. Lift the handset.
Press [PROGRAMMABLE FEATURE l]
l You may press the CO button to select the
r-n
“V
linn rlirn,-tl\r call.zl
1111-z “llb”,l)r
&tar liftinn
IllUlwj
thn h.nnrlcnt
LII-Z IlcLlI”*“L.

4-5
 When a Line is Busy

I1 Setting
For outside (trunk) calls
When hearing a recall for camp-on
When outside-calls

Press If you will Dial “6” CoLnrrrmarron t-rang up or Lift handset You will
co hear a tone of 2 beeps press or press hear CO
busy tone will be heard SP-PHONE SP-PHONE dial tone

For intercom calls When intercom calls

a.. .

Dial
extension
number
If you will
hear a
busy tone
Dial “6” Confirmation
tone of 2 beeps
will be heard
Hang up or
press
SP-PHONE
Lift handset
or press
SP-PHONE
II
. . . . . ..
b
You will
hear ring
back tone
(100 through 199)
I

Description Conditions
If the extension you have dialed is busy, or Lifting the handset (or pressing the SP-
outside line (CO line) you have selected is busy, PHONE button ) during the camp-on mode
the call will be automatically called back to you will cause the camp-on feature to be
when the extension or the outside line (CO line) cancelled.
becomes free using this function.
An extension may be the recipient of more
This feature is also known as camp-on.
than one call back busy, the call backs will be
Operation executed in the order of their arrival.
Setting
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE 0 If a call back is not answered at the

button. original extension within 10 seconds, the

2. For intercom calls, dial the extension number. call back will be cancelled.

For outside calls, press the CO button or dial

(9 or 81 through 88).
3. Dial (6) after a busy tone is heard.
4. Wait for the confirmation tone.
Example:
“Call back CO 01” or “Call back Ext 105” Recall for camp - on
will be displayed.
5. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
When hearing a recall for camp-on ;
Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
button.
l When using an intercom call, you will
hear the ring back tone.
l When using an outside call, you will
hear the CO dial tone.
4-7
 REDIAL

Lift handset Press Dial You will ’ Dial “1” and

or press REDIAL extension hear a wait for an
SP-PHONE number busy tone ’ answer
(100 through 199)

. Description Description
The last phone number dialed on an outgoing If the extension you have dialed is busy, you
call (CO line) can be redialed. can inform the extension that another
intercom call is waiting by three beeps.
Operation If the extension you have dialed is KX-1123235,
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE you can inform the extension through the speaker.
button. See “Off Hook Call Announcement” on page 4-23.
2. Press the REDIAL button.
0 You may press the CO button to select the Operation
CO line directly after lifting the handset or 1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
pressing the SP-PHONE button. button.
0 You may dial 8 and the trunk group number 2. Dial the extension number.
(1 through 8) to select the trunk group 3. When you will hear a busy tone, dial (1) and
directly after lifting the handset or pressing wait for an answer.
the SP-PHONE button.
Conditions
Conditions l To answer your signal, see “Call Waiting”
Up to 32 digits can be stored and redialed. on page 4-20.
The “‘$ , cr#7’or “PAUSE” button can be registered 0 If the other party is setting “Call Waiting
as 1 digit. Tone-From Extension Deny” on page 4-43
When using the KX-T123235, one pressing of or is using a data terminal equipment, you may
the REDIAL button: not be able to use this feature. A reoder tone
l When using the handset; redial once is heard after dialing 1. i
0 When using hands-free; redial up to 15
times (Automatic Redialing) within
1O-minutes.
To cancel automatic redialing, press the
FLASH button.
When calling or while in the conversation
mode, pressing the REDIAL button will
cause the redial to operate after about 3
seconds.

4-8
 into Extension Conditions
l If the other party is using data equipment or

is set for “Executive Override Deny-Extension”

on page 4-33, you can not intrude into the other

Lift handset party that is in conversation. A reorder tone

1
orpress extension hear a busy
number tone A 3-party
SP-PHONE is heard after dialing 2.
(100 throuoh c conference is
L now established1
i99) -
into CO ’
Description

q 1
Allows an extension user to intrude into another

.
extension that is in conversation with an El A 3-party
conference is now
established.
outside or inside party.
Lift handset Press CO
or press in which you
For use of this feature, the extension is SP-PHONE want to intrud,e.
required to be set for this feature beforehand in

the M-T12321 1. For programming, see page

Description
3-74.
Allows an extention user to intrude into a CO line
Operation in use.
For the use of this feature, the extension is
1. Lift the handset or press the SP- PHONE
required to be set for this feature beforehand in
button. the KX-Ti 23211. For programming, see page
3-74.
2. Dial the extension number.
3. When you hear a busy tone, dial (2). Operation
A 3-party conference will now be established. 1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
button.
To terminate conference
2. Press the CO button on which you want to
Replace the handset back on hook or press intrude.
A 3-party conference is now established.
the SP-PHONE button.
To terminate conference
0 The other two parties will be directly
Replace the handset back on hook or press the
connected together and can converse with SP-PHONE button.
0 The other two parties will be directly connected
each other. (Intercom calls and intercom to
together and can converse with each other.
outside are OK.) (Intercom to outside is OK, outside to outside is
To terminate one caller and talk to the other impossible.)
If you want to leave the conference, press the
l If the conference parties are one outside CONF button instead of SP-PHONE button and
caller and one extension: if you want to join the conference again, press
the flashing (in groups of 2) CO button.
To talk to the outside party, press the CO
To terminate one caller and talk to the other
button.
caller.
To talk to the extension party, press the ICM 0 To talk to the outside party, press the CO
button.
button.
To talk to the extension party, press thefCM
button.

Conditions
0 If the other party is setting “Data Line Security”
on page 4-42, you can not intrude into the
other party that is in conversation.
 Receiving Calls

Setting To cancel
or

Lift Press
handset SP-PHONE

‘be lit)

Operation
Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
button.
l When receiving an intercom call, you may press Description
the ICM button whose indicator is flashing quickly Allows an extension user to answer an intercom
and talk. (Hands-free mode) call in the automatic hands-free mode without
any operation when receiving an intercom call.
l When receiving an outside call, you may press
the CO button whose indicator is flashing red Operation
quickly and talk.(Hands-free mode)
1. For setting,
press the AUTO ANS button.
l When the “Automatic Answering Selection”
The AUTO ANS indicator will be lit.
feature (on page 4-56) is selected “No Line
Preference-Incoming” in the extension and 2. For cancellation, press the AUTO ANS button
outside call reaches, lift the handset and then again.
press the CO button whose indicator is flashing The AUTO ANS indicator will go out.
(red color) quickly.
Conditions
l When the “Automatic Answering Selection” l This feature is required to be set beforehand
feature (on page 4-55) is selected “Prime Line while the unit is not in use.
Preference-Incoming” in the extension and any
incoming calls from the Central Office are l The KX-T123250, KX-T61650 or KX-T30850
will not function for Automatic Answer.
received at the same time except preferred CO
line, you must lift the handset and then press
the CO button whose indicator is flashing (red
color) quickly. _
Conditions
An extension can not receive the call through the CO
line which is not assigned to the CO button. Therefore,
if the extension user wants to receive the CO call, the
CO line is required to be assigned to the CO button.
To assign the CO line to the CO button, there are 3
ways as follows.

l Way to change into other CO button

(on page 4-57)
l Way to assign to trunk group access button
(on page 4-57)
l Way to change into other all CO numbers which
are not assigned to CO button.(on page 4-59)
4-10
 I I I
Lift handset Dial “40 ”
Lift handset Dial “4 ” Dial ringing
or press orpress
SP-PHONE extension
SP-PHONE number
(100 through 199)

Description Description
An extension user can answer any ringing An extension may answer an incoming call that
extension within their own extension group. is ringing at another extension regardless of
the extension group.
Operation
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE Operation
button. 1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHON E
2. Dial (40) and wait for the confirmation tone. button.
3. Start talking. 2. Dial (4) and then the extension number
(100 through 199) at which call is ringing
Conditions 3. Wait for confirmation tone and then start
Dial Call Pickup will work for incoming calls talking.
(intercom, outside and doorphone)
but will not work for camp-on recall and hold Conditions
recall. 0 It is possible to answer calls outside your
assigned extension group.
l Directed Call Pickup can be used with the
If a ringing extension is outside the extension
present call placed on hold.
group or is in the dial call pickup denied
mode, then a reorder tone will be heard
Example:
through the use of this feature.
Mr Brown’s extension number is 110.
He is now out of the office.
Refer to “Extension Group Assignment”
Mark receives the call instead of Mr Brown
on page 3-66.
with the telephone on his desk (extension 120).

Dial Call Pickup can use with the present

call placed on hold.

dial 141and
exte ntion No. III
1 0

4-11
 To park a call

Press
cl
ABC
2
Dial “2” Dial parking Confirmation
HOLD station tone
number
(20 through 29)

If a busy tone is heard after the parking station number is dialed, dial only last 1 digit of the other parking
station number (0 through 9).
To retrieve a parked call at any extension

LJ
JKL
5
I I
Lift handset Dial “5” Dial parking
station
number
(20 through 29)

Description Conditions
Extension user can place up to ten calls in the park l Up to ten calls can be parked.
zones. Allows any extension user to retrieve the parked
l If a parked call is not retrieved by an extension
call (intercom or outside) at any extension.
within 3 minutes, a hold time reminder
will be sounded at the extension who placed
Operation the call on hold.
To park a call There are 9 choices ranging from 1 to 9
1. You are in conversation with an internal or minutes for the hold time reminder.
outside party. For programming, see the page 3-25.

2. Press the HOLD button. Example:

3. Dial (2). Mark is talking with extension 130 on his desk,
4. Dial the parking station number (20 through 29). and then moves to another room placing the
l When dialing (20). call park.
“Call Prked at 20” will be displayed. He resumes the conversation using another
l A confirmation tone will be heard. extension.
l If a busy tone is heard, dial only last 1 digit
of the other parking station number Press the HOLD button,
(0 through 9). dial H , dial q (parking
5. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button. station number), hang up
To retrieve a parked call at any extension. and then go to Mr. Jay’s
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE office.
button at any extension. a *
Dial (5).
Dial 05 and the
Dial the parking station number (20 through 29)
on which the call is parked. parked station number
20 at Mr. Jay’s office.
Wait for the confirmation tone and then 0
 Description
Calling from Doorphone
A different ringing pattern is used to
distinguish intercom calls from incoming
outside calls.
,
Press Confirmation Talk
doorphone tone Operation
button
1 second None

To answer a doorphone Conditions

Incoming outside calls (including outside hold
recall )

1 I
Lift Press
SP-PHONE
handset
I I I I I

I-1 ! I I I
I
I I
1 set
I I

Operation
Calling from the doorphone. Intercom calls (including intercom hold recall)
1. Press the doorphone button 1 second.
2. Wait for the other party’s voice after hearing
the confirmation tone and then start talking.
To answer a doorphone
Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
button. Doorphone calls

Conditions
I I I I I I I
l If calls from doorphones are not answered I I I
I-! I I
I I I I I
within 15 seconds, the calls will be 1 set
cancelled.
l Ring from doorphone. Recall for camp-on

l Each extension has been programmed

beforehand for receiving from doorphones.
See “Ringing Assignment from Doorphone”
on page 3-76.
l When you press a Dial button while talking with a
doorphone, the DTMF tone will be sent to the
doorphone.

4-13
 While Having a Conversation

To leave a call on hold: To retrieve:

(Outside calls on hold) (Intercom call on hold)
l at the holding extension l at the holding extension
I ICM I
flashing slowly 1[I) 1 (flashing
Press
HOLD
Confirmation
tone of 2
in green 1 , 1SlOWlY)
beeps will Press CO Press IC-M
be heard
from another extension l from another extension

flashing slowly
in red
Press CO Dial “5” Dial holding
extension
number

Description
If you wish to leave your phone unattended but l Calls on hold will be recalled after 30 seconds
want the caller you are in conversation with to or 1 minute or 1 minute and 30 seconds or 2
wait, call on hold may be used. Outside minutes, once handset is replaced (or the SP-
or intercom calls may be on hold. PHONE button is pressed).
Calls on hold can be released by other If hold recall time is set to “Disable”, it will
extensions. not be recalled.
Refer to “Hold Recall Time Set” on page 3-26.
Operation
0 If a call is placed on hold for more than 3 minutes,
1. You are in conversation with an outside or
a hold time reminder will be sounded and the LCD
internal party.
flashes the following displays.
2. Press the HOLD button.
l When holding the extension 101; Mr. Brown:
The indicator of CO or ICM button which is
The display of “101: Brown” will flash.
on hold will flash slowly (green color).
l When holding the Outside line; CO 01:
The confirmation tone of 2 beeps will be
The display of “Call on CO 01” will flash.
heard.
The call will be terminated automatically after
To Retrieve at the holding extension,
30 minutes.
press the CO or ICM button (flashing
A hold time reminder is sounded through the
g ree n).
built-in speaker of the extension.
The indicator light will return to a steady
There are 9 choices ranging from 1 minute to 9
green.
minutes in the hold time reminder.
To Retrieve from another extension,
For programming, see the page 3-25.
n press the CO button (flashing slowly in
red). l The hold time reminder is activated, even if
or the hold recall time set is programmed to
dial (5) and then the extension (100 “Disable”.
through 199) or CO (301 through 312)
l When lifting the handset (or press the SP-
number of the phone on which the call
PHONE button):
was placed on hold.
before recalling - - - - A dial tone will be heard
PI WC1 with the call on hold.
:.-ABC-.- 100 through 199 (extension)
You may dial another
phone number.
rBC_.-301 through 312 (CO)
The green flashing indicator at the held while recalling - - Only the first call on hold will
extension will turn to red. be released and entered into
the conversation mode.
Conditions
l An Intercom call can not be on hold more than two.

l Outside calls can be on hold all CO’s

4-14
 To leave a call on exclusive hold: To retrieve:

(Outside calls on hold) (Intercom call on hold)

lo3j [ ;;;$::I H
IBilBl
Press Press Press Press
HOLD again co ICM

Description Conditions
Intercom or outside calls left on exclusive hold can 0 An Intercom call can not be on hold more than
not be released by any extension other than the two.
phone which has left the call on exclusive hold. 0 Outside calls can be on hold all CO’s,

l Calls on hold will be recalled after 30

Operation
seconds or 1 minute or 1 minute and 30
1. You are in conversation with an outside or
seconds or 2 minutes, once handset is
internal party.
replaced (or the SP- PHONE button is
pressed). If hold recall time set is set to
2. Press the HOLD button.
“Disable”, will not be recalled. Refer to
The indicator of CO or ICM button which is
“Hold Recall Time Set” on page 3-26.
on hold will flash slowly (green color).
l If a call is left on hold for more than 3
A confirmation tone of 2 beeps will be heard.
minutes, a hold time reminder will be
sounded, and the call will be terminated
3. Press the HOLD button, again.
automatically after 30 minutes.
The indicator will flash in groups of 2 (green
A hold time reminder is sounded through the
color).
built-in speaker of the extension.
There are 9 choices ranging from 1 to
4. To retrieve, press the ICM button or the CO
9 minutes for the hold time reminder.
button whose indicator is flashing in groups
For programming, see the page 3-25.
of 2 (green color).
The indicator on the ICM or CO button will 0 The hold time reminder is activated, even if

return to a steady green. the hold recall time set is programmed to

“Disable”.

0 When lifting the handset (or press the

SP-PHONE button):
before recalling ..- A dial tone will be heard
with the call on hold.
You may dial another
’ phone number. _’
while recalling . . . Only the first call on hold
will be released and entered
into the conversation mode.

4-15
 El
CONF

Press Consult with Press

CONF 2nd party CONF ’

[ ZJZ~GJ.zek now] ’

Description To terminate one caller and talk to the other

Allows for a three party conference, caller.
(2-outside / 1- inside) (1- outside / 2- inside) or l If both the conference parties are on outside lines:
(3-inside). Press the CO button to.talk to the desired
Operation party.
1. Press the CONF button, to leave the first
l If the conference parties are an outside caller
party on hold.
and an extension caller:
To talk to the outside party, press the CO
2. Dial the number of the second party.
button.
If the second party does not answer, press
To talk to the extension party, press the
the CO button of the outside party
concerned, or the ICM button to return to the ICM button.

first party. To leave the other two parties on hold at the

same time.
3. After the second party answers, press the CONF
Press the HOLD button.
button.
A 3 party conference is now established. 0 In case the other two parties are on the
extension, the other two parties can not be
Example:
left on hold.
“Ext 102 & CO 02” will be displayed.
Conditions
l You may press the HOLD button instead of
l Pressing a CO button which is out of
the first CONF button.
conference, allows you to exj.t from the
To terminate conference
conference and to access an-outside party
Replace the handset or press the
and the other parties to be connected
SP-PHONE button.
together.
l The other two parties will be directly
If the other parties are outside ones,
connected together and can converse with
they are disconnected.
each other. (Intercom calls and intercom to
If the other parties are on the outside and
outside are OK, outside to outside is not
extension, they are connected.
possible.)
l When both the conference parties are on the
If you want to leave the conference, press
extension, even if anyone of the conference
the CONF button instead of SP-PHONE
parties press the ICM button, a three party
button and if you want to join the conference
conference is gone on.
again, press the flashing (in groups of 2) CO
button.
4-16
 While you are speaking on a CO line, At another extension that want to join into the conversation;
l Before pressing the CO button, inform
another extensron user to join into the

0
conversation by word of mouth.
Fb
Press
co of 1 beeps will
within be heard
Press CO
5 seconds
already in use

1 1
quickly flashing quickly flashing
in green for in green for
5 seconds 5 seconds

Description To terminate one caller and talk to the other

Allows an extension user that is in conversation caller.

with an outside party to make a three party To talk to the outside party, press the CO
conference by having another extension join into button.

the conversation. To talk to the extension party, press the ICM

button.

Operation
1. You are in conversation with an outside party. Conditions
e After an extension user presses the CO

2. Inform another extension user to join into the button, the indicator of the other extension

conversation by word of mouth. will flash for only 5 seconds.

Pressing of the CO button again will add

3. Press the CO button that you are using, and another 5 seconds.

the CO indicator of the other extensions will

quickly flash (green color) for 5 seconds.

4. When another extension user that want to join

into the conversation presses the CO button
whose indicator is quickly flashing (green color)
within 5 seconds, a confirmation tone will be
heard at another extension.
3 party conference is now established.
(1-outside / 2- inside)
To terminate conference. (1 -outside/24nside)
Replace the handset back on hook or press the
SP-PHONE button.
0 The other two parties will be directly
connected together and can converse with
each other.

4-17
 To transfer a call after the other extension answers To transfer a call without announcing to the other
extension

Press Dial Announce Hang UP, Press Dial Hang UP,

TRANSFER extension and wait press TRANSFER extension I press
number for an SP-PHONE, number SP-PHONE,
(100 through answer FLASH, (100 through FLASH,
199) CO or DSS 199) CO or DSS
To retrieve the Call
If the other extension does not answer the transferred call within 30 seconds after the call has been
transferred, the call will return to you. In this case:

While the ring back is heard,

to return to the
calling party

In this case:
Description
While the ring back is heard and the LCD
Outside or intercom calls may be transferred to
flashes the following displays, lift the handset
any extension manually.
to return to the calling party.

Operation To change the party to whom a call is

1. You are engaged in a call (outside or transferred before hanging up
intercom). Press the CO or ICM button whose indicator
2. Press the TRANSFER button. is flashing slowly to retrieve the call, then
3. Dial number of extension (100 through 199) repeat the procedure of Call Transfer.
to which the call is transferred.
Conditions
4. For Unscreened call transfer, replace the
l Upon recall to the transferring extension, if
handset or press the SP-PHONE, FLASH,
the call is not answered whitin 30 minutes it will
CO or DSS button. For Screened call transfer,
be terminated.
wait for new party. to answer and announce
0 When busy, you may access the other
call, then replace the handset or press the
extension by dialing 1 (Busy station signaling)
SP-PHONE, FLASH, CO or DSS button.
or dialing 2 (Executive Override) and hang up.
Also you may return to the calling party by
To retrieve the Call
pressing the CO or ICM button whose
If the other extension does not answer the
indicator is flashing slowly (green color).
transferred call within 30 seconds after the
l The time that the call returns to you when the
call has been transferred, the call will return
transferred call is not answered can be-.
to you.
changed from 30 seconds to 15 seconds. For
changing, see page 3-27.

4-18
 To transfer a call after the outside party answers.

TRANSFER number and wait press

for an SP-PHONE,
answer DSS or
other CO
To transfer a call without announcing to the outside party.

Press Press CO Dial phone Hang UP,

TRANSFER number press
SP-PHONE,
DSS or other CO

Description Conditions
Outside or intercom calls may be transferred to l If outside call is transferred to any outside
any outside line manually. line, the KX-T123211 will disconnect the call
This feature is required to be set beforehand in from the line after 10 minutes. For changing
the KX-T123211. the time, see ‘CO to CO Duration Time
For programming, see page 3-72. Limit” on page 3-30.
3 beeps tone will be heard every 5 seconds
Operation
for 15 seconds before the call is disconnected
1. You are engaged in a call (outside or
from the line.
intercom).
2. Press the TRANSFER button. l If the outside call is transferred to another
3. Press the CO button to which the call is outside line through the KX-T123211, the
transferred. KX-T123211 may not disconnect both lines
4. Dial the phone number to which the call is after the calling party or called party hangs up
transferred. if the calling parties line or called party line
5. For Unscreened call transfer, replace the (central office exchange) does-not release a
handset back on hook or press the CPC (Calling Party Controi) signal to the line.
SP-PHONE, DSS or other CO button except CO
However the KX-T123211 Will disconnect the
button which the call transferred.
line after the time that you have
For Screened call transfer, wait for new party
programmed.
to answer and announce call, then replace
the handset back on hook or press the 0 If you want to join the transferred call, press
SP-PHONE, DSS or other CO button except CO the flashing (in groups of 2) CO button and if
button which the call transferred. you want to leave the conference, press the
To change the party to whom a call is CONF button.
transferred before hanging up
Press the CO button whose indicator is flashing
slowly to retrieve the call, then repeat the
procedure of Call Transfer.
4-19
 To terminate the original call and talk to the new caller.

Will hear a Press CO or KM IIW c

call waiting whose indicator
tone is flashing
I Ivw
call is
I +nrminQ+nA
qUlCKly

To leave the original call on hold and talk to the new caller.
l If both original call and new call are intercom calls:
(The ICM indicator will change into quickly flashing when the new call is reached.)

Will hear a
call waiting
Press
HOLD
Consult with
the new caller
/II
Press ICM to
terminate the

1
tone while the 2nd call and to
Dial tone
original call is return to the
is not
on hold original call
[ heard.

l If original call is CO call, and new call is CO call or intercom call:

or
If original call is intercom call and new call is CO call:

Will hear a Press Press CO or ICM Consult with Press CO or ICM whose
call waiting HOLD whose indicator the new caller indicator is flashing slowly to

1
tone is flashing while the terminate the 2nd call and to
The dial
quickly original call is return to the original call
tone is on hold
[ heard.

Description 2. Press the HOLD button for placing a

Call waiting tone during a conversation indicates conversation on hold.
there is a new incoming CO line call or Intercom 3. Consult with the new caller.
call. 4. Press the ICM button to terminate the
This feature has been set beforehand in the second call and to return to the original
extension. See page 4-43. call.
There are Tone 1 and Tone 2 in the Call Waiting l If original call is CO call, and new call & CO
Tone. call or intercom call:
For changing Tone 1 into Tone 2, see “Call or
Waiting Tone Selection” on page 4-64. If original call is intercom call and new call is
CO call:
Operation 1. You will hear a call waiting tone.
To terminate the original call and talk to the 2. Press the HOLD button for placing a
new caller. conversation on hold.
1. You will hear a call waiting tone (3 beeps). 3. Press the CO or ICM button whose
2. Press the CO or ICM button whose indicator is quickly flashing .
indicator is quickly flashing. The original 4. Consult with the new caller.
call is now terminated. 5. Press the CO or ICM button whose
3. Start talking. indicator is flashing slowly to terminate the
second call and to,return to the original call.
To leave the original call on hold and talk to the
new caller. Conditions
l If both original call and new call are intercom l If a call waiting tone is heard and the CO or
calls: ICM indicator does not flash, this tone
(The ICM indicator will change lighting into indicates a call waiting tone by your telephone
quickly flashing when new call reaches.) company.
1. You will hear a call waiting tone (3 beeps). In this case, see “Call Waiting-Outside Line”
on page 4-39.
4-20
 Press HOLD Dial 2nd Consult with Press HOLD Press CO or ICM
to leave 1st party 2nd party to leave 2nd whose indicator
E;;Y on is flashing slowly
E;;Y on

Consult with Press HOLD Press ICM or CO Consult with

1st party to leave 1st whose indicator 2nd party
f:;;~ on is flashing slowly

8. Press the ICM or CO button whose indicator

Description is flashing slowly.
Allows an extention user to alternate between a
CO party and an intercom party. 9. Consult with the second party.

Operation 10. Repeat step 4 to 9.

1. Press the HOLD button to leave the first party Conditions

on hold.
l To release the call splitting mode,press the
CO or ICM button without pressing the
2. Dial the second party. HOLD button.
Conversation will be terminated and call on
3. Consult with the second party. hold will be returned into conversation.
4. Press the HOLD button to leave the second
party on hold.

5. Press the CO or ICM button whose indicator

is flashing slowly.

6. Consult with the first party.

7. Press the HOLD button to leave the first party

on hold.

4-21
 To enable
HOLD
Be sure the SP-PHONE indicator is on.

lrl

Press Dial Consult

HOLD to 2nd with
leave 1st party party 2nd party
on hold

HOLD

10
I
Press
HOLD to
Consult Press
l

To cancel
1
The MUTE indicator

t
will flash.

with HOLD to
leave 1st party leave
2nd party 1st party
on hold on hold
I
Press l The MUTE indicator
again will go out.
Description
Allows an extension user to alternate
between two intercom parties.
Description
Use when you do not want your voice to be
Operation heard by the other party.
1. Press the HOLD button to leave the first
party on hold.
Operation
To enable
2. Dial the second party. Be sure the SP-PHONE indicator is on.
Press the MUTE button.
3. Consult with the second party. lThe MUTE indicator will flash.
4. Press the HOLD button to leave the second
To cancel
party on hold.
Press the MUTE button again.
5. Consult with the first party. lThe MUTE indicator will go out.

6. Press the HOLD button to leave the first Conditions

party on hold.
0 This feature can be activated only in the
7. Repeat step 3 to 6. speakerphone mode.

0 This feature can not be activated while using

Conditions the headset.
l To release the cafl splitting mode,press the
ICM button instead of the HOLD button.
Conversation will be terminated and call on
hold will be returned into conversation.

4-22
 To Use the Handset

While having a conversation using speakerphone

You will hear

voice announcement Lift
of a second handset
call and talk.
To Use the Hands-free
While having a conversation using the handset
Description
While you have conversation using the handset, this
feature allows an extension user to intrude through
I 1 I 1
the speaker of the KX-T123235. Press Hang up
As to the operation of extension user, “Busy Station St’-PHONE handset I
Signaling” on page 4-a.
This feature is available the KX-T123235 only.
Description
Operation You may choose the handset or hands-free.
While having a conversation using the handset;
Operation
1. You will hear voice announcement cf a second To use the handset
call.
While having a conversation using
2. Consult with the second party. speakerphone;

Conditions lift the handset.

0 This feature can not be activated while in the To use hands-free

speaker phone mode. While having a conversation using the

handset;

1. Press the SP-PHONE button.

2. Hang up the handset.

l When the other party finds it difficult to hear

your voice:

Lower the sound Ieve. using the SPEAKER

VOLUME CONTROL or speak louder.

l Absorbing echoes:

Use in a room which has curtains or

carpeting.

l To avoid lost conversations: .

If some part of the conversation is lost while

talking, speak alternately.

4-23
 To access

1 To access

Lift Dial “330” ’ Confirmation

or press tone of 1 bee1
SP-PHONE will be heard

Lift handset Dial “33 * ” 1 \

:PT%NE
i
I hi i
I hi
Page Wait for an
answer
and talk

n Paging will be heard only from

Confirmation Page Wait for an
tone of 1 beep answer and built-in speaker of proprietary
will be heard talk telephone.

n Page will be heard from the built-in speaker

of proprietary telephone and external paging
equipment.
Description
Allows paging to all extensions.
The page can only be heard from each
proprietary telephones (KX-Tl23230,
KX-T123235, KX-Tl23220 or KX-T123250, etc).

Description Operation
Allows paging to all extensions and external To access paging;
paging equipment at the same time.
The page can be heard from the built-in speaker 1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
of proprietary telephone and external paging button.
equipment. 2. Dial (330) and wait for confirmation tone
(one beep).
Operation “Paging All Ext” will be displayed.
To access paging;

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE 3. Start paging.

button.

2. Dial (33 *) and wait for confirmation tone (one 4. Wait for an answer and talk...
beep).
“Paging All” will be displayed. Conditions
0 You may dial (32 *) instead of (33 *). l When an extension is in use, that extension
3. Start paging. cannot gain access to paging.
l When any extension is using the paging (all
4. Wait for an answer and talk. extensions or group), you cannot
access to paging.
Conditions
0 When an extension is in use, that extension
cannot gain access to paging.

0 When any extension is using the paging (all

extensions, group or external), you cannot
access to paging.

4 - 24
 To access

Lift handset Dial “33” Dial Confirmation Lift handset Dial “32” Confirmation
extension tone or press exterrd tone
:P%%N E group SP-PHONE paMva
m mi ;1u:::igh*)

Page Wait for an Page VJi:zi answer

answer
and talk
nPaging will be heard
nPaging will be heard only
from external paging
from the built-in speaker
equipment (1 and / or 2).
of proprietary telephone.

Description
Allows access to external paging equipment.
Description
Allows paging to one of eight extension groups. Operation
The page can only be heard from each To access external paging;
proprietary telephones (KX-T123230,
KX-Tl23220 or KX-T123250 etc). 1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
button.
Operation
To access paging; 2. Dial (32).

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE 3. Dial the external paging number (0 through
button. 2) and wait for confirmation tone (one beep).
0: for external paging 1 and 2
2. Dial (33).
“Extrnl Page 1 & 2” will be displayed.
3. Dial the extension group number (1 through 8). 1: for external paging 1
“Extrnl Page 1” will be displayed.
A confirmation tone (one beep) will be heard.
2: for external paging 2
“Paging Group 1” , “Paging Group 2”, “Extrnl Page 2” will be displayed.
“Paging Group 3” , “Paging Group 4”,
4. Start paging.
“Paging Group 5“ , “Paging Group 6”,
When the page is answered, o&beep will
“Paging Group 7” or “Paging Group 8”,
be heard. Start talking.
will be displayed.
Conditions
4. Start paging.
0 If external paging access tone is set to
5. Wait for an answer and talk.
“Disable”, confirmation tone from external
Conditions paging equipment will not be heard after
accessing the external paging.
l If an extension is in use,that extension will
Refer to “External Paging Access Tone”-on
not gain access to paging.
page 3-41.

l Refer to “Extension Group

Assignment” on page 3-66.
To transfer a call to the paged person
To page from built-in speaker.

-e
L I I I I
While havino Press Dial “330” __ -~
I I I I
a conversat& TRANSFER
Dial “43” Confirmation ’ Talk
tone

pfLjjm.mm To paging from External Equipment.

Confirmation Page Wait for an Hang UP,

tone answer press
SP-PHONE,
FLASH,
l You may dial 331 through 338 DSS or CO
or 320 through 322 instead of 330. Dial “42” Dial Confirmation Talk
external tone
paging ’
number

Operation
“1”:for external paging equipment 1
“2”:for external paging equipment 2 1
To transfer a call to the paged person;
Description
1. You are in conversation. A page from the built-in speaker or external
paging equipment can be answered from any
2. Press the TRANSFER button. extension.

3. Dial (330) for paging all extensions. Operation

Dial (331) for paging extension group 1. To answer a page through the built-in speaker;
Diat (332) for paging extension group 2.
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
Dial (333) for paging extension group 3. button.
Dial (334) for paging extension group 4.
Dial (335) for paging extension group 5. 2. Dial (43) and wait for confirmation tone (one
beep).
Dial (336) for paging extension group 6.
Dial (337) for paging extension group 7. 3. Start talking.
Dial (338) for paging extension group 8.
Dial (320) for external paging 1 and 2. To answer an external page
Dial (321) for external paging 1.
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
Dial (322) for external paging 2. button.
Dial (33 * or 32~) for paging all extensions and
external. 2. Dial (42).

0 Wait for confirmation tone.

3. Dial the external paging number (1 or 2 ) and
wait for confirmation tone (one beep).
4. Start paging. “1”:for external paging 1.
“2”:for external paging 2.
5. Wait for an answer.
Conditions . .

6. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE FLASH, DSS or l If a call and CO number has been paged and
CO button. transferred, you may answer by pressing the
CO button whose number has been paged
and indicator is flashing slowly (red color),
instead of dialing 43,421 or 422.

4-26
 Use of Other Features

r
Setting
All Calls

Lift handset Press Dial “1” Dial Dial “ti” Hana UD or

or press FWDl DND extension press ’
SP-PHONE (F3) number SP-PHONE
to whom the
call is
forwarded
Busy or No Answer

Lift handset Press Dial “2” Dial Dial “# ” Hang up or

FWD/DND extension press
~PTZNE (F3) number SP-PHONE
to whom the
call is
forwarded
To cancel

Lift handset Press Dial “0” Dial “#” Hang up or

or press FWD/DND press
SP-PHONE e31 SP-PHONE

Description
All Calls 0 The programmable feature (F3 only) button of
the KX-T123250, KX-T61650, KX-T30825 or
All intercom calls to your extension can be
KX-T30850 can also be used for “Call
automatically forwarded to any extension within
Forwarding” if programming is done beforehand
the system.
in the extension. For programming, see page
For outside calls to your extension, if your extension
4-65.
is set to the Direct In Line (DIL) or call is the CO
line which is programmed to the DISA, the outside Operation
calls can be automatically forwarded to any
Setting
extension within the system.
For programming to the DIL or DISA mode, see page
3-57. 1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
button.
Busy or No Answer _
2. Press the FWD/DND (or F3) button.
If your extension is busy or does not answer the
call within 3 rings (“Call Forwarding Starting Time” 3. To forward all calls, dial (1).
on page 3-28 can change from 3 rings to 1 ring, 2 To forward the calls when your extension is
rings or 4 rings.), Intercom calls to your extension busy or do not answer, dial (2).
can be automatically forwarded to any extension
4. Dial the number of the extension to which
within the system.
the calls are to be forwarded (100 through
For outside calls to your extension, if your extension
199).
is set to the Direct In Line (DIL) or call is the CO .
line which is programmed to the DISA, the outside 5. Dial the (a) button. r
calls can be automatically forwarded to any A confirmation tone will be heard .
extension within the system. “FWD (All) Ext 102” or “FWD (B/ NA)
Ext 102” will be displayed.
6. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
The FWD/ DND indicator will flash.
4-27
 To cancel 0 An extension can not accommodate more than
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE one forwarded extension.
button. At each time of newly setting ‘Call
The indicator light of the FWD/DND button Forwarding”,a destination (forwarded
will be off. extension code) will be renewed.
Old entry will be canceled.
2. Press the FWD/ DND (or F3) button.

3. Dial (0).
accommodates
4. Dial the (a) button. one forwarded
A confirmation tone will be heard.
. “FWD/ DND Cancel” will be displayed.

5. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.

Conditions
Do Not Disturb is cancelled when call
forwarding is established.

Recall for camp-on and Hold recall are not

forwarded.

The tone (busy tone or do not disturb tone

etc.) the caller receives depends on the
condition of the forwarded extension. 0 If extension A is forwarding all calls to extension
B and B is forwarding all calls to C,
if any extension calls A, they will be connected
do ndt disturb tone to B and can not be connected to C.
Call Forwarding can be connected to only 1st
fowarded extension.

A B

0 When an intercom call to the forwarding

extension is originated from the forwarded
extension, the forwarded extension user will
hear a reorder tone.

reorder tone : (two beeps a second)

forwarded
extension

0 Call Forwarding-No Answer will not function

in “Automatic Answer” mode on page 4-10 Any extension calls A can
and “Intercom Voice Alerting” mode on page not be forwarded to C
4-60.

4-28
Setting

H You may dial 81 through 88 instead of 9.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _An extensioncan
Dial “3” Dial “9” Dial Dial I’#” Hang up automatically select
Lift handset Press
or press FWD/ DND phone an idle line within the
SP-PHONE- tF31
\-I
number %T?i%NE CO line enable to call.
to whom the 81 through 88 -.........- An extension can
call is select a trunk 9roup
forwarded ‘designated.
To cancel

III
Lift handset Press Dial “0” Dial “#” Hang up
or press FWD/DND or press
SP-PHONE (F3) SP-PHONE

Description To cancel
1-__A__. __ -.._ __ Lo-_ nil n, Ir\LlY
intercom caiis to your extension can be i. iiii iiie nanaser or press me 3r-rnurvt
automatically forwarded to any outside line. button.
For outside calls to your extension, if your The indicator light of the FWD/DND button
extension is set to the Direct In Line (DIL) or call is will be off.
the CO line which is programmed to the DISA, the 2. Press the FWD/DND (or F3) button.
outside calls can be automatically forwarded to any 3. Dial (0).
n,“L0I”
“ ,tcirln linn
” 111 I.?. Icnr nrnnrPmmi”
“I r/‘“._J,w,,,,,,,,y n tn tha ml
L” LIIG “IL
nr nlca
VI “,“T\ V. nini
A “I(11 1~1
\+P).
mode, see page 3-57. A confirmation tone will be heard.
This feature is required to be set beforehand in the “FWD/DND Cancel” will be displayed.
KX-T123211. For programming, see page 3-73. 5. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
The programmable feature (F3 only) button of
Conditions
the KX-T123250, KX-T61650, KX-T30825 or
- Do Not Disturb is cancelled when call
KX-T30850 can also be used for “Call Forwarding”
forwarding is established.
if programming is done beforehand in the
Recall for camp-on and Hold recall are not
OytpnGnn
v,.._.._._... .Fnr
_. nrnnrnmminn
P.-J.... . . .. . ... .J, S~F)
--- nanF!
r‘-a- @5.
forwarded.
Operation The phone number to whom the call is
Setting forwarded is used from 0 to 9 and pause
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE except *and # . A maximum of phone
button. number is 32 digits (Automatic line access
2. Press the FWD/ DND (or F3) button. number 9 or trunk group access number 81
3. Dial (3). through 88 are included).
4. Dial (9). 0 If outside call is forwarded to any outside
l You may dial 81 through 88 instead of 9. line, the KX-T123211 will disconnect the
9 -......... ....... . . . . . . ..- An extension can call from the line after 10 minutes. For
automatically select an idle changing the time, “CO to CO Duration Time
line within the CO line enable Limit” on page 3-30.3 beeps tone will be
to call. heard every 5 seconds for 15 seconds before
81 through 88 ...... An extension can select a the call is disconnected from the line.
tr,
LIUI1-1,
In “ .._l I.-. u=‘
y,vup rlnn;,...rr+-rl
31y,Idle”. 3 IIIf thn rr,dcirlr\
LI IG “ULOIUG
,--,I1 ic fnr...e-,rrlorl
ball 13 I”, ““al”~u
in nnnthar
L” (II l”ll1G31

5. Dial the phone number of the outside line to outside line through the KX-T123211, the
which the calls are forwarded. KX-Tl23211 may not disconnect both lines after
6. Dial (#). the calling party hangs up if the calling
A confirmation tone will be heard. parties line (central office exchange) does
“FWD (All) All COs” or “FWD (All) CO Gl” not release a CPC (Calling Party Control)
will be displayed. signal to the line.
7. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button. However the KX-T123211 will disconnect the
Thn FWn/ l3Nl-I inrliratnr will flach line after the timn that vntl have
programmed.
 Setting

Lift handset Dial “721 e” Hang up or

or press press
SP-PHONE SP-PHONE

To cancel

~ ]
I I
Lift handset Dial “72Oz” Hang up or
or press press
SP-PHONE SP-PHONE

IDescription Conditions
Allows you to prohibit any other extension user While your extension is in the “Dial Call Pickup

from answering calls directed to you. Deny” mode, you can place or receive outside

or intercom calls.

Operation
Setting

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE

button.

2. Dial (721s).

Wait for a confirmation tone.

“C.Pickup Deny” will be displayed.

3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.

To cancel,

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE

button.

2. Dial (720~).

Wait for a confirmation tone.

“C.Pickup Allow” will be displayed.

3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.

 _

Setting

I I
#
cl
Lift handset Dial “4” Dial “#” Hang up or
or press press
SP-PHONE SP-PHONE

To cancel

Lift handset Press Dial “0” Dial “#” Hang up or

or press FWD/ DND press
SP-PHONE (F3) SP-PHONE

Description To cancel
Each extension can be individually programmed 1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
for not receiving intercom call or outside calls. button.
The programmable feature (F3 only) button of the The indicator of FWD/ DND button will go
KX-T123250, KX-T61650, KX-T39825 or out.
KX-T30850 can also be used for “Do Not Disturb” 2. Press the FWD/DND (or F3) button.
if programming is done beforehand in the 3. Dial (0).
extension. 4. Dial (ti).
For programming, see page 4-65. “FWDIDND Cancel” will be displayed.
Wait for a confirmation tone.
5. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
Operation
Setting
Conditions
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
0 When “Do Not Disturb” is entered, ‘CaTI
button.
Forwarding” will be canceled.
2. Press the FWD/ DND (or F3) button.
3. Dial (4).
0 “Do Not Disturb” does not prevent the
4. Dial (#).
extension from recalling for on-hold and
“Do Not Disturb” will be displayed.
camp-on.
Wait for a confirmation tone.
5. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
0 If calling party use the “Do Not Disturb
The indicator of FWD/DND button will be
Override” feature, the call will receive the
lit.
extension that is setting the “Do Not
r .
Disturb”.
See the “Do Not Disturb Override” on page
4-32.

4-31
 Programming
a.. .

I I
Lift handset
or press
SP-PHONE
Dial
extension
number
II
. . . . . ..
\
Do not
disturb
tone is heard
When the called line is busy or while you are
speaking on the CO Line;

(100 through 199)

(c;1/ m. Dialing
Press AUTO Press
SAVE

Dial “1” Ring back

tone is heard and
wait for answer

Lift handset Press

orpress SAVE
Description SP-PHONE

This feature can dial to the extension that is

Description
set for the Do Not Disturb.
The desired phone number on an outgoing call
This feature is required to be set beforehand in
to CO line can be stored and then redialed.
the KX-T123211. For programming,
Programming
see page 3-75.
While you are speaking on the CO line or
when the called party is busy.
Operation 1. Press the AUTO button.

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE 2. Press the SAVE button.
l The phone number can not be stored even
button.
if you press the AUTO and SAVE buttons
2. Dial the extension number (100 through 199).
after you hang up.
3. Do not disturb tone is heard.
Dialing
4. Dial (1) and after a ring back tone is heard,
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
wait for an answer. button.
2. Press the SAVE button.
You may press the CO button to select the
Conditions CO line directly after lifting the handset or
0 When the line is-busy after dialing (l), busy press the SP-PHONE button.’
tone will be heard. In this case, the extension
Conditions
user can use Camp-on (Automatic Call Back 0 Up to 32 digits can be stored and redialed.
Busy) mode. 0 When using the KX-T123235, one pressing of
the SAVE button;
l When using the handset; redial once
l When using hands;free; redial up to 15.times
Do not disturb tone
(Automatic Redialing) within lo-minutes.
To cancel automatic redialing, press the
FLASH button.
l The KX-T123250, KX-T61650, KX-T30825
or KX-T30850 will not function for Saved
4-32 Number Redial.
 To Deny Executive Override

Lift handset
or press Dial “7330 #” press
SP-PHONE SP-PHONE

To Allow Executive Override

Lift handset Hang up or

Dial “7331~”
or press press
SP-PHONE SP-PHONE

Description To Allow Executive Override

Allows you to prohibit another extension user 1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE button.
from intruding into your conversation with an
2. Dial (7331”).
outside or inside party.
“Busy Ovrde Allow” will be displayed.
Default is “Allow” mode .
A confirmation tone will be heard.
For programming of the intrusive extension,
see “Executive Override” on page 3-74. 3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.

Operation Conditions
To deny Executive Override l When deny Executive Override-CO, refer to
“Data Line Security” on page 4-42.
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE button.

2. Dial (7330 #).

“Busy Ovrde Deny” will be displayed.
A confirmation tone will be heard.

3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.

4-33
 n To Listen

Lift handset
or press
SP-PHONE
Dial
extension
numbe.r
Wait until
confirmation
tone is heard
Dl 1

Dial “1 I’

n ToCancel

Ring back
tone is heard

Description Description
“Voice alerting” (through built-in speaker) that Music from an external source (e.g. radio) can be
is established at the called party’s extension, listened to on the built-in speaker of the
can be switched to “Tone alerting” (ringing). proprietary telephone.
This feature is required to be set beforehand at
the called party’s extension. For programming,
Operation
see page 4-60.
0 Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the
SP-PHONE button is off.

Operation To listen

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE Dial (1).

button. “BGM on” will be displayed.

2. Dial the extension number. Music will be heard from the speaker.

3. Wait for a confirmation tone after inter office To cancel

calling. Dial (1).
4. Dial (* ). “BGM off” will be displayed.
The ring back tone will be heard.
Tone Ringer on the called party’s extension
Conditions
will be ready to be activated.
l When listening to the background music, the
music will be interrupted by incoming calls,
lifting handset or pressing the SP-PHONE
button. After completion of the conversation
replacing the handset on the cradle or be
pressing of the SP-PHONE button, will resume
the background music.

4-34
 setting
Message 1. “Will Return Soon” Message 4. “Back at lo:23 AM”
l-l-l-

Lift handset Dial “751 8”

or press
SP-PHONE

Lift handset Dial “754,,

or press
SP-PHONE
Hang up or

!$+T=~H~NE

#
cl
Enter Dial “#” Hang up or
Message 2. “Gone Home” minute press
(00 through 59) “0”:for AM SP-PHONE
“1 “:for PM
;
1 Message 5. “Out Until 10123 ”
Lift handset
or press
Dial “752 W’
T Lday
month

1
SP-PHONE

[Fg [“al I”a]

Lift handset Dial “755” Enter

I I or press month
Hang up or SP-PHONE
% through
!$?H~NE

Message 3. “At Ext 1 2 ,3 ”

tnter Dial “#” Hang up or
I extension number
day
(01 through 31) K~~SH~NE

Message 6. “In a Meeting” i

Lift handset Dial “753”

or press
SP-PHONE Lift handset Dial “756=”
or press
SP-PHONE

pTjpq
Dial Dial “#” Hang up or
extension pres%
number SP-PHONE Hang up or
(100 through 199) press
SP-PHONE

4-35
 To cancel the message

Lift handset Dial “750#” Hang up or

or press press
SP-PHONE SP-PHONE

Description
Absent messages (Message 1 through 6) which Message 5. “Out Until 1 O/23 ”
are programmed can be informed to calling party.
Programming can be done at any telephone 1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
(either proprietary telephones or standard button.
telephones). 2. Dial (755)
When a caller using the proprietary telephone with 3. Enter the month. (01 through 12)
LCD dials the extension in which the message is
4. Enter the day. (01 through 31)
programmed, it will be displayed on the LCD.
5. Dial (8)

Operation 6. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.

Setting Message 6. “In a Meeting”

Message 1. “Will Return Soon”
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE button.
button.
2. Dial (756s)
2. Dial (751#)
3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
n Those Absent Messages will be displayed
Message 2. “Gone Home”
on the LCD of the calling party.
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
button. To cancel
2. Dial (752s) 1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button. button.
Message 3. “At Ext. 123” 2. Dial (750s)
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE “Message Cancel” will be displayed.
button. 3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
2. Dial (753)
3. Dial the extention number. (100 through 199) Conditions
4. Dial (a)
l The absent message will be displayed on the LCD
5. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button. of the calling party in case of following.
Message 4. “Back at lo:23 AM” l When a calling party dials’an extension that is
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE programmed for absent Message.
button. l When the extension is busy.
l When the extension is set the Do Not Disturb.
2. Dial (754)
0
3. Enter the hour (01 through 12)
4. Enter the minute (00 through 59)
4
F
5. Dial (0) or (1).
Dial (0) for AM.
a
Dial (1)for PM.
6. Dial (#)
7. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.

4-36
 To call you from the extension where the
Setting message is left.

El R!iiil
MESSAOE

Lin handset Dial Press Lift handset Talk

extension M ESSAG E or Dress M ESSAG E
:P%%NE number SF-PHONE
(100 Through 199)
To cancel the message at the extension where
the message is left.
t , I I I

Confirmation Hang up or
tone press I 1 I I I 1
SP-PHONE Lift handset Dial “70s” Hang up or
or press press
SP-PHONE SP-PHONE

Description To cancel a message which has been left at an

If the intercom extension you have dialed is busy or extension from the extension which has sent the
does not answer, you can inform the called extension
message.
that there is a message which have to be informed. It
will be indicated by the MESSAGE indicator. 1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
This feature also can be set after your call is answered button.
in the automatic hands-free mode.
2. Dial the extension number (100 through 199).
If the called extension is not provided with the
MESSAGE button, you can not leave the message. 3. Press the MESSAGE button.
To change the CO, or DSS button into the message 4. Press the MESSAGE button, again.
waiting button, see page 4-59 or 4-62.
A confirmation tone (two beeps) will be heard.
Operation The MESSAGE Indicator of the called extension
Setting will go out.
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE button. 5. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
2. Dial the extension number (100 through 199).
Conditions
3. Press the MESSAGE button.
0 This feature will not function with a standard
A confirmation tone (one beep) will be heard.
telephone.
The MESSAGE Indicator of the called party
will be lit. 0 Each extension can receive up to eight messages.

4. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.

0 If the MESSAGE Indicator does not go out
To call the extension which sent the message from after calling the extension which= is left the
the extension where the message is left. message, it means that another message is left.
1‘ Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE button In case of having received multiple messages,
2. Press the MESSAGE button. Dialing is done in order of receipt.
The MESSAGE Indicator will go out. But the extension to dial can be selected with
3. Start talking Proprietary Telephone with LCD.
When the Message button is pressed with the
To cancel the message at the extension where the handset on the cradle and the SP-PHONE button
message is left. off, name who left the message or extension
number is displayed.
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
During it is displayed,’ press the Message’ button
button
again. Repeat it until the desired name or
2. Dial (70s) extension number appears.
The MESSAGE Indicator will go out.
When the desired name or extension number
3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button. appears, lift the handset and press the Message
l All Messages will vanish. button.
4-37
 (Extension jack number 01 only)
To enable night service: (lo disable day service)

I
Dial “782 8” Hang
press
SP-PHONE

To disable night service: (To enable day service)

;I a

Lift handset Dial “781 G” Hang up or

or press press
SP-PHONE SP-PHONE

Description Operation
Normal system operation is set for day time mode. 1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
Night service allows for outward dialing and incoming button of extension of jack number 01.
ringing assignments etc. to be rearranged via 2. Dial (782 #) and wait for a confirmation tone.
programming. Night service is enabled.
Night service is enabled or disabled through “Night Mode” will be displayed.
extension jack number 01 using this feature, 3. To return to day service, dial (781~) and
at any time.
wait for a confirmation tone.
Without activating this feature, the day/night services
“Day Mode” will be displayed.
are automatically switched at predetermined time
A
7. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
(9:00 AM and 500 PM each day of the week for default
time) by the internal clock if the “Switching of Service
When the proprietary telephone with an LCD
Mode” in Day/Night Service Mode is selected to the
is not used, the present mode selected will
“AUTO” mode in the KX-T123211. Refer to “Switching of
be shown by pressing the “ # ” button.
Service Mode” on page 3-12 and “Starting Time” on page
3-13 in Day/Night Service Mode.
The following features will be switched “Day Mode”
or “Night Mode”.

“Flexible Outward Dialing Assignment” on page

3-53.
“Flexible Ringing Assignment” on page 3-54.
“CO Mode (NormaVDIUDISA) Assignment on page
3-57.
“Delayed Ringing Assignment” on page 3-56.
“Service Class Assignment of Toll Restriction” on
page 3-67.
“Ringing Assignment of Doorphone” on page 3-76.

4-38
 Call Waiting - Outside Line

a.. FLASH

. . . . . :.
l-l
tB
Will hear Consult with Press Consult with
a call new caller FLASH original
waiting while caller while
tone original call 2nd call
is on hold is on hold

1
If the calling party on
hold hangs up, the
line is terminated.

Description Condition
Allows an extension user to access features of the l “Flash” can be stored into memory in the

central office or host PBX. (example: call waiting same way as “Storage” on page 4-4.
feature can be supplied by central office.)

The external feature (e.g. call waiting feature) l You may access some features of host PBX

can only be accessed when engaged on an using the Flash button. If KX-T123211 is

outside call. connected to host PBX and flash operation is

required, follow the procedure of flash

operation which is required in the host PBX.

Operation
The following example shows you one of the

procedures.

Call Waiting - Outside Line

1. While having a conversation, another

party calls and a call waiting tone is heard.

2. Press the FLASH button.

l The original call is placed on hold and

the new call can be answered.

3. Press the FLASH button again.

l The original caller can be spoken to

again and the new call is placed on

hold.

l If the calling party on hold hangs up, the

line is terminated.

4-39
Making a Call

Press
FWD/ DND account CO. dial phone
(F3) code tone number

1
Account
code is
[ 4 digits.

Receiving a Call
If you want to record a calling party’s account code in the SMDR, follow the
below - mentioned procedure.

Within 30 seconds of finishing your conversation or while having a

conversation,

l Dialing the account code

must be done before
hanging up.
Press Dial
FWD/DND account
(F3) .~ code

n Making or Receiving a Call

If you want to record a calling or called party’s account code
in the SMDR, follow the below - mentioned procedure.

Within 30 seconds of finishing your conversation or while

having a conversation,

l Dialing the account code

must be done before
hanging up.
Press Dial
FWDl DND account
(F3) code

1
Account
code is
[ 4 digits.

4-40
Description n Receiving a call
This feature gives each message of the SMDR If you want to record a calling party’s account
an account code of the called or calling party. code in the SM DR, follow the below-mentioned
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) is- procedure.
cost saving feature that records all incoming Within 30 seconds of finishing your conversation
[ and outgoing calls tnrough the CO line. _ or while having a conversation,
This feature has two mod.es “Forced” and The FWD/DND Indicator will flash.
“Option”. 1. Press the FWD/DND (or F3) button.
In the “Forced” mode, the account code must “Enter ACCNT Code” will be displayed.
be entered every time the extension user dials. The FWD/DND Indicator will light.
In the “Option” mode, the account code may be 2. Dial the account code.
entered when a record of the account code is Account code must be 4 digits.
needed. l Dialing the account code must be done
When setting to the “Forced” mode, see page before hanging up.
3-71.
The programmable feature (F3 only) button of OtHion Mode
the KX-T123250, KX-T61650, KX-T30825 or n Making or Receiving a Call
KX-T30850 can also be used for “Account Code” If you want to record a calling or called party’s
if programming is done beforehand in the account code in the SMDR, follow the below-
extension. mentioned procedure.
For programming, see page 4-65. Within 30 seconds of finishing your conversation
or while having a conversation,
1. Press the FWDIDND (or F3) button.
Operation “Enter ACCNT Code” will be displayed:

Forced mode The FWD/DND Indicator will light.

W Making a Call 2. Dial the account code.

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE Account code must be 4 digits.

button. l Dialing the account code must be done

2. Press the CO button. before hanging up.
The FWD/DND Indicator will flash.
3. Press the FWD/ DND (or F3) button. Conditions
“Enter ACCNT Code” will be displayed. Account code must be 4 numegcal digits
The FWD/DND Indicator will light. except for the “st” and “++‘Ibut&r.
Intermittent tone is heard. If you enter the wrong account code, press
4. Dial the account code. the FWD/ DND button and enter the correct

Account code must be 4 digits. code.

CO dial tone will be heard. If account codes are programmed with

5. Dial the phone number. telephone numbers for one touch dialing or
system speed dialing, you need not to dial
0 You may dial 9 or 81 through 88 instead of an account code when making a call. _’
pressing the CO button. Program as follows.

4-41
 Setting

Lift handset Hang upor ,

or press Dial “7301 sf” press
SP-PHONE SP-PHONE

To Cancel

Lift handset Hang upor

or press Dial “73OOW press
SP-PHONE SP-PHONE

Description Conditions
This feature provides security when transmitting l The parallel connection of the proprietary
data through an extension of the KX-Tl23211. telephone and a data terminal equipment is
Executive override, call waiting tone and hold impossible.
time reminder tone from the KX-T123211 are
prohibited in this mode.

Operation
Setting
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE button.

2. Dial (7301#)
“Data Mode On” will be displayed.
A confirmation tone will be heard.

3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.

To cancel
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE button.

2. Dial(7300#).
“Data Mode 0ff”will displayed.
A confirmation tone will be heard.

3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.

4-42
To deny CO call waiting tone

I
Lift handset Hang up or
or press Dial “731 OW
press
SP-PHONE SP-PHONE

rl
y&q
To allow CO call waiting tone

I I 1

Lift handset Hang up or

or press Dial “731 l#” press
SP-PHONE SP-PHONE

To deny extension call waiting tone

Lift handset Dial “7320#” Hang up or

or press press
SP-PHONE SP-PHONE

To allow extension call waiting tone

I ,
Lift handset
Dial “7321W
I&q I
I
Hang up or
I

or press
SP-PHONE &FZH~NE

Description 2. Dial (731 la).

“CW (CO) dn” will be displayed.
During a conversation, a call waiting tone will
A confirmation tone will be heard.
be heard when a third oartv on an outside line
or intercom calls you.Call waiting tone can be 3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
removed at customer’s request.
Default is “Allow” mode.
To deny extension call waiting tone
Refer to “Call Waiting” on page 4-20.
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
Operation button.
To deny CO call waiting tone
2. Dial (7320#).
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE “CW (u(T) Off” will be displayed.
button. A confirmation tone will be heard.

2. Dial (7310#). 3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.

“CW (CO) Off” will be displayed.
A confirmation tone will be heard.
To allow extension call waiting tone
3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
button.
To allow CO call waiting tone .
2. Dial (7321#). c
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE “CW (EXT) On” will be displayed.
button. A confirmation tone will be heard.

3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.

4-43
 DSS(Direct Station Select)Button
Inter Office Calling(lntercom) Transfer of Outside Calls to any Extension

[Console] [Console] [EPhO”J

[Z&hO”el
NO.

Lift handset
or press
SP-PHONE
El
Press
DSS
Hang up or
press
SP-PHONE
I
Press
DSS
lzl
13[1-
Announce
and wait for
an answer
Hang up or
press
SP-PHONE

Programmable Feature Button

Programming
l Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the SP-PHONE button is OFF.
l Set the MEMORY switch of a pair telephone (Proprietary telephone) to “PROGRAM”.

HStorage nTo Correct an Error while Proarammina

One Touch Dialing

wTRANSFER

Press
CLEARfTRANSFER)
instead of
MEMORY
l After pressing

number.
the CLEAR
button, reprogram the correct

l The TRANSFER button is

used as the CLEAR button.

Press Dial “9” Dial Press nTO Change a Stored Number

PROGRAMMABLE phone MEMORY
FEATURE number Repeat “Storage” left side.
l You may dial 81 through 88 instead of 9. HTO Erase after Programming
9 . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . An extension can
automatically select an idle rConsole] [ZiphonJ
line within the CO line enable JTRANSFERI

II
to call.
81 through 88 ‘.’An extension can select a
trunk group designated.
Press Press Press
PROGRAMMABLE CLEAR MEMORY
I 9 or 81 through 88 must be dialed for storage. I FEATURE (TRANSFER)

l The TRANSFER button is used as the CLEAR

One Touch Access for System button.
Features I

Example: After programming all the numbers,return the

Paging All Extensions (Dial 330). MEMORY switch to “SET”.

Dialing
[Console]

[ZIphonJ [Console]

.
III
Press Dial “330” Press
PROGRAMMABLE MEMORY
FEATURE Lift handset Press
or press PROGRAMMABLE
SP-PHONE FEATURE

4-44
 Description 2. Enter the line access number.

n DSS (Direct Station Select) Button: 9:automatic line access number.

makes the dialing to the extensions very 8,l: access number of trunk group 1
easy.
You can reach the extension party by simply 88: access number of trunk group 8
pushing the DSS Button. 3. Enter the phone number. I

n Programmable Feature Button: 4. Press the MEMORY button.

let you access various features of 5. Repeat steps 1 to 4, to program on other
KX-T123211 and speed dialing using the CO programmable feature button.
line in addition to the numbers programmed
into the KX-T123211’s memory.
.
n To Confirm a Stored Number
Operation
Repeat programming the same number into
the same station.

Inter office Calling (Intercom)

When the MEMORY button is pressed, a beep
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE will be heard.
button of pair telephone. l two beeps _ The entry is the same as what was
2. Press the DSS button of Console. previously stored.
3. Start talking. l one beep ‘s. The entry is different from the one
4. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button that was previously stored.
after completion of the conversation. Repeat the procedure of
programming.
Transfer of Outside Calls to any Extension
One Touch Access for System Features
1. You are in conversation.
2. Press the DSS button (Console) to which Example:
the call is transferred.
Paging All Extensions (Dial 330)
3. Wait for Intercom party to answer and
announce call, then replace the handset or 1. Press the programmable feature button of
press the SP-PHONE button. Console.
2. Dial (330).
3. Press the MEMORY button of pair
telephone.
Programming
l Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the
After programming all the number% return the
SP-PHONE button is OFF.
MEMORY switch to “SET”.
l Set the MEMORY switch of a pair telephone
(Proprietary telephone) to “PROGRAM”.
Dialing
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
One Touch Dialing button of pair telephone.
2. Press the programmable feature button of
1. Press a programmable feature button of Console.
Console.

Conditions
Refer to “One Touch Dialing” page 4-4 and
“One Touch Access for System Features”
page 4-52.
 To lock

Lift handset
ml PRS
7
PRS
7
Dial “77” Dial lock
code
(000 through
Dial Same
lock code
again
Dial “f” Hang up or

KFHONE
999)

To unlock

I I

Lift handset Dial “77” Dial lock Dial “#” Hang up or

or press code press
SP-PHONE SP-PHONE

Description Conditions
Locking an extension prohibits another user from l When dialing to an outside line using a locked
dialing on an outside line until unlocked. extension, reorder tone will be heard.
“Restricted” will be displayed.
Operation
0 LOCK code must be 3 numerical digits except
To lock
for the I‘#” and “X ” button.
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
button.

2. Dial (77).

3. Dial the lock code.

Lock code must be 3 digits (100 through 999)

4. Dial the same lock code again.

5. Dial (#)
“Locked : 301” will be displayed.
I lock code

6. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.

To unlock

1. Lift handset or press the SP-PHONE button.

2. Dial (77).

3. Dial the lock code.

4. Dial (#).
“Unlocked” will be displayed.

5. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.

4 - 46
-

l Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the SP-PHONE button is off.

Press the following button which you want to confirm

0 Proprietary Telephone

Press Press Press Press Press Press CO Press DSS

REDIAL SAVE PROGRAMMABLE FWDlDND MESSAGE
FEATURE
0 DSS Console

I I I I

Press DSS Press

PROGRAMMABLE
FEATURE

Description l If Call Forwarding - To Outside Line has

been set to trunk group 1, “FVVD (All) CO
You can confirm your station status on the LCD.
Gl ” will be displayed.

Operation
0 DSS button
0 Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the
If Brown has been stored at extension no.
SP-PHONE button is off.
102 ; “102 : Brown” will be displayed.
Press the button which you want to confirm.

0 MESSAGE WAITING button

REDIAL button
If a message from extension 102, Brown
If telephone number 123-456-7891-
has been stored ; “102 : Brown” will be
2345 has been stored, “123-456-
displayed.
7891-12&l’ will be displayed.

0 CO button
SAVE button
If CO button has been changed into the
If telephone number 456-7891 has been
one touch dialing button, 2“9-123-4567”
stored, “456-7891” will be displayed.
will be displayed.
PROGRAMMABLE FEATURE button
Conditions
If telephone number 123-4567 bas been
l When the display of the contents stored
stored, “123-4567” will be displayed.
exceeds 17 characters, the mark “&” will be
displayed at the right end of the LCD.
FWD/DND button
If Do Not Disturb has been set, “Do Not
Disturb” will be displayed.
If Call Forwarding - All calls has been set c .
at extension no. 101, “FWD (All) Ext 101”
will be displayed.
If Call Forwarding - Busy or No Answer
has been set at extension no. 101, “FWD
(B/NA) Ext 101” will be displayed.
 Setting

Lift handset Dial “76” Enter Enter Dial Dial Dial “#” Hang up or
or press hour + minute + “O” or ‘6,” + U,” or “2”
press

I[ 1
SP-PHONE (01 through 1:). (00 through 59) SP-PHONE
“0” : for AM “1” : only one day
“1” : for PM “2” : every day
To cancel

Lift handset Dial “762#” Hang up or

or press press
SP-PHONE SP-PHONE

To Confirm the setting time

Lift handset Dial “763#” Hang up or

or press press
SP-PHONE SP-PHONE

Description To confirm the setting time

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
If a time is set, an Alarm tone will sound at the
button.
preset time.
2. Dial (763#).
Example :
Programming
0 If 10 : 10 AM has been stored, the LCD will
Setting show below.
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE “Alarm 10 : 10 AM” ... only one day
button. “Alarm 10 : 10 AM m ” ... every day
2. Dial (76). 0 The LCD will show “Alarm not Stored” when
3. Enter the hour with 2 digits (01 through 12). alarm time is not stored.
4. Enter the minute (00 through 59). 3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
5. Dial the “0” or “1”.
To stop the Alarm tone
0 : for AM
Lift the handset.
[ 1 : for PM
6. DJal the “1” or “2”. Conditions
1 : When the time comes, an Alarm tone Proprietary telephone equipped with LCD only
sounds and the setting is automatically can be used to confirm.
cleared after it. Multiple times can not be set at the same time.
2 : An Alarm tone sounds every day at the Setting a new time clears the preset time.
preset time.
When the preset time comes, an Alarm tone
7. Dial (#).
sounds for 30 seconds.
6. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.

Alarm tone
To cancel the setting
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE lllll 1l-M
button. 5sec
2. Dial (762#). 4 w
3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button. 4 - 48
 Dial Dial “*#” Dial
phone phone
number number Lift handset Dial “79#” Hang up or
or press press
SP-PHONE SP-PHONE

Description
When the dialing mode is required to change a
pulse mode to a tone mode in one dialing
sequence, this feature is used.
(e.g.computer-accessed long distance Description
service)
Dialing (79a)will reset the following station
Operation features on an extension to the default data.
1. Dial the phone number. (pulse mode)
2. Dial (*#) Absent Message Capability
3. Dial the phone number. (tone mode)
Call Forwarding

Conditions Data Line Security

l When you dial using this feature,you must Dial Call Pickup Deny
use the line set to a pulse mode. Do Not Disturb
Phone number after dialing”* # ” will
Call Waiting Tone Deny
change to tone mode.
Background M usic
Example:Computer - accessed long distance Executive Override Deny
service Message Waiting
l Local access telephone number of the Timed Reminder
alternate long distance service company
765 - 4321,
Authorization no.01 23456. Operation
Long distance no. 543 - 210 - 9876 1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
l Pulse mode is required by local access
button.
telephone number of the alternate long
distance service company. 2. Dial (79#) and wait for a confirmation tone.
l Service of MCI, SPRINT, METRO or other “Ext Data Clear” will be displayed.
systems is used. 3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.

Long distance service

company no.

Authorization no. Long distance no.

4-49
Description 0 co indicator light
Lamp indicators corresponding to the status of
the CO (Central Office), the ICM (Intercom) and Light Status
DSS (Direct Station Selection) buttons. ’
off idle
Explanation
on (green color) ’ in use
ICM indicator liaht

Status slow flashing

Light
(green color) on hold

off idle
slow flashing in on exclusive hold
groups of 2 When a call on CO line
0 in use for intercom (green color) is transfered to CO line.
0 in use for CO line
on to which the CO line
number is not
assigned. quick flashing privacy release
(green color)
slow flashing on hold
on (red color) in use at another
0 When a call on CO line extension
flashing in
which the CO line
groups of 2 slow flashing on hold at another
number is not assigned
(red color) extension
is transfered to CO line.
0 on exclusive hold receiving a call
quick flashing
(red color)

quick flashing 0 receiving a call

0 DSS Console (KX-T123240, KX-T61640)
indicator light

Light Status
Indicator of CO button which has been
changed into DSS button. off idle

Light Status on in use

(another extension)
flashing in in setting Do Not Disturb
groups of 2

slow
in setting Calf Forwarding
flashing

The DSS buttons which correspond to the

extensions on the system will light up
during incoming CO ring if:
l The extension is programmed to ring.
l A standard telephone is connected to
that extension.
l No telephone is connected with that
extension.
To turn off the indicators (DSS buttons)
change the setting of Flexible Ringing
Assignment to “Disable” (see page 3-54).

4-50
Description Description
In the event of a power failure each CO will be The elapsed time (from dialing to replacing the
connected to assigned extension. handset) on originating an outside call will be
CO1 will be assigned to extension of jack number 01. displayed.
CO2 will be assigned to extension of jack number 02.
CO5 will be assigned to extension of jack number 09. Operation
CO6 will be assigned to extension of jack number 10. None ,
CO9 will be assigned to extension of jack number 17.
CO10 will be assigned to.extension of jack number 18. Conditions
l When intercom calls, the duration time of
Operation conversation is not displayed.
l If extension of jack number 01,02,09, 10, 17
and 18 is connected with a KX-T123230, 0 Refer to “Duration Time Count Start Mode”
KX-T123235, KX-T61631, KX-T61630 or KX-T30830, on page 3-40.
the Power failure switch on the KX-T123230,
KX-T61631, KX-T61630 or KX-T30830 must be set to
the “ON” position during power failure. If dialing
cannot be done, set the Dialing mode switch to other
position (TONE or PULSE).
Description
If a handset of standard telephone remains off hook
Conditions
or is disconnected at the other end, a reorder tone
During power failure, all features are lost
will be heard. When “Calling Party Control (CPC)
except for incoming and outgoing CO calls from
Signal” mode is set to “Disable”, the reorder tone
extensions of jack number 01,02,09,10,17 and
will not be heard. (see page 3-62)
18.
Operation
If extensions of jack number 01,02,09, 10, 17
None
and 18 are connected with a KX-T123220,
KX-T123250, KX-T61620, KX-T61650,
Conditions
KX-T30825, KX-T30820 or KX-T30850,
l The party whose handset remains off- hook
disconnect the unit and connect a
will hear a reorder tone to indicate that the
KX-T123230, KX-T61631, KX-T61630,
call is disconnected.
KX-T30830 or a standard telephone.
There is no memory loss except for the camp-on,
saved number redial, the last number redial,
Call park and Message Waiting during power
failure, memory is protected by 21 day
rechargeable battery.
Rechargeable battery is good for 5 years.
Description
Automobile type batteries which are customer Any telephone instrument, whether’(KX-T123230,
supplied is available as a backup power supply KX-T123235, KX-T123220, KX-T123250, KX-T61631,
of the KX-T123211 to operate all the features in the KX-T61630, KX-T61620, KX-T61650,
event of power failure. Refer to page 2-34. KX-T30820, KX-T30825, KX-T30830,
For connecting automobile type batteries, use the KX-T30850 for exclusive use), standard
Optional Battery Adaptor KX-A26. rotary phone (10 pps, 2Opps), or standard
touch tone phone, may be used as an
extension of the KX-T123211.
Automobile type batteries
Operation
[ Consisting of two 12 VDC (24 VDC)] None

4-51
 Station Programming

To Program

l Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the SP-PHONE button is off.
l Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary telephone to “PROGRAM”.

Paging All Extensions (Dial 330).

Press Dial “330” Press

PROGRAMMABLE .._..._...
MEMORY
FEATURE

After programming all the system features, return the MEMORY switch to the “SET” position.

To Access

__ -r
I I I I I
Lift handset Press Confirmation Page
or press PROGRAMMABLE tone of 1 beep
SP-PHONE FEATURE will be heard

Description To Access
Features that can be accessed by using the 1. Lift the handset or press the
dialing button also can be programmed into “SP-PHONE” button.
memory. 2. Press the PROGRAMMABLE FEATURE
(e.g. Paging All Extensions.) button and wait for confirmation tone
(one beep).
Operation 3. Start paging .
To Program
Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary
telephone to “PROGRAM”.
“PITS-PGM NO ?-” will be displayed.

Example:
Paging All Extensions (Dial 330).
1. Press the PROGRAMMABLE FEATURE
button.
2. Dial (330).
3. Press MEMORY button.
0 System feature described in the table on
page 6-5 can be programmed into
memory.
After programming all the numbers, return
the MEMORY switch to the “SET” position.
4-52
 Prime Line Preference-Outgoing

l Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the SP-PHONE button is off.
l Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary telephone to “PROGRAM”.

Setting To cancel

Dial “13” Dial Press Dial “11” Press

CO number MEMORY MEMORY
(01 through 12)

l After programming “Prime Line Preference-Outgoing” mode, return the MEMORY switch to the
“SET” position.

Dialing through CO line

Lift handset Wait for Dial

or press CO. dial tone phone
SP-PHONE number

Description
Dialing through CO line
You can access the prime CO line directly by
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
picking up the handset or pressing the
button.
SP-PHONE button.
The CO indicator will be lit green.
Dial tone from CO will be heard.
Operation
2. Dial the phone number.
l Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the
0 To access an extension in the Auto CO
SP-PHONE button is off.
Hunting mode, press the ICM button and
l Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary
then dial the extension number.
telephone to “PROGRAM”.

Concfitions
Setting
This feature will not function with;a standard
1. Dial (13). _
telephone.
“Pref. Out : CO-” will be displayed.
2. Dial the CO number (01 through 12).
3. Press the MEMORY button.

To cancel
1. Dial (11).
“Pref. Out : No” will be displayed.
2. Press the MEMORY button.

l After programming, return the

MEMORY switch to the “SET” position.

4-53
 Idle Line Preference-Outgoing

l Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the SP-PHONE button is off.
l Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary telephone to “PROGRAM”.

Setting To cancel

[r;li pi pq 61.
Dial “12” Press Dial “11” Press
MEMOBY MEMORY

l After programming “Idle Line Preference-Outgoing” mode, return the MEMORY switch to the
“SET” position.

Dialing through CO line

1..1;9:il pfl

Lift handset Wait for ~~~~~rle

or press CO. dial tone
SP-PHONE

Description Dialing through CO line

You can access any idle CO line within the CO
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
line enable to call directly by picking up the
button.
handset or pressing the SP-PHONE button.
The CO indicator will be lit green.
Dial tone from CO will be heard.
Operation
2. Dial the phone number.
l Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the
l To access an extension in the Auto CO
SP-PHONE button is off.
Hunting mode, press the ICM button and
l Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary
then dial the extension number.
telephone to “PROGRAM”.

Conditions
Setting
This feature will not function with a standard
1. Dial (12). -
telephone.
“Pref. Out : Idle” will be displayed.
2. Press the MEMORY button.

To cancel
1. Dial (11).
“Pref. Out : No” will be displayed.
2. Press the MEMORY button.

0 After programming, return the

MEMORY switch to the “SET” position.

4-54
 Prime Line Preference-Incoming

l Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the SP-PHONE button is off.
l Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary telephone to “PROGRAM”.

Setting To cancel

Press Dial “22” Press

CO number MEMORY MEMORY
(01 through 12)

l After programming “Prime Line Preference-Incoming” mode, return the MEMORY switch to the
“SET” position.

To answer

Lift handset
or press
SP-PHONE

Description To answer
When incoming calls from the Central Office Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
are received at the same time, you can receive button.
the call on the preferred CO line first by only
lifting the handset or pressing the SP-PHONE 0 If any incoming calls from the Central Office
button. are received at the same time except for the
preferred CO line, you must lift the handset
Operation or press the SP-PHONE button and then press
l Be sure the handsetis in the cradle and the the CO button whose indicator is quickly
SP-PHONE button is off. flashing (red color).
l Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary
telephone to “PROGRAM”. Conditions
This feature will not function with a standard
Setting
telephone.
1. Dial (23). .
“Pref. In : CO-” will be displayed.
2. Dial the CO number (01 through 12).
3. Press the MEMORY button.

To cancel
1. Dial (22).
“Pref. In : Ring” will be displayed.
2. Press the MEMORY button.
0 After programming, return the MEMORY
switch to the “SET” position.

4-55
 No Line Preference- tncoming

l Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the SP-PHONE button is off.
o Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary telephone to “PROGRAM”.

Setting To cancel

1 1FY
AUTO 1

MEMORY
I
Dial “21 ‘I Press Press
MEMORY MEMORY

l After programming “No Line Preference-Incoming”, return the MEMORY switch to the
“SET” position.

To answer

Lift handset Press

or press CO whose
SP-PHONE indicator is
quickly flashing

Description To answer
If programmed for the No Line Preference- 1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
Incoming mode, the extension user must lift button.
the handset or press the SP-PHONE button and
then press the flashing CO button. 2. Press the CO button whose indicator is
quickly flashing.
Operation
0 Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the
SP-PHONE button is off. Conditions
0 Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary This feature will not function with a standard
telephone to “PROGRAM”.
telephone.

Setting
1. Dial (21).
“Pref. In : No”will be displayed.
2. Press the MEMORY button.

To cancel
1. Dial (22).
“Pref. In : Ring” will be displayed.
2. Press the MEMORY button. 0
l After programming, return the MEMORY 4
switch to the “SET” position.
$
B

4-56
 To Change into Other CO Button To Assign into Trunk Group Access Button

l Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the l Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the
SP-PHONE button is off. SP-PHONE button is off.
l Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary l Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary
telephone to “PROGRAM”. telephone to “PROGRAM”. , .

Press CO Dial “0” Dial Press Press CO Dial “ W Dial Press

which you CO number MEMORY which you ;;;;Ll:ouP MEMORY
want to which is want to
change into set newly change into (1 through 8)
different (01 through 12) trunk group
CO button button
l After programming all CO buttons, return
l After programming all CO buttons, return
the MEMORY switch to the “SET” position. the MEMORY switch to the “SET” position.

Description Description
Allows each CO button to change into CO Allows each CO button to change into
number which is different from printed CO the trunk group access number (81 through 88).
number.

Operation Operation
0 Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the l Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the
SP-PHONE button is off. SP-PHONE button is off.
0 Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary l Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary
telephone to “PROGRAM”. telephone to 66~~~~~~~‘9.

1. Press CO button which you want to change into 1. Press the CO button which you want to change
different CO number. into trunk group access number.
When pressing CO 1 button,
2. Dial (I#).
“CO-01” will be displayed.
3. Dial the trunk group number (1 through 8).
2. Dial (0).
“CO- ” will be displayed. 4. Press the MEMORY button.
3. Dial the CO number which is set newly (01
through 12). l After programming all CQ.buttons, return the
When dialing (02), MEMORY switch to the “SET’: position.
“CO-02” will be displayed.

4. Press the MEMORY button.

o After programming all CO buttons, return the

MEMORY switch to the “SET” position.

4-57
 To Change into DSS Button To Change into One Touch Dialing Button

Setting l Be sure the handsetis in the cradle and the

l Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the SP-PHONE button is off.
SP-PHONE button is off. 0 Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary
l Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary telephone to “PROGRAM”.
telephone to “PROGRAM”.

which you extension MEMORY which you want to p ho?e

want to number cnange Into numoer
change into (100 throughl99) one touch
DSS button

n
dialina
l After programming all CO buttons, return

m
AUTO 0 You may dial 81 through
the MEMORY switch to the “SET” position.
88 instead of 9.
Dialing (Inter Office Calling) MEMORY
I I
Press
MEMORY
F&I
0 l After programming all CO buttons, return
Lift handset Press CO the MEMORY switch to the “SET” position.
or press which has
SP-PHONE been changed
into DSS
Iescription
Description
Allows each CO button to change into the one
Allows each CO button to change into the DSS touch dialing button.
(Direct Station Selection) button. Up to 16 digits can be stored into each of the 12
DSS button can be used instead of dialing a CO buttons.
extension number.

Operation Operation
Setting l Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the
SP-PHONE button is off.
0 Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the
SP-PHONE button is off. l Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary
0 Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary telephone to “PROGRAMED.
telephone to “PROGRAM”. 1. Press the CO button which you want to
1. Press the CO button which you want to change change into one touch dialing .
into DSS button. When pressing CO 1 button, “CO-01” will
When pressing CO 1 button, be displayed.
“CO-01” will be-displayed.
2. Dial (2).
2. Dial (1).
“EXT- ” will be displayed. 3. Dial (9).

3. Dial the extension number (100 through 199). 0 You may dial 81 through 88 instead of 9.
When dialing (120), 9... An extension automatically selects an idle
“EXT-120” will be displayed. line within the CO line enable to call.
81 through 88... An extension selects a trunk
4. Press the MEMORY button.
group designated.
0 After programming all CO buttons, return the
MEMORY switch to the “SET” position. 4. Dial the phone numper.

5. Press the MEMORY button.

Dialing (Inter Office Calling)
0 After programming all CO buttons, return the
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE button.
MEMORY switch to the “SET” position.
2. Press the CO button which has been changed into
0 For dialing, refer to “One Touch Dialing”on
DSS.
page 4-4.
4-58
 To. Change into Other All CO Button’ To Change into Message Waiting Button

l Be sure the handsetis in the cradle and the l Be sure the handsetis in the cradle and the
SP-PHONE button is off. SP-PHONE button is off.
l Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary l Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary
telephone to “PROGRAM”. telephone to “PROGRAM”. )

m m m
Im/ m-B1
Press CO Dial ‘Y Press
which you want MEMORY Press CO 1 Dial “3” Press
to change MEMORY
into other all
CO button

l After programming all CO buttons, return l After programming CO 1 button, return

the MEMORY switch to the “SET” position. the MEMORY switch to the “SET” position.

Description Description
Allows CO button to change into all CO numbers Allows only CO 1 button to change into
which are not assigned to CO button. the message waiting button except the
KX-T123230, KX-T123220, KX-T123250 and
Operation KX-T30830.

l Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the

Operation
SP-PHONE button is off.
l Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the
l Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary
SP-PHONE button is off.
telephone to “PROGRAM”.
l Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary
1. Press the CO button which you want to change
telephone to “PROGFWM”.
into other all CO numbers.
When pressing CO 1 button, 1. Press CO 1 button.
“CO-01” will be displayed.
2. Dial (3).
2. Dial &).
3. Press the MEMORY button.
“Other CO key” will be displayed.
l After programming CO 1 button, return the
3. Press the MEMORY button. MEMORY switch to the “SET” position.

0 After programming all CO buttons, return the l For operation, refer to “Message Waiting”
MEMORY switch to the “SET” position. on page 4-37.

4-59
 l Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the SP-PHONE button is off.
l Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary telephone to “PROGRAM”.

Setting (Voice Alerting Mode) To cancel (Setting Tone Alerting Mode)

Dial “42” Press Dial “41” Press

MEMORY MEMORY

l After programming “Intercom Voice Alerting Mode”, return the MEMORY switch to the “SET” position.

To answer
When an intercom call reaches

Voice Lift handset Talk

alerting or press
is heard SP-PHONE

Description To answer
The intercom alerting mode (tone/voice) at a 1. When an intercom call reaches, voice
receiving extension can be selected through alerting is heard.
programming. 2. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
VOICE...Voice alerting instead of Tone alerting button.
is heard through the speaker on the 3. Start talking.
receiving extension.
TONE .-. Tone alerting (ringing) sound at the Conditions
receiving extension. This feature will not function with a standard
telephone.
Operation
l Be sure the handsetis in the cradle and the
SP-PHONE button is off.
l Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary
telephone to “PROGRAM”.

Setting (Voice Alerting Mode)

1. Dial (42).
“Voice Call” will be displayed.
2. Press the MEMORY button.

To cancel (Setting Tone Alerting Mode)

1. Dial (41).
“Tone Call” will be displayed.
2. Press the MEMORY button.
l After programming, return the MEMORY
switch to the “SET” position.
 To Change into Other DSS Button To change into One Touch Dialing Button

l Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the l Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the
SP-PHONE button is off. SP-PHONE button is off.
l Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary 0 Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary
telephone paired with the DSS console or telephone paired with the DSS console or
KX-T30830 to “PROGRAM”. KX-T30830 to “PROGRAM”.

Press DSS Dial “1” Dial Press Press DSS Dial “2” Dial “9” Dial
which you extension MEMORY which you want phone
want to number to change into number
change into which is one tout h
different set newly dialing
extension (1Cl0through 199)
l You may dial 81 through
number
88 instead of 9.
l After programming all DSS buttons, return
the MEMORY switch to the “SET” position.
Press
MEMORY

Description l After programming all DSS buttons, return

the MEMORY switch to the “SET” position.
Allows each DSS button to change into extension
number which is different from default extension Description
number.
KX-T30830, KX-T123240 or KX-T61640 only is Allows each DSS button to change into the one
available. touch dialing button.
Up to 16 digits KX-T30830, KX-T123240 or
Operation KX-T61640 only is available.

Setting
Operation
0 Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the
0 Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the
SP-PHONE button is off.
SP-PHONE button is off.
0 Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary
0 Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary
telephone paired with the DSS console or
telephone paired with the DSS console or
KX-T30830 to “PROGRAM”.
KX-T30830 to “PROGRAM”.
1. Press DSS button which you want to change into 1. Press the DSS button which you want to
different extension number.
change into one touch dialing.
2. Dial (1). 2. Dial (2).
3. Dial the extension number which is set newly 3. Dial (9).
(100 through 199).
0 You may dial 81 through 88 instead of 9.
4. Press the MEMORY button.
9... An extension can automatically select an
0 After programming all DSS buttons, r&Urn the idle line within the CO line enable to call.
MEMORY switch to the “SET” position. 81 through 88... An extension can select a
trunk group designated.
0 When the KX-T30830 is connected to the
KX-T123211, enter “DSS Number” or “One Touch 4. Dial the phone number.
Dialing Button” to DSS button certainly. 5. Press the MEMORY button.

0 After programming all DSS buttons, return

the MEMORY switch to the “SET” position.

0 For dialing, refer to “One Touch Dialing”on

page 4-4.
4-61
 - ?_

To Change into Message Waiting Button

0 Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the
SP-PHONE button is off.
l Be sure the handset
is in the cradle and the l Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary
SP-PHONE button is off. telephone to “PROGRAM”.
l Set the MEMORY switch of the KX-T30830 to , AUTO
“PROGRAM”. DEF

u
3 al
MEMORY

lib /oi
Dial “3” Continue to dial
CO numbers
which you
-0
Press
MEMORY

Press Press want to ring

DSSll MEMORY (01 through 12)
l After programming “CO Line Ringing
l After programming DSS 11 button, return Selection”,return the MEMORY switch to the
the MEM’ORY switch to the “SET” position. “SET” position.

Description
Through programming the CO numbers, you
can select whether the extension ring or not
Description when an outside call reaches through the CO

Allows only DSS 11 button of the KX-T30830 to line.

change into the message waiting button. Program the CO numbers which you want to
The KX-T30830 only is available. ring.“Flexible Ringing Assignment”on page
3-54 should be set to “Enable”.
Operation
l Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the Operation
SP-PHONE button is off. l Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the

l Set the MEMORY switch of the KkT30830 SP-PHONE button is off.

to “PROGRAM”. l Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary

1. Press the DSS 11 button of the KX-T30830. telephone to “PROGRAM”.

1. Dial (3).
2. Dial (3).
2. Continue to dial the CO numbers want to ring
3. Press the MEMORY button. (01 through 12).

l After programming DSS 11 button, return the 3. Press the MEMORY button.
MEMORY switch to the ‘SET” position. l After programming “CO Line Ringing

l For operation, refer to “Message Waiting” on Selection”, return the MEMO’RW switch to the
page 4-37. “SET” position.

Conditions
0 As all programmed CO numbers are not
displayed, press the “ + ” (FWD/DND) or “ c ”
(CONF) button for scrolling the Display.
0 When an outside call reaches through the CO
line doesn’t ring, the CO indicator will flash. If
you want to answer the outside call, press the
flashing CO button.

4-62
l Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the SP-PHONE button is off.
l Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary telephone to “PROGRAM”.

Dial “0” Enter Enter Enter Dial Enter

+

-..-.
--..
day of
year + month - day + + hour
the week
(last 2 digits) (01 through 12) (01 through.31) r 660,,: for SUN (01 through 12)
“4” : for THU
“1” : for MON “5” : for FRI

1 “2” : for TU E
“3” : for WED
“6” : for SAT

I
-.-,
nial Press
Enter
- MEMORY
-+ minute l “0” or “1 ”
(00 through 59)
“0” : for AM
“1” : for PM 1
After setting “Date and Time Setting”, return the MEMORY switch to the “SET” position.

Description 5. Dial the day of the week

When the present time is out of order, you can
(0 through 6).
adjust by following procedure.
0 : for Sunday
1 : for Monday
Operation 2 : for Tuesday
l Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the
3 : for Wednesday
SP-PHONE button is off.
4 : for Thursday
l Set the MEMORY switch of the KX-Tl23235
5 : for Friday
or KX-Tl23230 to “PROGRAM”.
6 : for Saturday
1. Dial (0).
6. Enter the hour with 2 digits
2. Enter the year (last 2 digits).
(01 through 12).
3. Enter the month with 2 digits
7. Enter the minute (00 through 59).
(01 through 12).
6. Dial the “0” or “1”.
4. Enter the day wjth 2 digits (01 through 31).
0 : for AM
[ 1 : for PM
9. Press the MEMORY button.
l After setting, return the MEMORY switch to
the “SET”position.

4-63
 0 Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the
SP-PHONE button is off.
0 Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary
telephone to “PROGRAM”. 0 Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the
SP-PHONE button is off.
0 Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary
telephone to “PROGRAM’:: ‘._
I I I I
Dial “#” Dial “w” PressMEMORY

l After clearing, return the MEMORY switch

to the “SET” position. ma
Dial “8” Press
Description MEMORY

l Pressing (# * MEMORY) will reset station 0 After canceling the Electronic Station Lock,
programs on an extension to the default return the MEMORY switch to the “SET”
position.
data.
l Auto CO Hunting
Description
Prime Line Preference-Outgoing
Idle Line Preference-Outgoing You can cancel the Electronic Station Lock of all
extensions.
l Automatic Answering Selection
This feature only is done through extension
Prime Line Preference-Incoming connected to jack number 01.
No Line Preference-Incoming
l Intercom Voice Alerting Mode Operation
0 CO Line Ringing Selection
0 Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the
l Call Waiting Tone Selection SP-PHONE button is off.
l F3-One Touch Button Mode Selection 0 Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary
telephone to “PROGRAM”.

Operation 1. Dial (8).

l Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the 2. Press the MEMORY button.
SP-PHONE button is off.
0 After canceling the Electronic Station Lock,
l Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary return the MEMORY switch to the “SET”
telephone to “PROGRAM”. position.
1. Dial (#).
2. Dial (*).
3. Press the MEMCRY button.
l After clearing, return the MEMORY switch
to the “SET” position.

4 - 66
 l Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the SP-PHONE button is off.
e Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary telephone to “PROGRAM”.

To record

0 Message which is recorded is played

back automatically after press the
m a H MEMORY button.

Dial “9” Lift handset Dial “2” Give Press

message MEMORY

To play back only

Dial “9” Dial “1” Will hear

message

l After recording or confirming, return the MEMORY switch to the “SET” position.

Description To play back only

1. Dial (9)
Enables recording of message that answers
“Outgoing Message” will be displayed.
calls on the CO line set to “DISA” mode.
The record time is max. 31 seconds. One 2. Dial (1)
message can be recorded. “Playback : 00” will be displayed
Message is played back and then count will
Programming start.

0 Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the l After recording or confirming, return the
SP-PHONE button is off. MEMORY Switch to the “SET” position.
0 Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary
telephone to “PROGRAM”. Condition
0 If you exceed the max. time of recording (31
To record
seconds), Recording is automatically stopped
1. Dial (9). i
and Playback is started. _
“Outgoing Message” will be displayed.
0 Optional Outgoing Message Card and Direct
2. Lift the handset
Inward System Access Cards are necessary.
3. Dial (2) and then give the message.
If a power failure takes place for about 10 days,
“Record : 00” will be displayed and then
OGM will vanish. Then “Record OGM” will be
count will start.
displayed and blink on the LCD of the extension
4. When finished, press the MEMORY button. connected to jack no. 1.
“Playback: 00” will be displayed and Please record OGM again.
message that was recorded is played back
automatically.

4 - 67
 OPERATION OF A STANDARD TELEPHONE
(rotary and touch tone phones) - c

Making Calls

Description
There are 100 memory locations of system
Description speed dialing available.
Station to station dialing within the
Operation ,
KX-T123211 system.

Operation

Lift handset Dial “C’ Dial speed

access code (00 through 99)

l There is no need to access a CO line.

Lift ;z;ia;ension
handset l A rotary phone will not function for
(100 through 199)
speed dialing
l Continuous use of speed dialing is
impossible.

Automatic Line Access

Description
Description You can call the doorphone within the
Each extension can automatically select an KX-Tl23211 system.
idle line within the CO (Central Office) line ODeration
enable to call.
Doorphone 1
Operation

Lift handset Dial “311”

Lift Dial “9” Wait for Dial phone Doorphone 2

handset C.O. dial tone number

Individual Trunk GrouD Access ,~

Description Lift handset Dial “312”

0 You can not dial to doorphone from Off
Each extension can automatically select an
Premise Extension (OPX).
idle CO line within the same trunk group.
0 Up to two doorphones (KX-T30865) can be
Through programming, 12 CO lines can be
divided up to 8 groups. See the page 3-52.

Operation
Description
You can call the operator within the

cl
TUV
8
Dial “8” Dial trunk Wait for
KX-T123211 system.
This feature is required to be set
beforehand in the KX-T123211. For
handset group C.O. dial programming, see page 3-9.
number tone
(1 through 8)

Lift Dial “0” Dial “0”

Dial phone
number handset or “1 ”
o In case one operator is programmed, you
have only to dial 0.
5-I
 When a Line is Busy

Description Description
If the extension you have dialed is busy, or If the extension you have dialed is busy, you
outside line (CO line) you have selected is busy, can inform the extension that another
the call will be automatically called back to you intercom call is incoming with three beeps.
when the extension or the outside line becomes
free using this function. If the extension you have dialed is
This feature is also known as camp-on. KX-T123235, you can inform the extension
through the speaker.
Operation
For Outside Calls Operation

Dial “6” Dial You will Dial “1”

Dial “8” Dial trunk You will
hear a extension hear a and wait for
grow busy tone an answer
number busy tone number
(l- thioug h 8) . yi; through

l To answer your signal, see “Call Waiting”

on page 5-5.
l While the other party is set for ‘Call
Confirmation Hang up
tone Waiting Tone-From Extension Deny” on
0 You may dial 9 instead of 8 and trunk group page 5- 15 or is using a data terminal
number. equipment, you may not be able to use
this feature. (A reorder tone is heard
For Intercom Calls after dialing 1.)

You will Dial “6” Confirmation

Dial
extension hear a busy tone
number tone
7;; through
Description
The last phone number dialed on an
outside line (CO line) can be redialed.

Operation
Hang up

When hearing a ring back

0 When making an intercom call,

you will hear a ring back tone. handset
0 When making an outside call, you
Lift will hear the dial tone from the l You may dial “80” instead of pressing .
handset co. the “sf” button. *
l A call back busy cannot be activated on
an extension which has a call on hold.

5-2
 When a Line is BUSY (cont.) Receiving Calls

Operation
Description
Allows an extension user to intrude into
another extension that is in conversation
with an outside or inside party. Lift
handset
This feature is required to be set
beforehand in the KX-T123211.
For programming see page 3-74.

Operation
pJ*-
.. \.....
Description
An extension user can answer any ringing

Lift Dial
II
You will Dial “2”
extension within their own extension group.

Operation
handset extension hear a busy A 3-party

ml 0
number tone Conference
v;; through is now GHI OPER
established 4
Lift Dial “40”
handset
l If the other party is using data equipment or
is set for “Executive Override Deny-
Extension on page 5-l 5, you can not intrude
into the other party that is in conversation.
(A recorder tone is heard after dialing 2.)

Description
An extension may answer an incoming call
that is ringing at another extension
regardless of the extension group.

Operation

Lift Dial “4” Dial ringing ’

handset extension number
(1 OO’through 199)

0
4
2
P

5-3
 Receiving Calls (cont.) While Having a
Conversati6n -

Description
An extension user can place up to ten calls Description
in the park zones. If you wish to leave your phone unattended
This allows any extension user to retrieve a but want the caller you are in(co_nversation
parked call (intercom or outside) at any with to wait, call on hold may be used.
extension. Intercom or outside calls may be on hold.

Operation Operation
To Park a Call
To Place a Call on Hold

l Do not depress
the hookswitch
Flash pn;firmation Dial “2” Dial parking for more than
hookswitch station Flash Confirmation one second, or
number hookswitch tone of
(20 through 29) 2 beeps will the party will be
be heard disconnected.

When the “Call on Hold for Standard

Confirmation Hang up Telephone” on page 3-77 is placed in the
tone “Hold-2” mode, dial “20” after flashing of
0 If a busy tone is heard after the parking the hookswitch. If any number except “20” is
station number is dialed, dial only the last dialed, the party will be disconnected.
1 digit of another parking station number.
(0 through 9).
0 Do not depress the hookswitch for more To Cancel
than one second, or party will be
disconnected.

When the “Call on Hold for Standard

Telephone” on page 3-77 is placed in the Flash
hookswitch
“Hold-2” mode, dial “20” after flashing of
the hookswitch in addition to the above
procedure. If any number except “20” is To Retrieve a Call on Hold from Another
dialed, the party will be disconnected. Extension

To Retrieve a Parked Call at Any Other

Extension

Lift Dial “5” Dial holding

handset extension
number
1’:; through
Lift Dial “5” Dial parking station
handset number
(20 through 29) l In case held call is outside call, you may
dial “53” and then held CO line number
(01 through 12). i .

Operation l This feature is required to be set

beforehand in the KX-Tl23211.
For programming, see page 3-76.
0 Off Premise Extension (OPX) does
not receive call from the doorphone.
Lift
handset 5-4
 While Having a conversation (cont.)

Description Description
Allows for a three party conference, Call Waiting tones during a conversation
(2-outside/ 1 -inside) (1 -outside/2-inside) or indicates there is a new incoming outside
(34nside). /
call or Intercom call.

.
ODeration
\I
This feature has been set beforehand in
the exte nsion.

Operation
hal\
ml
Consult Flash
Flash Dial 2nd
hookswitch pafly with 2nd hookswitch
leave 1st number party
party on hold Will hear Flash Hang up Lift
a call hookswitch handset
waiting leave 1st
tone p;y on

Dial “3”

Consult with
When the “Call on Hold for Standard new caller
Telephone” on page 3-77 is placed in the while 1st
r;);;;y is on
“Hold-2” mode, dial “20” after first flashing
of the hookswitch in addition to the above
procedure. If any number except “20” is l If you use the hold button of a standard
dialed, the first party will be disconnected. telephone, the above-mentioned feature
will not function.
l To terminate the original call and return
To leave one caller on Hold and Talk to the
to the 2nd call, hang up and then lift the
Other Caller
handset. (You need not flash the
hookswitch.)

When the “Call on Hold for Standard

Flash 2nd party
hookswitch on hold 1 st Telephone” on page 3-77 is placed in the
party in “Hold-2” mode, dial “20” after first flashing
consultation
of the hookswitch in addition to the above
procedure. If any number except “?$I” is
dialed, the first party will be,disconnected.
-
I

5-5
 While Having a Conversation (cont.)

Description Description
Allows the station user to alternate between Outside or intercom calls may be
two parties, intercom and outside. transferred to any extension manually.
A call can not be transferred to outside
Operation line.
Operation
To Transfer After the Other Extension Answers

Flash Dial second Consult with Flash

hookswitch paw 2nd party while hookswitch
1st party is on
hold
Flash Dial Announce Hang up
hookswitch extension and wait for
number an answer

To Transfer without Announcing the Other

Extension
2nd party Flash 1 st party on
on hold 1st hookswitch hold 2nd party
party in in consultation
consultation

Flash Dial Hang up

hookswitch extension
number

When the “Call on Hold for Standard When the “Call on Hold for Standard
Telephone” on page 3-77 is placed in the Telephone” on page 3-77 is placed in the
“Hold-2” mode, dial “20” after first flashing “Hold-2” mode, dial “20” after flashing of
of the hookswitch in addition to the above the hookswitch in addition to the above
procedure. If any number except “20” is procedure. If any number except “20” is
dialed, the first party will be disconnected. dialed, the party will be disconnected.

To Retrieve the Call

If the other extension did not answer the
transferred call within 30 seconds after the call
has been transferred, the call will return to
you. In this case:
While the ring back is hearing,
l The time that the callreturns to
you when the transferred call is
not answered can be changed
Lift from 30 seconds to 15 seconds.
handset For changing, see page 3-27.

To change the party to whom a call is

transferred before hanclina UD
.

Flash Flash ::I;;ension

hookswitch hookswitch
to retrieve
call

5-6
 Paging

Description Description
Allows paging all extensions.,
Allows paging all extensions and external
paging equipment.. Operation
To Access
Operation
To access

Lifl Dial “330” Confirmation

handset tone of
1 beep will
be heard
Lift handset Dial “33 * ” Confirmation
tone of 1
beep will
be heard

Page Wait for

an answer
and talk

l Paging will be heard only from the

Page Wait for an
answer and built-in speaker of KX-T123235,
talk KX-T123230, KX-T123220,
KX-T123250, etc.
It will not be heard from the built-in
speaker of a standard telephone.
0 Page will be heard from the built-in speaker
of proprietary telephones and external paging
equipment.

Description
l You may dial (32~) instead of (33~). Allows paging to one of eight extension
groups.
Operation
To Access

Lift Dial “33”

handset

Confirmation Page Wait for an

tone answer and talk

5-7
 Paging (cont.)

Description Description
Allows access to external paging equipment. A page from the built-in speaker or
Operation external paging equipment can be
answered from any extension ..
To Access
Operation

. Lift
handset
ml DEF
3
ABC

Dial “32”
2
Dial external
paging number
from Built-in Speaker

Confirmation
tone of 1 beep
will be heard

Confirmation Page Wait for an

tone answer and
talk

l External paging number Talk

“0”: for external paging equipments 1 and 2.
“1”: for equipment 1. To Paaina from External Eaubment

ml
“2”: for equipment 2.
GHI ABC
l Paging will be heard from external
paging equipment.
.4 2
0 Up to two external paging Lift Dial “42” Dial external
equipment can be connected to paging number
the KX-T123211.

Operation
Confirmation
tone
1 Talk
l External pagings
number
“1‘I: for external
paging 1.
“2”: for external
paging 2.
To Transfer a Call to the Paged Person

Flash hookswitch Dial “330” pn;firmatior

to olace a call
on’hold

Page Wait for an

answer and
hang up

When the “Call on Hold for Standard

Telephone” on page 3-77 is placed in the
“Hold-2” mode, dial “20” after flashing of
the hookswitch in addition to the above
procedure. If any number except “20” is
dialed, the party will be disconnected.

5-8
 Use of Other Features

Description Description
Allow you to dial to the extension on which Allows extension user to access features of
Do Not Disturb is set. the central office or host PBX. (example:
This feature is required to be set beforehand call waiting feature can be supplied by the
in the KX-Ti 23211.. For programming, see central office.)
page 3-75. 0 This external feature (call waiting) can

Dia,
only be accessed when on an outside call.

l The following example shows you one of

the procedures.
Lift Do not Dial “1”
handset extension disturb
is heard
tone Operation
number
‘1$“99through
Call Waiting-Outside Line

Q**
.. \.....
l-!-l
Ring back
While in
conversation
Will hear a
call waiting
Flash
hookswitch
Dial “6”

tone is heard tone

and wait
for answer

Consult with Flash Dial “6” Consult with

new caller hookswitch original caller while
Description while original 2nd call is
call is placed placed on hold
“Voice alerting” (through built-in speaker) on hold
that is established at the called party’s
extension, can be’switched to “Tone alerting”
(ringing).
l This feature is required to be set
beforehand at the called party’s extension. l Flashing the hookswitch and dialing “6”
For programing, see page 4-60. means flash operation.
l A rotary phone will not function. 0 If the KX-Tl23211 is connected to a host
PBX and a flash operation is required,
Operation follow the procedure of flash operation
which is required for the host PBX.
Switching to Tone Alerting

When the “Call on Hold for Standard

Telephone” on page 3-77 is placed in the
Fj pq Fi
“Hold-2” mode, dial “20” after the first
flashing of the hookswitch in addition to the
Wait until a Press “*” Ring back above procedure. If any number except “20” is
confirmation tone
tone is heard dialed, the original call will be disconnected.
l You should press ‘V button within 10
seconds after the dialing.

5-9
 Use of Other Features (cont.)

Description n Receiving a Call

This feature gives each message of the If you want to record a calling party’s
SMDR an account code of the called or account code in the SM DR, follow the
calling party. below-mentioned procedure;
Within 30 seconds after calling party hangs

1
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR 1 up,
is cost saving feature that records all
incoming and outgoing calls through the
CO line.
[ mpq
.
This feature has two modes “Forced” and Flash Again Dial account
Dial ‘k”
“Option”. In the “Forced” mode, the hookswitch code
account code must be entered every time l Dialing the account code must be done
the extension user dials. In the “Option” before hanging up.
mode, account code may be entered when
a record of the account code is needed. When the ‘Call on Hold for Standard
When setting to the “Forced” mode, see Telephone” on page 3-77 is placed in the
page 3-71. “Hold-2” mode, dial “20” after flashing of
the hookswitch in addition to the above
procedure. If any number except “20” is
Operation
dialed, the party will be disconnected.
Forced Mode
Option Mode
n Making aI Call n Making or Receiving a Call
If you want to record a calling or called
party’s account code in the SMDR, follow
the below-mentioned procedure.
Lift Dial “9” Dial ‘k” Again Within 30 seconds after calling or called
handset
Intermittent party hangs up,

*
tone is

•l
heard.

[ 1
Flash Dial “‘s” Again Dial Account
hookswitch account code is
code 4 digits.
Dial Wait for Dial .I I
account C.O. dial telephone l Dialing the account code must oe aone
code tone . number before hanging up.

[ 1
Account
code is
4 digits. When the “Call on Hold for Standard
Telephone” on page 3-77 is placed in the
“Hold-2” mode, dial “20” after flashing of
l You may dial 81 through 88 instead of
the hookswitch in addition to the above
dialing 9.
procedure. If any number except “20” is
dialed, the party will be disconnected.

0 You may dial 49 instead of pressing the-,

“jt” “s” button.
0 Account code require 4 numerical digits
except for the “tf ” and “*” buttons.
0 If you enter a wrong account code, press
the “Jo” “jc” button and enter the correct
code.
5-10
 Use of Other Features (cont.)

n You may dial “0” instead of pressing the “#I’ button. -

Description
Each extension can be individually Description
prohibited from receiving intercom and Allows you to prohibit any other extension
outside calls. user from answering calls directed to you.

Operation
Setting

Operation
Settina
Lift Dial “721sf”
handset

Lift Dial “714W

Hang up

Hang up To Cancel

To Cancel
I Lift Dial “720#”

(~~~F-Jj handset

Lift Dial “71 OW

handset

Hang up

Hang up

5-11
 Use of Other Features (cont.)

Description Description
All intercom calls to your extension can be If your extension is busy or do not answer a
automatically forwarded to any extension call within 3 rings, all intercom calls to your
within the system. extension can be automatically’fojwarded to
For outside calls to your extension, if your any extension within the system..
extension is programmed for the Direct In For outside calls to your extension, if your
Line (DIL) or the call is the CO line which is extension is programmed for the Direct In
programmed for the DISA, the outside calls Line (DIL) or the call is the CO line which is
can be automatically forwarded to any programmed for the DISA, the outside calls
extension within the system. can be automatically forwarded to any
For programming of the DIL or DISA mode, extension within the system.
see page 3-57.
1 ring or 2 rings or 4 rings by programming
Operation (see page 3-28).
Setting

piY=iiq Operation
lift Dial “711” Dial Settinn
handset extension
number
(119099through

Lift Dial “712” Dial

handset extension
number

Dial

To Cancel
“#” Hang up

#
•l
Dial “#” Hang up

To Cancel
Lift Dial “710#
handset

Lift Dial “71Off”

handset

Hang up

Hang up

5-12
 Use of Other Features (cont.)

Description Description
Intercom calls to your extension can be Absent message (Message 1 through 6) which
automatically forwarded to any outside line. are programmed can informed to-an inside
For outside calls to your extension, if your calling party.
extension is programmed for the Direct In Line Programming can be done at any telephone
(DIL) or the call is the CO line which is (either proprietary telephones or standard
programmed for the DISA, the outside calls telephones).
can be automatically forwarded to any outside When a caller using the proprietary telephone
line. For programming of the DIL or DISA with LCD dials the extension in which the
mode, see page 3-57. This feature is required message is programmed, the message will be
to be set beforehand in the KX-T123211. For displayed on the LCD.
programming, see page 3-73.
Operation
Operation
Setting
Setting
n Message 1. “Will Return Soon”
WXY

a
9
,
Lift handset Dial “713” Dial “9” I
Lift handset Dial “751” Dial “#‘I

Dial phone Dial “W Hang up

number
Hang up
l You may dial 81 through 88 instead of 9.
9: _________-----------An extension can
automatically select an idle
n Message 2. “Gone Home”
line within the CO line
enable to call.
81 through 88:--- An extension can select a
trunk group designated.
l You can not dial “0” instead of pressing the Lift handset Dial “752” Dial “#”
“#” button.

To Cancel

Hang up

Lift handset Dial “71 O#” Hang up

If outside call is forwarded to any outside

line, the KX-T123211 will disconnect the call
from the line after 10 minutes. For changing
the time, see “CO to CO Duration Time
Limit” on page 3-30.
3 beeps tone will be heard every 5 seconds
for 15 seconds before the call is
disconnected from the line.

5-13
 Use of Other Features (cont.1

n Message 3. “At Ext. 123” H Message 5. “Out Until 10/23”

--
extension number L Lday
month

I 1
Lift handset Dial “753” Dial
Lift handset Dial “755” Enter
extension
number month

Khrough

Dial “#” Hang up

Enter day
#
Dl Dial “#’ Hang up
(01 through
31)

n Message 4. “Back at lo:23 AM”

TT=AM/PM
n Message 6. ‘In a Meeting”
1 L minute
hour

Lift harldset Dial “756” Dial 9”

Lift Dial “754” Enter hour

handset
% through

Enter
minutes
(OOthrough
Dial “0” or
“I ”
lo#
Dial “#” Hang up
Hang up

59) To Cancel the message

Lift handset Dial “750” Dial “#‘I

Hang up

5-14
 Use of Other Features (cont.)

Description To Allow Extension Call Waiting Tone

During a conversation, a call waiting tone

will be heard when a third party on an
outside line or intercom calls you.
Call waiting tone can be removed
Lift handset Dial “73” Dial “2”
at a customer’s request.
Default is “Allow”.
Operation
To Deny CO Call Waiting Tone
ml 1s
Dial “l#” Hang up

Lift handset Dial “73” Dial “1”

WER Description

ml0 # Dial “O#” Hang up

Allows you to prohibit another extension
user from intruding into your conversation
with an outside or inside party.
For programming of the intrusive extension,
To Allow CO Call Waiting Tone see “Executive Override” on page 3-74.
I 1 ,
1 Default is “Allow”.
Operation
To Deny Executive Override
Lift handset Dial “73” Dial “1”

PRS DEF
7 3
ml l#
Dial “l#” Hang up
Lift handset
ml
Dial “73”

To Deny Extension Call Waiting Tone

Dial “O#P Hang up

Lift handset Dial “73” Dial “2”

Executive Override
r-
pqq 0
;51
Lift handset Dial “73” TXJ
1;
Dial “O#” Hang up
P

Dial “l#” Hang up L

 Use of Other Features (cont.)

Description Description
Locking an extension prohibits the other user If a time is set, an alarm tone wiU sound at the
from dialing to an outside line using it until preset time. - I
unlocked, such as when leaving your seat
for a while.

Operation Operation
To lock Setting

PRS MN0
7 6’
ml
Lift handset Dial “77” Lift handset Dial “76” Dial
hour
(01 through 12)

I I
Dial “#” Hang up Enter Dial Dial
minute -+ “0” or “1” - “1 ” or “2”
(00 through 59)
“0” : for AM
“1” : for PM IC “1” : only one day
“2” : every day 1

Lift handset Dial “77” Dial lock

#
Dl
Dial “#” Hang up
code

To Cancel

Dial “#” Hang up

Lift handset Dial “762W ’

0 Lock code must be 3 numerical digits except

for the “#“and “JC” button.

Hang up

To stoD the Alarm tone

Lift handset

5-16
 Use of Other Features (cont.)

Description Description
This feature provides security when Dialing (79#) will reset the following
transmitting data through an extension of the station Features on an extension to
KX-Tl23211. the default data.
Executive override, Call waiting tone and Hold Call Forwarding
time reminder tone from the KX-T123211 are Data Line Security
prohibited in this mode. Dial Call Pickup Deny
Do not Disturb
Call Waiting Tone From CO / Extension Deny
Operation Pick up Dial
Absent Message Capability
Setting Executive Override Deny
Timed Reminder

Operation
Lift handset Dial “73” Dial “0”

I
Lift handset Dial “79#” Hang up

Dial “W” Hang up

KX-T123211 KX-T123211

To Cancel

mp?vq
Lift handset Dial “73”
I
Data terminal
provided with
L !he telephone equipment. -L--J.
xanoard Telephone
tt
PP \

Dial “0” Dial “O#”

unprovided with
the telephone
equipment
Hang up

l This mode cannot prevent external call

waiting tone from coming into KX-T123211
system. We recommend that this mode is
established on a line which has no special
telephone company services.

5-17
 Use of Other Features (cont.)

Description
Picking up the handset automatically dials a To Dial
programmed phone number. ,

- &

Operation
To Program
Pickup handset
for 3-seconds
p&q pijy
If the “Pickup Dial” feature did not work, hang
up for 2 seconds, and lift the handset again.
Lift Dial “742” Dial
handset extension
number
l The 3 seconds may be changed to 1 second, 2
seconds or 4 seconds by programming. (See
page 3-29)
l A rotary phone will not usable for Pickup
p?iQijq Dial.
Dial “#” Hang up l Dialing (speed dialing and manual dialing) is
possible within 3 (1,2 or 4) seconds.
l You may dial 9 or 81 through 88 and When you program for an outside call, enter
phone number instead of extension the line access number,@] [*],account
number. code),and then the desired number.
9... An extension automatically selects an idle l The pickup dial will not be activated by
line within the CO line enable to call. picking up the handset during a hold or
when receiving a call.
81 through 88... An extension selects a trunk l You can not dial “0” instead of pressing the
group designated. “#” button.
o Up to 32 digits can be stored.
To Enable or Disable l The “JC” button is used as the PAUSE.

To enable pickup dial

Lift Dial “741#” Hang up

handset

To disable pickup dial

Dial “740#” Hang up

handset

5-18
 TROUBLESHOOTING

PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE POSSIBLE SOLUTION

Extension does not operate. Bad printed circuit board Exchange printed circuit board for another
(LC-Card) printed circuit board. /
- >
Bad connection between the Take that extension and plug it into the same
system and extension extension port using a short telephone cord.
If telephone does not work, connection between
the system and the extension must be repaired.

A telephone with an A-Al Use a 2 wires cord.

relay is connected. Set the A-Al relay switch of the telephone to
“OUT” or “OFF” position.
Bad extension Take that extension and plug it into another
extension port that is working. If the telephone
does not work, replace the phone.

Improper reset operation Press the Reset Button.

Noise in external paging Induced noise on the wire Use a shielded cable as the connection wire
between the System and the between the System and Amplifier.
Amplifier. A short shielded cable is recommended.

Volume distortion from Excessive input level from Decrease the Output level of the external music
external music source external music source source by using the Volume Control on the music
source.

Speed dialing or One Touch Bad programming Enter the line access code (9) or trunk group
Dialing dose not function. access code (81 through 88) into programming.

A dial tone (short tone The host PBX may have Use the handset instead of the speakerphone.
continuously) was heard caused the line to hang up
and telephone line hung up when the KX-T123211 was
at once when accessing an connected to it.
outside during the
speakerphone mode.

6-l
 Connection between the KX-Tl23211 and the Proprietary telephone

CAUSE SOLiJTiON

The T/R is connected to the

Can you dial an
extension r l
Dl/D2.
Use the correct cord (inner 2 wires
are for T/R and the outer 2 wires are
for Dl/D2)

KX-Tl23211 extension

The Pl/P2 is connected to Use the correct cord&(2 wires

the Dl/D2. second from the outside for Dl/D2
and the outer 2 wires are for Pl/P2)

I I I

KX-Tl23211 extension

Connection between the KX-Ti 23211 and a standard -telephone.

I CAUSE SOLUTION

Yes The T/R is connected to the Use the correct cord (inner 2 wires
Dl/D2. are for T/R).
0 If a telephone equipped with an
A-Al relay is connected to the
KX-Ti 23211, set the A-Al
relay switch of the telephone to
OFF.
I KX-Tl23211 extension

Connection between the KX-Tl2321 I and a standard telephone that is polarity sensitive.

CAUSE SOLUTION

The “T” is connected to the Reverse the connections of the T/R.

“R”.

KX-Tl23211 extension

Connection between the Central Office and the KX-Tl23211

CAUSE I SOLUTION

CO lines are connected to Reconnect the CO lines to the T/R

the Dl/D2. of the telephone jack using
1 I I 2-conductor wiring.

Can you dial out

on an CO line
No
w

I
43
CO line
1

KX-=
l T
OR

6-2
 PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE POSSIBLE SOLUTION-

Extension does not operate. The Power failure switch of Set the Power failure switch to OFF.
the KX-T123230, KX-T123235
KX-T61631, KX-T61630 or
KX-T30830 is set to ON.
,
When using the The HANDSET/ HEADSET When the headset is not used, se<Ihe HANDSET/
speakerphone mode, selector of the KX-T123230, HEADSET selector to the “HANDSET” position.
nothing is heard. KX-T61631, KX-T61630 or
KX-T30830 is set to the
“HEADSET” position.

The unit does not ring. *Ringer Volume Selector is @Set to “HIGH” or “LOW”.
set to “OFF”.
l The CO numbers are not l See “CO Line Ringing Selection” on page 4-62.
programmed.

During a power l The Power failure switch of l Set the Power failure switch to ON.
interruption, the KX-T123230, KX-Tl23235
extensions connected to KX-T61631, KX-T61630 or
jack number 1,2,9,10,17 KX-T30830 is set to OFF.
and 18 do not operate. l The dialing mode (tone or l Set the Tone/Pulse switch to the other position.
pulse) is improper.
.KX-Tl23220, KX-T123250, l Disconnect KX-T123220, KX-T123250,
KX-T61620, KX-T61650, KX-T61620, KX-T61650, KX-T30820,
KX-T30820, KX-T30825 or KX-T30825 or KX-T30850 and connect the
KX-T30850 is connected. KX-T123230, KX-T61631, KX-T61630,
KX-T30830 or a standard telephone.

If the system does not operate properly, use the Reset Note
Button. If the system does not operate properly, push the
l Before using the Reset Button, try the system Reset Button.
feature again to confirm whether there definitely is If the system does not work, switch the power off and
a problem or not. on again after 5 minutes. If the system still does not work,
l Pressing the Reset button will cause the switch the power off.
followings. i The following extensions will be directly connected
to each of the central office lines (C.O.).
1. Camp-on is cleared.
2. Last number redial is cleared. Extension connected to jack number01 ...... CO 1
3. Saved number redial is cleared. Extension connected to jack number02 ...... CO 2
4. Calls on hold are terminated. Extension connected to jack number09 .. .. .. CO 5
5. Calls on exclusive hold are terminated. Extension connected to jack number 10 ...... CO 6
6. Calls in progress are terminated. Extension connected to jack number17 . . .. .. CO 9
Extension connected to jack number18 . . ... . CO10
7. Call park is cleared.
8. Message Waiting is cleared. If the automobile type battery is connected to the
system, disconnect it. * .
Data that are stored in memory except above
mentioned will not be cleared by use of the Reset
Button.

6-3
 i . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . until the desired DTMF receiver appears
To set
until desired mode appears
Enable . . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . default
Disable 1

:..................................................... A= q : to assign to same of all 3 receivers

111 : receiver 1
121: receiver 2
: receiver 3
To confirm
Dial any extension (100 through 199) and listen for that extension to ring,

Description
DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequency) Receiver 10. Press the END button to return to the initial
enables tone telephones to dial within the system. program mode.
To check the DTMF Receivers, activate the DTMF
11. Set the System Program Switch to the
Receivers at a time and confirm if the receiver can
“SET” position.
receive tone singals.

Confirmation of DTMF Receiver 1:

Operation at Extension Connected to Jack
Number 1. 1. Set the DIALING MODE (located on the rear of
To Remove DTMF Receive 2 and 3: KX-T123230 or KX-T123235) switch to the TONE
position.
1. Set the System Program Switch on the
KX-Tl23211 to the “PITS” position. 2. Set the POWER FAILURE (located on the rear of
KX-Tl23230 or KX-T123235) switch to the ON
2. Dial (30) to enter the DTMF mode.
position.
“DTMF-R Selection” will be displayed.
3. Dial the extension number (100 through 199).
3. Press the NEXT button.
“DTMF-R NO?+” will be displayed. 4. If DTMF Receiver is bad, do the following
procedure for removing the DTMF Receiver
4. Press the NEXT button, twice, or dial (2).
after the next step on this section.
“DTMF-R2 : Enable” will be displayed.
5. Set the POWER FAILURE Switch-to the OFF
5. Press the SELECT button to change to
position.
“Disable”.
“DTMF-R2 : Disable” will be displayed. l To check DTMF Receiver 2, remove DTMF
Receiver 1 and confirm that DTMF Receiver 2 is
6. Press the MEMORY button.
good by the procedures of “To Remove DTMF
7. Press the NEXT button, or press the SELECT Receiver 1 and 3” and “Confirmation of DTMF
button and then dial (3). Receiver 2”. .
c
“DTMF-R3 : Enable” will be displayed. l To check DTMF Receiver 3, remove DTMF
6. Press the SELECT button to change to Receiver 1 and confirm that DTMF Receiver 3 is
“Disable”. good by the procedures of “To Remove DTMF
Receiver 1 and 2” and “Confirmation of DTMF
9. Press the MEMORY button.
Receiver 3”.
6-4
 Table of System Features
The following system features can be oroarammed I -
into memorv.,

Dial Plan Code System Features Dial Plan Code System Features
i
Zxtension no. Individual Inter Office Calling Cancelling Message Waiting
1100 through 199)

•l 1 Busy Station Signaling Cancelling Calk Forwarding

Do Not Disturb
or

Executi.ve Override-into
Extension
Call Forwarding-All Calls

Calling Doorphone 1 or 2

Call Forwarding-Busy or
Paging-External Equipment 1 No Answer
and 2

Paging-External Equipment 1
Call Forwarding-To Outside Line

Paging-External Equipment 2
(YOU may enter 8 and trunk
group number 1 through 8
instead of 91

Group no.
(1 through 8) Paging Group
Do Not Disturb

Paging All Extensions Cancelling Dial Call Pickup Deny

Paging All Extensions Dial Call Pickup Deny

and External

-[ Data line Security

Paging Answer-External
Equipment 1 or 2
-[ Cancelling Data line Security

Paging Answer-Group- .
All Extensions
-[ CO Call Waiting Tone Deny

Dial Call Pickup

-I Cancelling
Deny
CO Call Waiting Tone

Call Park Retrieve

I Extension
Dew ,
Call Waiting Tone
.

Camp-on 1 Cancelling
Tone Deny
Extension Call Waiting

6-5
 Table of System Features (cont.)

Dial Plan Code System Features Dial Plan Code System Featu

Timed Reminder

Cancelling Absent Message

Message “Will Return Soon”

Cancelling Timed Remir

Message “Gone Home”

Electronic Station Lock

Message “Back at IO:00 AM.”

Minute (00 through 59)
Cancelling Electronic St,
Lock

Month (01 through 12) Message “Out Until 10/23”

q q mm Day
Mode Flexible Night Service-

Flexible Night Service-

.

Message “In a Meeting” Station Program Clear

6-6
 LIST OF TONES

Confirmation tone 1

Confirmation tone 2
I I ,_ :
: -,:
Confirmation tone 3
I Ii
Feature activation tone

Dial tone

Busy tone

Account Code
input tone

Reorder tone

Ringback tone

Do not Disturb tone

Call on hold tone

Alarm tone

Hold time reminder

Call waiting tone

LIST OF RING TONES

: 1 set :
4 ti

CO calls
(CO hold recall) ! I !
Intercom calls
(Intercom hold recall) 1 I I

Doorphone calls
Timed reminder
Recall for camp-on

6-7
 SPECIFICATION
General Description
1. Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outsides
Max.12
Stations Max.32
2. ControlMethod....................................... Stored Program CPU : 16 bits CPU
Control ROM: 192 KB, Control RAM : 64KB
3. Switching . .. ... .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. ... .. .. ... . .. ... .. .. .. ..
Space Division CMOS Crosspoint Switch
4. power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Primary
AC 12OV 60Hz - >
Secondary Station Supply Volt : 26V
Circuit Volt : +5V, +12V, -14V, -16V, *7V
Power Failure *Max.6 outsides assigned to stations . . .. ..power
failure transfer
l System operation for several hours by recommended
. battery (car type batteries - consisting of two 12 VDC)

5. Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outward
Dial Pulse IOPPS, 20PPS
Tone Dial
Internal Dial Pulse IOPPS, 20PPS
Tone Dial
Mode Conversion DP-DTMF, DTMF-DP
6. Intercom paths . .. ... .. .. .. ... .. .. ... . ... .. .. ... .. . .. . 5

7. Outside (CO)-Outside (CO) paths........ 2

8. Connector .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. ... .. .. .. ... .. .. ... .. . ... Outsides (CO) Modular Jack (RJ-11)
Station Amphenol Connector
Paging Output Pin Jack (RCA JACK)
External Music Input two-conductors Jack (MINIJACK 9/64 inch
diameter)
9. EXT Connection . .. .. . .. ... .. .. ... .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. Cable 1 pair wire (Standard Telephone)
2 pair wire (KX-T1232301 KX-T123220/
KX-T123250/ KX-T61630/ KX-T61620/
KX-T61631/ KX-T61650/ KX-T30825/
KX-T30830/ KX-T30820/ KX-T30850)
3 pair wire (KX-T123235)
10. SMDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface RS-232C
Station Message
Detail Recording 1 Output Equipment
Detail Recording
Printer, Data Terminal
Data, Time, Ext. Number, CO Number,
Calling Number, Calling Time, Account
Code
Characteristics
1. Station Loop Limit . .. ... .. .. ... .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. ... . KX-T123230/ KX-T123220/ KX-T123250/ KX-Tl23235/
KX-T61630/ KX-T61620/ KX-T61650/ KX-T61631/ KX-T3d825
KX-T30830/ KX-T30820/ KX-T30850 40 ohms
Standard Telephone 600 ohms including set
Doorp hone 20 ohms
2. Minimum Leak Resistance . ... . .. ... .. ... .. .. .15,000 ohms
3. Maximum Number of Station
Instruments per Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 (KX-T123230, KX-T123220, KX-T123250, KX-T123235, KX-T61630,
KX-T61631, KX-T61620, KX-T61650, KX-T30830, KX-T30820, KX-T30850,
or Standard telephone)
KX-T30825 .
4. Ring Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Vrms at 20 Hz depends on Ringing Load I
5. primary power .. .. .. .. ... . .. .. ... .. .. .. ... .. .. ... .. .. . 120 Vat, 60 Hz, 1.4 A maximum
6. Central Office Loop Limit..................... 1600 ohms maximum
7. Environmental Requirements...............O-40 C, 10%90%
8. Hookswitch Flash Timing Range.........204-1000 msec

6-8
 TELEPHONE COMPANY and F.C.C. - :
REQUIREMENTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES
In compliance with the requirements of Part 68 of the F.C.C. Rules and Regulations for connection of terminal system
(this device is classified as terminal system) to the telephone network and for your convenience, the following
information is presented:

1. Notification to the Telephone Company

Customers, before connecting terminal equipment to the telephone network, shall upon request of the Telephone
Company, inform the Telephone Company of the particular line(s) to which such connection iS made, the F.C.C.
registration number and (see label on side of unit.) ringer equivalence number of the registered terminal equipment.
The REN is useful to determine the quantity of devices you may connect to your telephone line and still have all 01
those devices ring when your telephone number is called. In most, but not all areas, the sum of the REN’s of all
devices connected to one line should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices you may connect
to your line, as determined by the REN, you should contact your local telephone company to determine the maximum
REN for your calling area.

2. Direct connection to A Party-line or Coin-operated Telephone Lines is Prohibited

3. Incidence of Harm to The Telephone lines

Should Terminal Equipment cause harm to the Telephone Network, the Telephone Company shall, where practical,
notify the customer that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. However, where prior notice is not
practical, the Telephone Company may temporarily discontinue service forthwith, if such action is reasonable in
the circumstances. In case of such unnotified temporary discontinuance of service, the Telephone Company shall:

(a) Promptly notify the customer of such temporary discontinuance of service.

(b) Afford the customer the opportunity to correct the situation which gave rise to the temporary discontinuance.

(c) Inform the customer of the right to bring a complaint to the Commission pursuant to the procedures set out
in Subpart E of Part 68 of FCC Telephone Equipment Rules.

6-9
4. Compatibility of The Telephone Network and Terminal Equipment

(a) Availability of telephone interface information.

Technical information concerning interface parameters and specifications is not specified in FCC Rules,
including the number of Ringers which may be connected to a particular telephone line, which is needed to
pertmit Terminal Equipment to operate in a manner compatible with Telephone Company;communications
facilities, shall be provided by the Telephone Company upon customer’s request.

(b) Changes in Telephone Company Communications Facilities, Equipment, Operations and Procedures.
The Telephone Company may make changes in its communications facilities, equipment, operations or
procedures, where such action is reasonably required in the operation of its business and is not inconsistent
with the rules and regulations in FCC Part 68 of the FCC Rules and Regulations. If such changes can be
reasonably expected to render any customer Terminal Equipment incompatible with Telephone Company
Communications Facilities, or require modification or alteration of such Terminal Equipment, or otherwise
materially affect its use or performance, the customer shall be given adequate notice in writing, to allow the
customer an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service.

6-10
 OTHERS

l Keep the unit away from heating appliances and electrical noise generating devices
such as fluorescent lamps, motors and television. These noise sources can interfere
with the performance of the EASA-PHONE.

l This unit should be kept free of dust, moisture, high temperature and vibration, and
should not be exposed to direct sunlight. /

l Never attempt to insert wires, pins, etc . into the vents or other holes of this unit

l If there is trouble, disconnect the unit from the telephone line. Plug the telephone
directly into the telephone line. If the telephone operates properly, do not reconnect
the unit to the line until the trouble has been repaired by an authorized Panasonic
Factory Service Center. If the telephone does not operate properly, chances are that
the trouble is in the telephone system, and not in the unit.

l Do not use benzine, thinner, or similar solvents. Do not use abrasive powder to‘clean
the cabinet. Wipe it with a soft cloth.

6-11
 Servicenter Directory

“WARNING -This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency
energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions manual,
may cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of-Part
15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such
interference when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this
equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference in which case the
user at his own expense will be required to take whatever measures may be
required to correct the interference.”

WARNING: TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT

EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
I I

6-l 2
 Phone Number Directory

b TELEPHONE NUMBER 4
) “p 1 TEL NO. 1) C40 1 TELNO. I co I TEL NO. 11 CO 1 TELN0.c .I

2 5
3 6

b EXTENSION NUMBER 4
JACK NO. EXTENSION NUMBER NAME JACK NO. EXTENSION NUMBER NAhilE
I
1 I 17 I
18
19

8
9

14
15 31
32

b SPEED DIALING 4
b SPEED DIALING 4

7-2
 PROGRAMMING TABLE - :

TO SET ;;;;,“,” STEPS REQUIRED TO CHANGE PROGRAM

late and Time
jetting El Gia~m~m~m~m~m~m~&~
m..‘year :..,month i...,,ay : :......,,,,ur i . . .._ minute I . . . . . . AM / PM
‘.- day of the week

System Speed
Iialing Entry I
~FMoRy’ IENd 2
: automatic line access number
q through q H : access number of Trunk Group

:......-Speed access code (00 through 99)

l There is the phone number directory on page 7-1.

!xtension
slumber I
4ssignment IEl IEEl & yd-yiw
:.....dial the extension number (100 through 199)
:.........,until the desired jack number(O1 through32)appears ’

Iperator
issignment I
EJ bEI+ laal TORY’ IENQl
-....dial the jack number set operator (01 through 32)
:....-until the desired operator number (1 or 2) appears
Jack number set operator
Operator 1

Jack number set operator

Operator 2

‘aired
-elephone la GaGaymGaymm
issignment for -..-dial the jack number paired with console 2 (01 through 32)
ES Console :..... dial the jack number paired with console 1 (01 through 32) i

Jack number paired with Console 1

Default 01
To make program change

Default
To make program change

Automatic CO .
I
Hold Using DSS la liiialsELECTl[MEMORYm
Button i..... With Transfer / Without Transfer
Default To make program change
With Transfer X

Without Transfer

7-3
 TO SET ;;;;g STEPS REQUIRED TO CHANGE PROGRAM
Day/ Night
3ewjce la kE?l~NlENol
Mode “““Manual / Automatic
Switching of
Service Mode Manual X
Automatic

,
Starting Time
El
:-----until the desired day of the week appears

,NEm&m~~m~m~~m~,-
A
I :--minute L--AM I PM
L----starting time for day service (hour)

;----starting time for night service (hour)

;---minute r-----AM I PM

-&~&let>~IYE?.lORYI~

Default To make program change

all days of the week Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday
Day service 9:00 AM
night Service 5:00 PM

:all Hunting + 1
Setting lQa lia &d k&zl hdFMoRyl GGI
:.......... Disable / Enable
:......- until the desired extension group number (1 through 8)appears

all 8 extension Extension group

group 1 group 2 group 3 group 4 group5 group 6 group-7 group 8
Disable X
Enable

Hunting Type
I
bl =&$=-w
. . . . . ..Terminate / Circular
‘.......’ until the desired extension group number (1 through 8)appears
_.
all 8 extension Extension group
group 1 group 2 group3 group 4 group5 group 6 group 7 group 8
Terminate X
Circular

7-4
 TO SET ;;g;s STEPS REQUIRED TO CHANGE PROGRAM
011 Restriction Ii3 Ga-mm -

Area Type ....... Type Al Type B I Type C

Selection

We A X
_ We B

CO Operator
Call-Boundary liil Ga@lnnEMoRvla
Class ‘.........dial the boundary class number (1 through 8)

Class 1 Class 2 Class 3 Class 4 Class 5 Class 6 Class 7 Class 8

Default X
To make program change

roil Restriction
)f System El Gay-m
speed Dialing
....... Restriction / No restriction
-
Default To make program change
Restriction X
No restriction

Allowable
Exchange
Code Selection lzl Ga&mIUEMbRVIm
i.....exchange code with3digits
:.......... until the desired memory code number (01 through 20) appears
Memory code number
01 1 02 1 03 1 04 1 05 1 06 1 07 1 08
exchange code entry I I I I I I I
Memory code number
09 1 10 1 11 1 12 1 13 1 14 1 15 1 16 1 17 1 18 1 19 1 20
I I I I I I I I I I I

Area Code Entry I

for Class 3 m =&=qL”ORYl~
-....- area code with 3 digits
:.......... until the desired memory code number (01 through 20) appears

Memory code number

01 1 02 1 63 1 04 1 05 1 06 1; 07 1 08
Area code entry I I I I I .
Memory code number
09 1 10 1 11 1 12 1 13 1 14 1 15 1 16 1 17 1 18 1 19 1 20
I I I I I I I I I I I

7-5
 TO SET ;;;zs STEPS REQUIRED TO CHANGE PROGRAM

roll Restriction
:cont.) 1
kl ki+t~k.o~~~6iii
Exchange Code -.*..- exchange code with 3 digits
Entry for Class 5
:.......... until the desired memory code number (01 through 20) appears

Memory code number ’

01 t 02 1 03 t 04 t 05 1 06 t 07 1 08
exchange code entry I I I I I I I

Memory code number

09 1 10 t 11 t 12 1 13 t 14 1 15 1 16 1 17 1 18 1 19 1 20
I I I I I I I I I I I
Exchange Code
Entry for Class 7 I
Ea i.Ed &pflFMORYl lmul
. . . . ..exchange code with Bdigits
:.......... until the desired memory number (01 through 20) appears

Memory code number

01 1 02 1 03 1 04 1 05 1 06 1 07 1 08
Exchange code entry I I I I I I I

Memory code number

09 1 10 1 11 t 12 t 13 1 14 1 15 1 16 1 17 1 18 1 19 1 20
I I I I I I I I I I I

iold Time
qeminder w liaymm
..........dial the time (1 minute through 9 minutes)

Default X
To make program change

iold Recall
rime Set Eil IiiEil-wm
“““30 set! 1 min / 1.5 min I 2 min I Disable

301 seconds
30 seconds. 1 minute minute 2 minutes disable

Default X
To make program change

‘ransfer Recall
Fime Et lizEl~-m
........30 secl2 min

Default To make program change

30 set X
2 min

7-6
 TO SET I;;;= STEPS REQUIRED TO CHANGE PROGRAM
-
Zall Forwarding
Starting Time lzil liiamlNlEMORYla
:..........l ring delay/ 2 rings delay/ 3 rings delay/ 4 rings delay

Default To make program change

1 ring delay
2 rings delay
3 rings delay X
4 rings delay - L

‘ickup Dial
Ielay Time (211 lNEXrlTrnI
...,.,.....l set I 2 set 1 3 set I 4 set

To make program change

1 set
2 set
3 set
4 set

:o-to-co
Duration Time Eil EiEEllalUEMoRVm
.imit I...........- dial the time (1 minute through 32 minutes)

w Default I To make program change

minute I 10 1

;MDR
(Carriage return for a new line)
RS232C
Communication m lNEXTllzyliiiiGJ
Parameters . . . . ..CR +LF/ CR

To make program change

CR+LF
CR

(Baud rate)

INEXTllSELECTllhnEMORY
‘.....llOB/ 15081 30081 600B/ 120081 240081 4800Bl 96008

Default
To make program change

(Word length)

INEX;T1lSELECTlm
i..... 7 bits! 8 bits
To make program change
7 bits
8 bits
.

7-7
 TO SET ,“,“,;&f STEPS REQUIRED TO CHANGE PROGRAM
SMDR (cont.) (Parity)

ml~Lizz%ma
‘...“None / Mark / Space I Even/ Odd

None Mark Space Even Odd

Default X
To make program change /
- 5

(Stop bit length)

tiiaqzllaaEaapar]m
“‘.“l bit / 2 bits

1 bit
2 bits

SMDR (Page length)

Parameters
la EEmpal
*.e......... 4 through 99 lines

(Skip perforation)

/iiEl(ABI(MEMORY1~~
..........’ 0 through 95 lines

Incoming/
Outgoing Call IEl m~GiiiEmm~~m
Selection for ““.‘Outgoing : On/Off ..,....-.,lncoming : On/Off
printing
Outgoing Incoming
ON OFF ON OFF
Default X X
To make program change

Secret Speed
Dial / One ia Ga~LiiGElta
Touch Dial ‘....*..‘No Printing / Printing
Printing
Default To make program change .
No Printing X
Printing

7-S
 TO SET ;;zzz STEPS REQUIRED TO CHANGE PROGRAM
-
SMDER (cont.) l All Parameters
System Data 0 System Parameter
Dump l Speed Dial
0 stop output
t I
12 m- ~ORYI~
:.....A11 Para / System Para I CO Para / EXT Para / DSS Para / Speed Dia! / Stop Output
- .

0 CO Parameter
+ I
iid- kiiiidh.BhIF~ORY~ kCd
*.......dial the CO number (01 through 12)
:.........‘until the CO Para appears

l Extension Parameter
+ 1

,.....dial jack number (01 through 32)

:.........‘until the EXT Para appears

l DSS Parameter
+ I

...... dial DSS number (1 or 2)

..........‘until the DSS Para appears

Duration Time
Count Start Mode El lEaqzImm
........... Instantly/ 5s after dial / 10s after dial I 15s after dial
To make program change
Instantly
5s after dial X
1 OS after dial
15s after dial

%ernal Paging
kcess Tone

..........until the desired external paging equipment number (1 or 2) appears

7-9
 TO SET PROGRAM
ADDRESS
STEPS REQUIRED TO CHANGE PROGRAM

Direct Inward (Control code “ *“)

System Access El
(DISA) INEXTI~~

‘....- Enable / Disable

I Default To make program change
Enable X
Disable I /
-z
(Prolong time)

+EFTlISELECTITI#EMORYI

‘--..- 2 min / 3 min I4 min I 5 min

2 minutes 3 minutes 4 minutes 5 minutes
Default X
To make program change

(Answer delay time)

[NEXTIJSELECT(TllvlEMORYl

‘....- 0 set I5 set I 10 set I15 set

0 second 5 seconds 10 seconds 15 seconds
Default X
To make program change

(Tone detect)

[-ISELECTIpm

-‘.‘.- Enable / Disable

Default To make program change
Enable X
Disable

(Security type)

pEjElmFm[

‘....- None Security I Trunk Security

I All Security

None Security Trunk Security All Security

Default X
To make program change

(Remote security code)

mlzEmEymNo.

‘....- 4 digits (0000 through 9999)

Default I To make program change _

70000

(User security code)

NEXT
00~~00 SELECT SELECT CODE No MEMORY END

‘....- 4 digits (0000 through 9999)

.
I..... User Code 1 / User Code 2 / User Code 3 / User Code 4
Default To make program change
User code 1 60000
User code 2 60000
User code 3 60000
User code 4 60000

7- 10
 TO SET PROGRAM
ADDRESS
STEPS REQUIRED TO CHANGE PROGRAM
-
Off Premise
Extension Is lNEXTllzyEE3lnnEMORYIlENDl

:....- Disable I Enable

Default To make program change

Enable
Disable X /
_ 5

Off Hook Call

Announcement $31 jiimyIUEMORYIIEND(
(OHCA)
‘....- Disable / Enable

Default To make program change

Enable X
Disable

System
Working 13 lNEXTll5EplIUEMORYIlENDl
Report
:....- Dump Start / Dump Stop / SWR Data Clear

Default To make program change

Dump Stat-l X
Dump Stop
SWR Data Clear

7- 11
 TO SET 'ROGRAM
rDOREss STEPS REQUIRED TO CHANGE PROGRAM
ZO Connection
tssignment t I
IGil
@ExIly VI lMmoRy’ lEa
-............- Connect / Not Connect
:........until the desired CO number (01 through 12)appears

Dial Mode

DTMF / Pulse / IEI :.......... DTMF Mode / Pulse Mode / Call Blocking Mode
Call Blocking
Selection :...*.*....until the desired CO number (01 through 12) appears
1 Default 1 Tomake orooram cr- large
CO number
all CO’s
01 1 02 1 03 1 04 ) 05 1 06 1 07 1 08 1 09 1 10 1 11 1 12
Tone (DTMF) Mode X I I I I I I II I-
I
I I
Pulse Mode ! ! ! ! I I I I I !
Call Blocking Mode 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I
Pulse Speed
Selection + I
la =@v-w
...........Low Speed / High Speed
......-...’ until the desired CO number (01 through 12) appears

Host PBX Access

Codes
Assignment
IGI
I
=+v hEcdORyIkMQl ...... ....... up to 8 outside access codes each with a maximum of 2 digits
.......... until the desired CO number (01 through 12) appears

7-12
 ‘TO SET ;E;E STEPS REQUIRED TO CHANGE PROGRAM
.
drunk Group + I
4ssignment
El iia w $lr!mfORYI IENd
-.........‘dial the trunk group number (1 through 8)
-...... until the desired CO number (01 through 12) appears

Trunk group 7 I I I I I I I I I I
Trunk group 8 I

7-13
 TO SET E;zEz STEPS REQUIRED TO CHANGE PROGRAM
other CO number
Flexible
3utward Dialing
9ssignment El
L......- Enable I Disable
Day Mode i...... until the desired ‘ack number (01 through 32) appears
...... until the desired CO num b er (01 through 12)appears

I I

7-14
 TO SET ‘ROGRAM
\ODRESS
STEPS REQUIRED TO CHANGE PROGRAM
other CO number
Flexible
Outward Dialing
Assignment la
[cont.) : ....... Enable / Disable
: ...... until the desired ‘ack number (01 through 32) appears
:..... until the d&i&d CO nul mb er ~~
(01 throuoh
_ _a-- 121
.-I annears
-r-r---.-
Night Mode

To make program change

Jack number
17118119120121 ~22~23~24~25~26~27~28(29130131 132

co1
Enable I I I I I I I
Disable
Co 2 Enable I I I 1 I I
Disable I I I I
! I I I I I I I I I
 TO SET ,‘;;;Ez STEPS REQUIRED TO CHANGE PRO.GRAM

qlexible Ringing
bsignment

Day Mode :.......,Enable/ Disable

L:..... until,the desired ‘ack number (01 through 32) appears
*..... until the desired CO num b er (01 through 12)appears

7-16
 TO SET 'ROGFtAM
rDDRESS
STEPS REQUIRED TO CHANGE PROGRAM
other CO number
Flexible Ringing
Assignment
[cent .) 14
Night Mode L...... until the desired ‘ack number (01 through 32)appears
:..... until the desired CO num b er (01 throuoh - 121, appears
Default 1 To makt ? program change
I \ all jack Jack number ’

To make program change 1

I \ I Jack number
\ 17 18 19 20 121 ~22~23~24~25~26~27~28~29~30~31 132
Co 1 Enable I I I I I
Disable

Co 1o Enable
Disable
Co 11 Enable

Co12 Enable I I I I I I I l l I l
Disable I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

7-17
 TO SET I;;;&$ STEPS REQUIRED TO CHANGE PROGRAM

3elayed Ringing other CO number

4ssignment

Day Mode LEI

L...-..- ImmdtlyI lring / Pring I3ring
I......until the desired ‘ack number (01 through32)appears
...... until the desired CO num b er (01 through 12)appears

7-18
 TO SET 3OGRAM
IDRESS
STEPS REQUIRED TO CHANGE PROGRAM

belayed Ringing
assignment To make program change

Day Mode
(cont.)

7-19
 TO SET ROGRAM
DDRESS
STEPS REQUIRED TO CHANGE PROGRAM
-
Ielayed Ringing
Lssignment To make program change
Jack number
Night Mode 17118119120121 122123124125126127128129130131 132
(cont.) I Imm,-ltl\r IIIIIIIIII I I I I I

7-21
 TO SET ROGFIAM
DDRESS
STEPS REQUIRED TO CHANGE PROGRAM
:O Mode (Normal I
IL I DISA) l Selecting the “Normal” or “DISA” mode
issignment

Day Mode
m : . . . . . . . . . . . . . Normal , DlS/,

:........until the desired CO number (01 through 12) appears

l Selecting the “DIL” mode ,
- -.
t I
IiEJ F ISEy q
htmORY1 lEtd
*...DIL .*..a...... Dial jack number (01 through 32)
..........I until the desired CO number (01 through 12) appears

When “DIL” mode

CO number
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12

Jack number

Night Mode l Selecting the “Normal” or “DISA” mode

El :. ........... . Normal , ,-,,SA

:........unti I the desired CO number (01 through 12) appears

l Selecting the “DIL” mode

liEii~L&izlm&m
i....D,Li
..........Dial jack number (01 through 32)
.........” until the desired CO number (01 through 12) appears

1 Default 1 To make program change

When “DIL” mode

CO number
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12

Jack number

7-22
 -Tb SET PROGRAM
mbREss ’ STEPS REQUIRED TO CHANGE PROGRAM
L
‘ause Time I
ssignment
lifzl =+y-w
.........‘.1.5sec I 2.5sec I 3.5sec I 4.5sec
I.......... until the desired CO number (01 through 12) appears

iookswitch Flash
‘iming led = + -~ORyIIF~
-““‘-300ms I 600ms / 9OOms / 1200ms

>alling Party
!-until the desired CO number (01 through 12) appears
Zontrol (CPC)
signal

_---- AB = flm : Disable

qm : under 5 m seconds
pJJ:
is not available
pJm: : J
q a : 62 m seconds
q B: 70

q@ : 350 ---- default (all 12 Co’s)

q ‘B : 614
See the “CPC Signal Detect Time table” page 3-63.

Default To make program change

CO number
all CO’s
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12

350 m set

7-23
 TO SET ;;;:gz STEPS REQUIRED TO CHANGE PROGRAM
L
Disconnect Time
la Ed
wm
-“-“-1.5secl 4.0sec
v...... until the desired CO umber (01 through 12) appears

Automatic I
Designated Is lia
CO Line + FkORYIM
Access -.....- Enable/Disable
a...... until the desired CO number (01 through 12) appears

7-24
 TO SET E;iEy STEPS REQUIRED TO CHANGE PROGRAM .
Service Class
Assignment of El Ed hfXIi Q [MEMhiiiid
Toll Restriction
:....-dial the service class number (1 through 8)
[cont.)
:.......until the desired jack number (01 through 32)appears

Night Mode

tiension
Jame

El GGi3-m

#......‘until the desired letter appears

:..*..... dial (0 through 9, * , or # )
:....... until the desired jack number (01 through 32) appears

l There is the phone number directory on page 7-l.

account Code I
iput Mode IEl =&w-m
*-Option I Forced

7-26
 TO SET LT;$ STEPS REQUIRED TO CHANGE PROGRAM

Zall Transfer I
ToOutside Line m m
+-Mm
-- Enable I Disable
i-...-.until the desired jack number (01 through32)appears

Tall Forwarding
To Outside Line m m
+mAi
:- Enable / Disable
:......-until the de

%ecutive
3verride

i - Enable / Disable

7-27
 :.....-until the ber (01 through 32) appears
:..... until the desired er (1 or 2) appears

See More
Panasonic Manuals

www.voicesonic.com
Phone: 877-289-2829

3DQDVRQLF7HOHSKRQH6\VWHPV

7-28
 TO SET ;;;;g STEPS REQUIRED TO CHANGE PROGRAM

Unging another doorphone number

assignment other jack number
d I VI
Ioorphone 171) ~yxyl~ riwoRY’~
cont.) *......- Enable / Disable
:...... until the desired jack number (01 through 32) appears
-....’ until the desired doorphone number (1 or 2) appears
Night Mode

>all on Hold for

standard Q lazigm(SP101
relephone i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,,,-J,,~,,,,o,&~

Default To make program change

Hold-l X

Hold-2

system Data
l All Parameters
Zlear lia
0 System Parameter
l Speed Dial
t 1

mIsF’Fcd-w
-.....‘......- All Para / System Para / CO Para I EXT Para / DSS,Pala / Speed Dial

l CO Parameter
t I
=--y-M
m.....dial CO number (01 through 12)
:........- until the CO Para appears
--
-
. Extension Parameter
I
= y liiisia + lblFMORY’ ~
:....-dial jack number(01 through32)
:-.........until the EXT Para appears

l DSS Parameter
1
~~~~-~
-....-dial DSS number (1 or 2)
L........- until the DSS Para appears
9* , INDEX - =
. Programming Page
A. Account Code Input Mode ............... 3-71 Ii. Hold Recall Time Set ................... 3-26
Allowable Exchange Code Selection ....... 3-21 HoId Time Reminder ............. .*., ..... 3-21j
Area Code Entry For Class 3 ............. 3-22 HookSwitch Flash Timing h. aep. . a. e. 1. * . . 3-61
AreaTypeS&c~ion .................... 3-18 Host PBX Access Codes Assignment ...... 3-51
HuntingType ......................... 3-16
Automatic CO Hold Using DSS Button ...... 3-11
Automatic Designated CO Line Access a . . * 1 3-65
I. Incoming I Outgoing Call Select&% For Printing 3-36

c. Call Fonvarding Staping Time ............ 3-28

0. Off Hook Call Anouncement (OHCA) ....... 3-46
Call Forwarding ToOutside Line .......... 3-73
Off Premise Extension (OPX), ............. 3-45
CalI Hunting .......................... 3-15
Operator Assignment ................... 3-9
Call on Hold for Standard Telephone ....... 3-77
Outward Dialing Assignment ............. 3-53
Call Transfer To Outside line ............. 3-72
Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal e . . * . 1 . . * 3-62 P. Paired Telephone Assignment For DSS Console 3-l 0
CO Connection Assignment .............. 3-48 Pause Time Assignment ................. 3-60

CO Mode (Normal / Direct In Line / Direct Inward Pickup Dial Delay Time ... + ............. 3-29
System Access) Assignment ............. 3-57 Pulse Speed Selection ................. 3-50
CO Operator Call-Boundary Class ........ 3-19
CO-to-CO Duration Time Limit .......... 3-30 R. Ringing Assignment .................... 3-54
RS-232C Communication Parameters . . e. . 3-32
D. Date and Time Setting .................. 3-4
Day / Night Service (Switching Mode) * . * 1* . 3-12
S. Secret Speed Dial / One Touch Dial Printing .... 3-36
SMDR Parameters ..................... 3-35
Day / Night Service (Starting Time) * . * . * . * v 3-13
Starting Time {Day / Night Service) ........ 3-13
Delayed Ringing Assignment ............. 3-56
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) .. 3-31
Dial Mode (DTMF/Pulse/CalI Blocking) Selection 3-49
System Data Clear ..................... 3-78
Direct In Line ......................... 3-57
System Data Dump .................... 3-37

Direct Inward System Access (DISA) * * * ’ 3-42, 3-57

System Speed Dialing Entry ............. 3-5
Disconnect Time ...................... 3-64
System Working Report ................. 3-47
Do Not Disturb Override ................. 3-75 Switching of Day / Night Service Mode ..... 3-12
Doorphone ........................... ‘J-76

DSS Console (Paired Telephone Assignment) 3-10 T. Toll Restriction ........................ 3-l 7

Duration Time Count Start Mode .......... 3-40 Toll Restriction-Service Class Assignment .... 3-67
Toll Restriction of System Speed Dial&g .... 3-20
E. Exchange Code Selection ............... 3-21 TransferRecallTime .... ..a.-= .......... 3-27
Exchange Code Entry For Class 5 ......... 3-23 Trunk Group Assignment ................ 3-52
Exchange Code Entry For Class 7 ......... 3-24
Executive Override ..................... 3-74

Extension Name ....................... ‘J-69

Extension Number Assignment ........... 3-8

Extension Group Assignment ............. 3-66
External Paging Access Tone ............. 3-41

7-30